project manual cheatham county highway …...clarksville, tennessee ph-931-647-6301 fx-931-648-0676...

PROJECT MANUAL

CHEATHAM COUNTY

HIGHWAY GARAGE

JANUARY 8, 2020

OWNER

CHEATHAM COUNTY

TENNESSEE

RUFUS JOHNSON ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS

1740 MEMORIAL BLVD. CLARKSVILLE, TENNESSEE

PH-931-647-6301 FX-931-648-0676

CHEATHAM COUNTY TABLE OF CONTENTS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 00 00 03 ________________________________________________________________________________

00 00 03 - 1

DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 00 03 TABLE OF CONTENTS

00 02 00 INVITATION TO BID 00 10 00 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00 22 00 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00 30 00 BID FORM 00 34 00 UNIT PRICES 00 50 00 AGREEMENT FORM

00 60 00 CONTRACT BOND 00 70 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 01 10 SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 02 00 ALLOWANCES 01 02 60 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01 02 70 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 03 50 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 04 00 PROJECT COORDINATION

01 05 00 FIELD ENGINEERING 01 06 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

01 09 50 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 20 00 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 26 20 WEATHER DAYS 01 26 25 WEATHER DELAY REPORT 01 31 00 PROGRESS SCHEDULES 01 34 00 SUBMITTALS 01 39 00 ADMINISTRATIVE LOGS 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 51 00 TERMITE CONTROL TREATMENT 01 63 10 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01 70 00 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT 01 71 00 FINAL CLEANING 01 72 06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS with RECORD DRAWING CHECKLIST ATTACHMENT 01 79 21 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS – N.A. DIVISION 03 CONCRETE

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY


00 00 03 - 2

DIVISION 05 METALS 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 31 00 METAL DECK

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 51 33 INCLINED METAL LADDERS 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 40 23 ARCH WOODWORK DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS 07 21 00 INSULATION 07 21 35 THERMAL BRIDGING BARRIER INSULATION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 08 11 13 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 36 00 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08 41 13 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS THERMALLY BROKEN 08 71 00 FINISH HARDWARE 08 80 01 GLAZING DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 29 00 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE & ACCESSORIES 09 91 00 PAINTING 09 92 00 CONCRETE FLOOR STAIN

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 SIGNAGE 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES

10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 81 00 MIRROR UNITS DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT


00 00 03 - 3

11 15 10 FUEL STATION EQUIPMENT 11 16 20 VEHICLE SERVICE PIT EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS- N.A. DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 01 20 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS 13 34 10 QUONSET HUT

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS – N.A. DIVISION 31 SITEWORK

31 00 00 EARTHWORK 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 31 23 13 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 31 23 19 DEWATERING 31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 25 00 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

DIVISION 32 SITEWORK

32 12 16 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 13 13 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 32 15 00 AGGREGATE SURFACING 32 16 13 SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCE & GATES 32 91 00 LANDSCAPING 32 92 19 SEEDING

DIVISION 33 SITEWORK

33 05 00 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 33 10 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 33 44 13 ENGINEERED SURFACE DRAINAGE PRODUCTS

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY INVITATION TO BID HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 00 02 00

00 02 00 - 1

SECTION 00 02 00 - INVITATION TO BID PROJECT: CHEATHAM COUNTY HIGHWAY GARAGE ARCHITECT: RUFUS JOHNSON ASSOCIATES

1740 MEMORIAL DRIVE, SUITE 2 CLARKSVILLE, TENNESSEE 37043

BRIEF PROJECT DESCRIPTION: This project consists of the construction of three structures for the Cheatham County Highway Department for the purposes of vehicle maintenance, salt storage and fuel dispensing. Proposed is a 6,886 SF Vehicle Maintenance Building, a 2,508 SF Quonset Hut for salt storage and a fuel dispensing station with canopy. The Vehicle Maintenance Building is a pre-engineered metal building structure. The salt storage shed is the typical Quonset Hut style with a vaulted roof structure supported by concrete walls. The Fuel Dispensing station will be under a metal canopy. All structures have concrete slabs and foundations. The Vehicle Maintenance Building has heating only with suspended unit heaters and wall mounted exhaust fans. The Quonset Hut and the fuel dispensing station are under cover, but open to the outside air. Bids for the above project will be received by the County Purchasing Agent at 100 Public Square, Ashland City, TN on January 29, 2020 at 2:15 PM and then at said location publicly opened. A five percent (5%) Bid Security is required. Prime Contractors must register with the Architect as a Bidder of Record to receive notifications, updates and addenda. Bidders of Record shall register by visiting the Architect’s website and following the link to register online: https://rufusjohnsonassociates.com/current-bids Upon registration as a bonafide Bidder of Record, interested parties will be registered for the Official Record, be placed on a Bidders Email List (for future notifications), and receive a link to the Architects’ Document Management site. The site will include all construction documents (in digital format) for download at no cost. All Subcontractors and Vendors may obtain sets of Contract Documents in the same manner as Prime Bidder of Record and is recommended to receive all documents and notifications.

https://rufusjohnsonassociates.com/current-bids


00 02 00 - 2

Additionally, interested parties may view Contract Documents at the following Plan Rooms: Prographics Printing Company https://www.pgplans.com/ Nashville Contractor Association https://www.ncaplanroom.com/ Builders Exchange of TN http://www.bxtn.org/ Dodge Data and Analytics https://www.construction.com/ AGC of TN http://www.tnagc.org/middletn/planroom/ Additionally, all bidders (Prime Contractor, Subcontractor, Vendor, etc.) may obtain printed hard copies of Contract Documents directly from the provider of their choice. Bidders will keep all printed sets and no refund is offered. Only full sets of Documents shall be printed. All parties shall bid the project with full set of documents. The Owner and the Architect shall not be held responsible for insufficient Bids, incomplete work or workmanship because the Bidder did not have a complete set of Contract Documents from which to prepare the bid. Bidders are required to be licensed in accordance with State Law. Non-Discrimination Policy will apply to this project. The Owner reserves the right to waive any informalities or to reject any or all bids. The Contractor (and/or subcontractors) shall be licensed for the classification of work required for this project in accordance with the laws, rules and regulations in the State of Tennessee. Contractors (and/or subcontractors)shall be licensed as required by the Public Chapter No.882 (House Bill No.2180)Contractors Licensing Act of 1976, passed March 18, 1976 by the General Assembly of the State of Tennessee and any subsequent amendments thereto or any Rules and Regulations promulgated by the State Board of Licensing Contractors and approved by proper legal authority. The entire wording of the Act shall be considered to be included by reference in these Contract Documents. No bid for work or services in Tennessee will be considered, whether bidder is a resident of Tennessee or not, until and unless such bidder can show evidence of a proper current State License. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin or age. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex,

https://www.pgplans.com/

https://www.ncaplanroom.com/

http://www.bxtn.org/

https://www.construction.com/

http://www.tnagc.org/middletn/planroom/


00 02 00 - 3

national origin or age. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other form of compensation. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 00 10 00 __________________________________________________________________________

00 10 00 - 1

SECTION 00 10 00 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.01 To be considered, Bids shall be made in accord with these Instructions To

Bidders. Failure to comply with these Instructions or any requirements of the Bidding Documents may be cause for rejection of the Bid.

1.02 REGISTRATION AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT ACCESS: Prime Contractors must register with the Architect as a Bidder of Record to receive notifications, updates and addenda. Bidders of Record shall register by visiting the Architect’s website and following the link to register online:


Upon registration as a bonafide Bidder of Record, interested parties will be registered for the Official Record, be placed on a Bidders Email List (for future notifications), and receive a link to the Architects’ Document Management site. This site will include all construction documents (in digital format) for download at no cost.

All subcontractors and vendors may obtain sets of Contract Documents in the same manner as Prime Bidder of Record and is recommended to receive all documents and updates.

Interested bidders may view non-editable/non-printable Contract Documents, free of charge.

Additionally, all bidders may obtain printed hard copies of Contract Documents directly from the provider of their choice, or by downloading from the Architect’s Document Management site and printing with the provider of their choice. Bidders will keep all printed sets and no refund is offered. Only full sets of Documents shall be printed.

1.03 PARTIAL AND INCOMPLETE SETS: All parties shall bid the project with full

set of documents. The Owner and the Architect shall not be held responsible for insufficient Bids, incomplete work or workmanship because the Bidder did not have a complete set of Contract Documents, drawings and project manual, from which to prepare the bid.

1.04 EXAMINATION: Bidders shall carefully examine the Documents and the

construction site to obtain a first-hand knowledge of existing conditions. Contractors will not be given extra payment for conditions which can be determined by examining the site and the documents.

1.05 QUESTIONS: Submit all questions about the Drawings and Specifications to

the Architect, in writing. Replies will be issued to all Bidders of Record by Addenda and will form a basis of the Contract. The Architect and the Owner will not be responsible for oral clarifications. Questions must be received by the Architect at least five working days before the Bid opening date. No addenda will be issued less than three days prior to the Bid opening date.



00 10 00 - 2

1.06 BID SECURITY: A Bid Bond in the amount of Five (5%) Percent of the Bid is

required and shall be issued by a surety company licensed to do business in the State of Tennessee, made payable to the Owner. The successful Bidder's security will be retained until he has furnished the required Contract Bond and signed the Contract. If, upon request, any Bidder fails to deliver the required Bond or refuses to enter into a Contract, the Owner will retain the security as liquidated damages. All other bid securities will be returned.

1.07 BID SUBMITTAL AND LICENSING: Bids shall be submitted in a sealed

envelope. The following information shall be provided on the front of the bid envelope: Name and License Number of the General Contractor submitting the bid, name of project, date and time of receipt of bids, major subcontractors and their license numbers. A bidder whose bid is equal to or exceeds $50,000 and a subcontractor doing work in Pre-engineered Metal Building, HVAC, Plumbing or Electrical classifications of work where the subcontract is equal to or exceeds $50,000 must be licensed in accord with the Contractors Licensing Act of 1976, Chapter 822 and amendment thereto, TCA 62-601, et.seq.

1.08 BIDS: Bids shall be made on unaltered Bid forms furnished in the Contract

Documents. Submit one copy of Bid Form. Fill in all blank spaces on the Bid Form; failure to do so will be cause for rejection. No segregated Bids or assignments will be considered. Section 00 34 00 Unit Prices will be submitted within 24 hours after the bid opening. Fill in all blank spaces on Section 00 34 00 Unit Prices; failure to do so will be cause for rejection.

1.09 PRE-BID CONFERENCE: A Pre-Bid Conference will be held on Thursday January

16 at 10:00 in the David McCullough Meeting Room at the Sycamore Square Complex in Ashland City.

1.10 RECEIPT OF BIDS: Bids will be received and opened at the time and place

as identified in the Invitation to Bid. 1.11 CONTRACT BOND: Furnish and pay for the Bond. The amount of the Bond shall

be 100% of the bid and the form of the Bond shall be on a standard Contract bond form, acceptable to Owner.

The Surety Company must be licensed to do business in the State of Tennessee. Any bond signed by an attorney-in-fact must have Power of Attorney attached and the agent signing the bond must be resident of the State of Tennessee.

1.12 DELIVERY, WITHDRAWAL AND MODIFICATION: It is the Bidder's responsibility,

by whatever method he chooses, to ensure that his bid is received before the time set and at the place identified for receipt of bids. Any bid sent by mail shall be enclosed in another envelope clearly marked "Bid Envelope Enclosed". Once submitted, the bid may be withdrawn before the scheduled opening time only upon receipt of a request signed by an


00 10 00 - 3

authorized representative of the Bidder. If a bid is withdrawn it may not be resubmitted. Modification to the bid may be made as "add" or "deduct" only and must be signed by the person signing the bid and received prior to the time set for opening. After the time set for opening no bid may be withdrawn or modified.

1.13 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AND TIME: The amount of the liquidated damages and

time for completion are as identified in the Bid Form. Final Completion shall be achieved within 30 days of Substantial Completion.

1.14 LAWS AND REGULATION: Non-discrimination Policy will apply as identified

in the Invitation To Bid. Contractor’s personnel shall meet the Tennessee Sex Offender Law.

1.15 FEES AND PERMITS: In accordance with Article 3.7 of the General Conditions

Of The Contract For Construction, all fees and permits required to construct the project will be paid by the Contractor. It is the Bidder’s responsibility to contact local and state governments and utility companies to ascertain the required fees and permits.

1.16 AWARD OF CONTRACT: The Contract will be awarded based on the lowest

evaluated Bid with full consideration of Article 1.17 below. 1.17 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT: The Owner reserves the right to accept any Bid

and to reject any and all Bids, or to negotiate Contract Terms with the Various Bidders.

Each bidder shall be prepared, if so requested by the Owner, to present evidence of his experience, qualifications and financial ability to carry out the terms of the Contract.

The successful bidder shall be prepared to furnish Bonds and Insurance Certificates, and to execute the contract within five days after presentation and return it to the Architect. Within 24 hours after the bid opening the bidder shall provide the Owner with the list of all proposed subcontractors and materials suppliers. Contractor may not change this list without permission of the Owner. Within 24 hours after the bid opening the bidder shall provide the Owner with a list of unit prices applicable to the current project.

The form of Contract will be AIA Document A101, 2017 edition.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY GEOTECHNICAL REPORT HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 00 22 00 ________________________________________________________________________

00 22 00 - 1

SECTION 00 22 00 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION AND REPORT A. A Sub-surface investigation has been performed at the project site. This investigation was conducted, and a report obtained for design purposes and is not a part of the Contract Documents. B. The use and interpretation of this information will be entirely the responsibility of the using party. The Owner is not responsible for variations in the sub-surface conditions. Bidders shall decide for themselves the character of the material to be encountered. C. The report of the findings of this investigation is on file in the Architect’s office and may be reviewed there by any prospective Bidder of Record. Bidders must call ahead to schedule an appointment OR submit a request by email. The Geotechnical Report can be emailed to the Bidder upon the request by email. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY BID FORM HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 00 30 00 __________________________________________________________________________

00 30 00 - 1

SECTION 00 30 00 - BID FORM TO: Director of Accounts & Budgets 100 Public Square # 105

Ashland City, Tennessee 37015

PROJECT: Cheatham County Highway Garage Ashland City, Tennessee

The Bidder acknowledges by his signature that: 1. He has received, read and understands the bidding documents and his

bid is made in accordance therewith. 2. He has visited the site, has familiarized himself with the local

conditions under which work is to be performed and has correlated his observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. He has received the following Addenda:

Addendum No. __________ Dated _____________ Addendum No. __________ Dated _____________ Addendum No. __________ Dated _____________

4. He is in agreement to:

a. Hold open his bid for 60 days after the Bid Date.

b. Enter into and execute a contract, if awarded, on the basis of his bid and to furnish the bond and certificates required.

c. Accomplish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

d. Achieve Substantial Completion within 240 calendar days after

the Notice To Proceed.

e. Accept the conditions of Liquidated Damages for each Phase in the amount of $500.00 per calendar day as stipulated in Instructions To Bidders.

CHEATHAM COUNTY BID FORM HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 00 30 00 __________________________________________________________________________

00 30 00 - 2

BASE BID The Bidder agrees to construct the Work of the Base Bid for this project for the sum of: (Show amount in both words and figures) __________________________________________________________Dollars $_____________________ UNIT PRICES The Bidder agrees to construct any Work additional to the Base Bid for this project for the Unit Prices listed by the Bidder as shown in Section 00 34 00. The Unit Prices will be judged as reasonable or unreasonable solely by the Owner and may result in rejection of the Bid. The Contractor is required to give a unit price for each project item and failure to do so will result in rejection of the Bid. Submit within 24 hours after bid opening per the instructions to Bidders. The required Bid Bond is attached to this Bid. Name of Firm: ___________________________________________________ Signed by: ___________________________Date ______________________ Title:__________________________ Telephone: _____________________ Bidder's Address: _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ Bid must be signed by a person or person authorized to bind the Bidder to a Contact. Failure to complete the bid may be cause for rejection of the Bid. END OF SECTION 00 30 00

CHEATHAM COUNTY AGREEMENT FORM HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 00 50 00 __________________________________________________________________________

00 50 00 - 1

SECTION 00500 - AGREEMENT FORMS STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AIA Document A101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, where the basis of payment is a stipulated sum, 2017 edition. END OF SECTION 00 50 00

CHEATHAM COUNTY CONTRACT BOND HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 00 60 00

__________________________________________________________________________

00 60 00 - 1

SECTION 00 60 00 - BONDS The following will be required for the contract bond on this project: AIA Document A312 - 2010 - Performance Bond and Payment Bond. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY GENERAL CONDITIONS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 00 70 00 __________________________________________________________________________

00 70 00 - 1

SECTION 00 70 00 - GENERAL CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 2017 Edition. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY SUMMARY OF THE WORK HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 01 10 _____________________________________________________________________

01 01 10 - 1

SECTION 01 01 10 – SUMMARY OF THE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-01 Specification sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. General: Project name is Cheatham County Highway Garage as shown on Contract Documents prepared by Rufus Johnson Associates of Clarksville, Inc. B. Contract Documents: Indicate the work of the Contract and related requirements and conditions that have an impact on the project. Related requirements and conditions that are indicated on the Contract Documents include, but are not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Work performed prior to work under this Contract.(Bid Phase)

2. Work to be performed subsequent to work under this Contract.(Warranty Phase)

C. Summary by References: Work of the Contract can be summarized by references to the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections, Drawings, addenda and modifications to the contract documents issued subsequent to the initial printing of this project manual and including but not necessarily limited to printed material referenced by any of these. It is recognized that work of the Contract is also unavoidably affected or influenced by governing regulations, natural phenomenon including weather conditions and other forces outside the contract documents. 1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY: A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to place and install equipment as necessary in completed areas of the building and to occupy such completed areas prior to substantial completion, provided that such occupancy does not substantially interfere with completion of the work. Such placing of equipment

CHEATHAM COUNTY SUMMARY OF THE WORK HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 01 10 _____________________________________________________________________

01 01 10 - 2

and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the work or any part of the work. 1.04 ALTERATIONS AND COORDINATION: A. General: The work of this Contract includes coordination of the entire work of the project, including schedules, and control of site utilization, from beginning of construction activity through project close-out and warranty periods.

A. Alterations: Where applicable, requirements of the contract documents apply to alteration work in the same manner as to new construction.

1.05 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS:

A. Smoking will not be allowed on site. B. Superintendent shall be on site at all times when work is being performed.

End of Section

CHEATHAM COUNTY ALLOWANCES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 02 00 _______________________________________________________________________

01 02 00 - 1

SECTION 01 02 00 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing handling and processing allowances.

B. Selected materials and equipment, and in some cases, their installation are shown and specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. Additional requirements, if necessary, will be issued by Change Order.

C. Types of allowances required include the following:

1. Lump sum allowances. 2. Unit-cost allowances 3. Contingency allowances.

D. Procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders are included in Section "Change Order Procedures."

1.03 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest feasible date after Contract award, advise the Architect of the date when the final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed in order to avoid delay in performance of the Work.

B. When requested by the Architect, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections; include recommendations that are relevant to performance of the Work.


01 02 00 - 2

C. Purchase products and systems as selected by the Architect from the designated supplier.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to indicate actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

1.05 LUMP SUM ALLOWANCES

A. The lump sum amounts listed in the allowance schedule include any General Contractor expenses related to installation of the referenced products. B. Requirements given below in the paragraph titled “Contingency Allowances” shall apply to all allowances listed in the allowance schedule.

1.06 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed for the Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders or other documentation as agreed which designate amounts to be charged to the allowance.

B. The Contractor's related costs for products or equipment ordered by the Owner under the contingency allowance, including delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs are not part of the Contract Sum (other than allowance itself).

C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include the sub-contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. The Contractor will not include any overhead or profit on Change Order items until the Contingency allowance has been depleted.

D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order.

E. Unused portions of all allowances and credits will be added to the contingency and not deducted from the base contract sum.


01 02 00 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for damage or defects.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related construction activities.

3.03 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

Allowance No.1: Include a contingency allowance of $25,000.00 for use upon the Owner's instructions.

Allowance No.2: Include a lump sum of $25,000.00 for the remediation of unsuitable soils. As the site is unclassified any dollar amounts above this allowance amount shall be at the contractor’s expense. Any unused amount of this allowance will be credited back to the Owner by change order. Allowance No.3: Include a lump sum of $220,000.00 for the fuel station including all items and work specified in Fuel Station Equipment Section 11 15 10 of the Project Manual. Allowance No.4: Include a lump sum of $9,800.00 for a fuel station management system, Fuelmaster by Syn-Tech Systems or approved equal. A detailed specification can be released by Addendum. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY SCHEDULE OF VALUES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 02 60 ______________________________________________________________________

01 02 60 - 1

SECTION 01 02 60 - SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 FORM-AND-APPROVAL A. The form for schedule of values shall be AIA Documents G703 Continuation Sheet. B. If objected to by Designer, revise and resubmit to designer's satisfaction prior to submitting application for payment. 1.02 ALLOCATION OF VALUES A. Provide a single line item to account for mobilization and general administration and fulfilling General Requirements of the Project. B. If sitework is a part of Project, other than minor sitework incidental to a building or major structure, include sitework of the entire project in single heading. Subdivide site utilities, roads and parking, and appurtenances according to general type within this classification. C. For each involved building or major structure, provide a separate group of line items corresponding to Divisions and Sections of the Specifications. Further subdivide as desired but maintain a distinct and identifiable correspondence to this allocation. D. Account for Approved Modifications with a line item for each. PART TWO - PRODUCTS (Not applicable). PART THREE - EXECUTION (Not applicable). END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY PAYMENT PROCEDURES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 02 70 ______________________________________________________________________

01 02 70 - 1

SECTION 01 02 70 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL APPLICATIONS A. Use AIA Document G702 Application and Certificate for Payment. B. Use AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheet itemized with the line items and values of the schedule of Values accepted by the Designer and values and percentages for each line item. 1.02 SUBMITTAL: Submit the original and four copies of each application to the Designer, with required attachments and accompanying submittals, in accordance with other applicable articles of this Section. 1.03 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. STORED MATERIALS 1. Materials stored on site but not yet incorporated into the Work may be claimed for payment. 2. Materials suitably stored off site may be claimed for payment provided that the following is attached to each copy of application:

a. A statement identifying where materials are stored, and that materials are tagged to identify them for use in the project.

b. Copies of bills of sale for materials claimed.

c. A certificate of insurance covering materials claimed, recognizing Owner's right to make claims.

B. ATTACHMENTS AND ACCOMPANYING SUBMITTALS 1. Attach the following to each copy of each application:

a. Continuation sheets.

b. Consent of Surety if applicable for reduction in retainage.

c. Documents required for materials stored off-site. 2. Submit one electronic copy of the following with application:


01 02 70 - 2

a. Visitor Log for the period covered by application. b. Progress Schedule, updated and current, indicating progress through the period covered by application and schedule progress through completion of Work. c. Shop Drawing Log for entire project through the period covered by application, if required. 1.04 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. After Designer has certified that the work is substantially complete, Contractor shall submit application for payment, including appropriate reduction in retainage, with the following attachments:

1. Continuation sheets described in 1.01.B.

2. Consent of Surety to Reduction in Retainage, using AIA Document G707A or a similarly formed letter, with the original of the Consent attached to the original of the application, and a copy of the consent attached to each copy of the application.

3. Documents required for materials stored off-site, if applicable, in accordance with 1.03.A.2.

B. In order to reduce retainage below the amount corresponding to Substantial Completion, Contractor shall have completed the prerequisites to Final Payment specified in the Section on Contract Close-Out and below. 1.05 APPLICATION-FOR-FINAL-PAYMENT A. When Designer has certified that the Work and needed modifications to the Contract are complete, Contractor shall submit a final application for payment. B. Submit with the following attachments:

1. Final Continuation sheets described in 1.01.B.

2. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, using AIA Document G706.


01 02 70 - 3

3. Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment, using AIA Document G707 or a similarly formed letter, with the original of the Consent attached to the original of the application, and a copy of the Consent attached to each copy of the application. If Contractor has listed exception in the G706 form, Surety's consent shall acknowledge such exceptions.

4. A certificate of insurance to the effect of that required by 9.10.2(2) of the Conditions of the Contract.

5. A written statement to the effect of that required by 9.10.2(3) of the Conditions of the Contract.

6. A final accounting of the Contract Sum which appropriately allocates the entire Contract Sum to the Divisions of the Specifications. This may follow the same format as the Schedule of Values.

1.06 APPROVAL AND PAYMENT A. Designer, if in disagreement with the amounts claimed in an application, shall return application to Contractor for revision and resubmittal. Correction by hand will not be permitted. B. Designer, finding an application complete and correct, will certify the application and forward one copy to Contractor to indicate the action taken. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY MODIFICATION PROCEDURES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 03 50 ___________________________________________________________________

01 03 50 -1

SECTION 01 03 50 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR PROPOSALS OR CLAIMS A. Propose changes to Work in writing, specifically describing proposed change, or briefly describing the proposed change with specific reference to a completely descriptive attachment. B. Propose changes in Contract Sum in writing, stating briefly the reason for change, and summarizing material, equipment, labor, overhead & profit factors for Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors. C. Submit itemization of values of direct cost which provides the following breakdown: 1. Materials: Units, costs, quantities, totals. 2. Equipment: hours, rates, totals. 3. Labor: hours, rates, totals. D. Propose changes in Contract Time in writing: 1. Fully describe the reasons for the change and effect of the change on the construction schedule,& attach a revised Progress Schedule. E. Weather delay days: For a change based on weather-related delay, provide & attach daily work logs which describe actual local weather conditions and impact, subject to approval by Designer. Provide and attach (NOAA) National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration comparative data on normals, means, & extremes. See SECTION 01 26 20 WEATHER DAYS and SECTION 01 26 25 WEATHER DELAY REPORT. 1.02 FORM FOR-CHANGE-ORDERS-AND-CONSTRUCTION-CHANGE-DIRECTIVES

A. The forms shall be: AIA Document G701 Change Order and AIA Document G714 Construction Change Directive. Complete description of change in work shall be included in the body of the form or in referenced attachment. Change in Contract Sum and Contract Time as designated by the form shall be expressed in the body of the form. Upon discretion of the Designer a letter stating Owner approval of the change and future inclusion in a formal change order may be

CHEATHAM COUNTY MODIFICATION PROCEDURES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 03 50 ___________________________________________________________________

01 03 50 -2

issued and considered as valid by the Contractor as an approval by the Owner to proceed with the change.

1.03 SIGNATURES A. Form shall be signed by authorized representatives of each of the entities required by Conditions of the Contract. B. Proposed Change Orders will be prepared by Designer and submitted to Contractor. Contractor shall be first to sign an acceptable proposed Change Order, and shall deliver proposed Change Order to Designer. Designer shall sign an acceptable proposed Change Order second, & deliver to Owner. Owner shall sign an acceptable proposed Change Order last, and deliver to designer for further transmittal to contractor. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY PROJECT COORDINATION HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 04 00 _____________________________________________________________________

01 04 00 - 1

SECTION 01 04 00 - PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. Minimum administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordination of work on the project include but are not necessarily limited to the following:

1.Coordination and meetings.

2.General installation provisions.

3.Cleaning and protection. 1.03 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS: A. Monthly Coordination Meetings: Hold monthly general project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. These meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular project meetings and special pre-installation meetings. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the work of the entire project. Conduct meetings in a manner which will resolve coordination problems. Record results of the meeting and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.

1. At Contractor's option, monthly coordination meetings can be held integrally with monthly progress meetings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS: A. Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major unit of work to inspect the substrate to receive the


01 04 00 - 2

work and conditions under which the work is to be performed. The Installer shall report all unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Contractor. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with the manufacturer`s applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to the extent that these instructions and recommendations are more explicit or more stringent than requirements indicated in the contract documents. C. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work. Secure work true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances. Allow expansion and building movement. Provide uniform joint width in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to the Architect/Engineer for final decision. E. Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work, as an integral step of starting each installation. F. Install each unit-of-work during weather conditions and project status which will ensure the best possible results in coordination with the entire work. Isolate each unit of work from incompatible work as necessary to prevent deterioration. G. Coordinate enclosure of the work with required inspections and tests, so as to minimize the necessity of uncovering the work for that purpose. H. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units of work at industry recognized standard mounting heights for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height choices to the Architect/Engineer for final decision. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. General: During handling and installation of work at the project site, clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work at the basis of continuous maintenance. Apply protective covering on


01 04 00 - 3

installed work where it is required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. B. Clean and perform maintenance on installed work as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. C. Limiting Exposures of Work: To the extent possible through reasonable control and protection methods, supervise performance of the work in such a manner and by such means which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. D. Supervision of work: Project Superintendent shall be on-site at all times when work is being performed.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY FIELD ENGINEERING BY GC HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 05 00

01 05 00 - 1

SECTION 01 05 00 - FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. General: The Contractor shall provide all work specified below. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field-engineering services including, but not limited to, the following:

Land survey work.

Site and building layout. Geotechnical monitoring.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

Division 1 Section 01 04 00 - "Project Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. Division 1 Section 01 34 00 - "Submittals" for submitting Project record surveys. Division 1 Section 01 70 00 - "Contract Closeout" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents and recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a drawing of each site area, if determined to require undercutting, documenting the quantities of soil with length, width and depth of each area to be undercut.

B. Submit a report of each proof-rolling showing date, time, weather conditions and results of testing.

C. Submit a Record As-built Survey signed by a registered land surveyor in pdf and Cad format of the proposed improvements showing all work performed and certifying their location and elevation.


01 05 00 - 2

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Engineer Qualifications: Engage an engineer of the discipline required, licensed in the state where the project is located, to perform required engineering services.

B. Surveyor Qualifications: Engage a registered surveyor, licensed in the state of where the project is located, to perform required surveying, lay out and As-built record drawing services.

1.05 GEOTECHNICAL MONITORING: Engage a Geotechnical Engineer as described under “Engineer Qualifications” to certify soil bearing capacity at building pad, driveway and parking pads. Additionally, Engineer is to recommend procedures for undercutting and backfilling if these operations are required in accordance with paragraph 1.03 above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (SEE SUBMITTALS ABOVE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction.

1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

B. Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

C. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as


01 05 00 - 3

existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of all underground utilities and other construction. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of all utilities such as, but not limited to electric power, gas services and public mains, sanitary sewer services and public mains, storm sewer, and water-service piping and public mains.

3.02 PERFORMANCE

A. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions.

1.Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for their use. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and plumb.

B. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this log available for reference.

1. Record deviations from required lines and levels and advise the Architect when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record any deviations that are accepted by the Owner.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including, but not limited to pavements, stakes for grading, cut/fill and topsoil placement, storm pipe and structures, utility slopes, and invert elevations, etc.

D.Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical work.

E. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 06 00 __________________________________________________________________________

01 06 00 - 1

SECTION 01 06 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. CODES AND REGULATIONS: General: The Regulatory Requirements that are used for this project are listed below. Depending on the use of the building, other codes and regulations may also apply. This list is provided as a convenience to the Contractor and is not to be considered all inclusive of codes and regulations that may apply. The Contractor shall comply with all pertinent codes, standards, regulations and laws. 2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE w/ Appendices B,C,I,J. 2012 INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE w/ Appendices A,B,C,D. 2012 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE w/ Appendix A. 2012 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE W/ Appendices B,C,D,E,F. 2012 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE w/ Appendices B,C,D. 2009 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE. 2010 ADA STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN. 2017 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE.

CHEATHAM COUNTY REFERENCE STANDARDS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 09 50 _____________________________________________________ _____

01 09 50 - 1

SECTION 01 09 50 - REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Indicated: The term indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used to help the reader locate the reference. There is no limitation on location.

C. Directed: Terms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved, required, and permitted mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. D. Approved: The term approved, when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. E. Regulations: The term regulations includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. Furnish: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. Install: The term install describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.


01 09 50 - 2

I. Installer: An Installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.

1. The term experienced, when used with the term Installer, means having a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Trades: Using terms such as carpentry is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.

J. Project site is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.

K. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION

A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 16-Division format. B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words that are implied,


01 09 50 - 3

but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. The words "shall be" are implied wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and where the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer requirements that are different but apparently equal and other uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. E. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable


01 09 50 - 4

standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.

F. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the Text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries. G. The following acronyms or abbreviations, as referenced in Contract Documents, are defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but not ensured, to be accurate and up to date as of the date of Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association 900 19th St., NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20006 (202) 862-5100

AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1518 K St., NW Washington, DC 20005 (202) 737-0202 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Assoc. 1540 E. Dundee Road, Suite 310 Palatine, IL 60067 (708) 202-1350

AAN American Association of Nurserymen 1250 Eye St., NW, Suite 500 Washington, DC 20005 (202) 789-2900 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol St., Suite 225 Washington, DC 20001 (202) 624-5800


01 09 50 - 5

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists P.O. Box 12215 Research Triangle Park, NC (919) 549-8141

ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Detroit, MI 48219 (313) 532-2600 ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories 1629 K St., NW Washington, DC 20006 (202) 887-5872 ACPA American Concrete Pipe Assoc. 8300 Boone Blvd., Suite 400 Vienna, VA 22182 (703) 821-1990

ADC Air Diffusion Council One Illinois Center, Suite 200 111 East Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60601-4298 (312) 616-0800 AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Assoc. 1101 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 700 Washington, DC 20036 (202) 429-5155 AGA American Gas Assoc. 1515 Wilson Blvd. Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 841-8400 AHA American Hardboard Assoc. 520 N. Hicks Road Palatine, IL 60067 (708) 934-8800 AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers 20 N. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 (312) 984-5800


01 09 50 - 6

AI Asphalt Institute Research Park Drive P.O. Box 14052 Lexington, KY 40512-4052 (606) 288-4960 AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Ave., NW Washington, DC 20006 (202) 626-7300 A.I.A. American Insurance Assoc. 1130 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 1000 Washington, DC 20036 (202) 828-7100 AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Assoc. P.O. Box 8390 345 White Pond Dr. Akron, OH 44320 (216) 873-2442 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60601-2001 (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1101 17th Street, NW, Suite 1300 Washington, DC 20036-4700 (202) 463-6573 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 11818 SE Mill Plain Blvd., Suite 415 Vancouver, WA 98684 (206) 254-9132 ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America 12200 Sunrise Valley Drive, Suite 150 Reston, VA 22091 (703) 620-6363 ALI Associated Laboratories, Inc. 500 S. Vermont St. Palatine, IL 60067 (708) 358-7400


01 09 50 - 7

ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee P.O. Box 210 Germantown, MD 20875 (301) 972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Assoc. 30 W. University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893 (708) 394-0150 ANSI American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd Street, 13th Floor New York, NY 10036 (212) 642-4900 AOAC Association of Official Analytical Chemists 2200 Wilson Blvd., Suite 400 Arlington, VA 22201-3301 (703) 522-3032 AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts c/o Larry J. Prentice 268 Plant Science 1ANR-UNL, Box 19281 Lincoln, NE 68583-0911 (402) 472-8649 APA American Plywood Assoc. P.O. Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 (206) 565-6600 API American Petroleum Institute 1220 L St., NW Washington, DC 20005 (202) 682-8000 ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1501 Wilson Blvd., 6th Floor Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 524-8800 ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Assoc. 6288 Montrose Rd. Rockville, MD 20852 (301) 231-9050


01 09 50 - 8

ASA Acoustical Society of America 500 Sunnyside Blvd. Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 349-7800 ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council 1627 K Street, NW, Suite 1000 Washington, DC 20006-1707 (202) 452-1500 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, GA 30329 (404) 636-8400 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th St. New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7722 ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210 Westlake, CA 91362 (805) 495-7120 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering P.O. Box 40362 Bay Village, OH 44140 (216) 835-3040 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race St. Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187 (215) 977-9679 AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Assoc. 355 Lexington Ave. New York, NY 10017 (212) 661-4261 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute P.O. Box 1550 13924 Braddock Rd., Suite 100 Centreville, VA 22020 (703) 222-1100


01 09 50 - 9

AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Assoc. 4128-1/2 California Ave. SW, No. 171 Seattle, WA 98116 (206) 937-5338 AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau 4 E. Washington St. Newnan, GA 30263 (404) 254-9877 AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, NW P.O. Box 351040 Miami, FL 33135 (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Assoc. 6666 W. Quincy Ave. Denver, CO 80235 (303) 794-7711 BANC Brick Association of North Carolina P.O. Box 13290 Greensboro, NC 27415-3290 (919) 273-5566 BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Assoc. 355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor New York, NY 10017 (212) 661-4261 BIA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Drive Reston, VA 22091 (703) 620-0010 BIFMA Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Assoc. 2335 Burton St., SE Grand Rapids, MI 49506 (616) 243-1681


01 09 50 - 10

CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute c/o John H. Addington Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333 CAUS Color Association of the United States 409 W. 44th Street New York, NY 10036 (212) 582-6884 CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers Assoc. Hanna Building, No. 772 1422 Euclid Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-0711 CCC Carpet Cushion Council P.O. Box 546 Riverside, CT 06878 (203) 637-1312 CDA Copper Development Assoc. 2 Greenwich Office Park, Box 1840 Greenwich, CT 06836 (203) 625-8210 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. c/o Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333 CGA Compressed Gas Assoc. 1725 Jefferson Davis Highway, Suite 1004 Arlington, VA 22202-4100 (703) 979-0900 CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Assoc. 5700 Old Orchard Road, 1st Floor Skokie, IL 60077 (708) 965-2776


01 09 50 - 11

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 5959 Shallowford Road, Suite 419 Chattanooga, TN 37421 (615) 892-0137 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute P.O. Box 2048 Dalton, GA 30722 (404) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Rd. Schaumburg, IL 60173 (708) 517-1200 CTI Ceramic Tile Institute of America 700 N. Virgil Ave. Los Angeles, CA 90029 (213) 660-1911 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 14170 New Brook Drive Chantilly, VA 22022 (703) 222-2010 DLPA Decorative Laminate Products Assoc. 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400 Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222 ECSA Exchange Carriers Standards Assoc. 5430 Grosvenor Lane, Suite 200 Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 564-4505 EIA Electronic Industries Assoc. 2001 Pennsylvania Ave., NW Washington, DC 20006-1813 (202) 457-4900 EIMA Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Assoc. 2759 State Road 580, Suite 112 Clearwater, FL 34621 (813) 726-6477


01 09 50 - 12

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Assoc. 25 N. Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 (914) 332-0040 ETL ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc. P.O. Box 2040 Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711 FCI Fluid Controls Institute P.O. Box 9036 Morristown, NJ 07960 (201) 829-0990 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Assoc. White Lakes Professional Bldg. 3310 S.W. Harrison Topeka, KS 66611-2279 (913) 266-7013 FM Factory Mutual Research Organization 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 9102 Norwood, MA 02062 (617) 762-4300 FTI Facing Tile Institute P.O. Box 8880 Canton, OH 44711 (216) 488-1211 GA Gypsum Association 810 First Street, NE, Suite 510 Washington, DC 20002 (202) 289-5440 HEI Heat Exchange Institute c/o John H. Addington Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333


01 09 50 - 13

HI Hydronics Institute P.O. Box 218 35 Russo Place Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922 (908) 464-8200 H.I. Hydraulic Institute 30200 Detroit Road Cleveland, OH 44145-1967 (216) 899-0010 HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Assoc. 400 Penn Center Blvd. Pittsburgh, PA 15235 (412) 829-0770 HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Assoc. 1825 Michael Farraday Drive P.O. Box 2789 Reston, VA 22090-2789 (703) 435-2900 IBD Institute of Business Designers 341 Merchandise Mart Chicago, IL 60654 (312) 647-1950 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. P.O. Box 440 South Yarmouth, MA 02664 (508) 394-4424 IEC International Electrotechnical Commission (Available from ANSI) 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 (212) 354-3300 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 345 E. 47th St. New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7900 IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 345 E. 47th St. New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7926


01 09 50 - 14

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council c/o ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc. P.O. Box 2040 Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711 ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America Stone City Bank Building, Suite 400 Bedford, IN 47421 (812) 275-4426 IMSA International Municipal Signal Assoc. 165 E. Union St. P.O. Box 539 Newark, NY 14513 (315) 331-2182 IRI Industrial Risk Insurers 85 Woodland St. Hartford, CT 06102 (203) 520-7300 ISA Instrument Society of America P.O. Box 12277 67 Alexander Drive Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 (919) 549-8411 KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Assoc. 1899 Preston White Drive Reston, VA 22091-4326 (703) 264-1690 LIA Lead Industries Association, Inc. 295 Madison Avenue New York, NY 10017 (212) 578-4750 LPI Lightning Protection Institute 3365 North Arlington Heights Rd., Suite J Arlington Heights, IL 60004 (708) 255-3003


01 09 50 - 15

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Assoc. c/o Charles M. Stockinger Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333 MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America 1385 Piccard Dr. Rockville, MD 20850-4329 (301) 869-5800 MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers' Assoc. 60 Revere Dr., Suite 500 Northbrook, IL 60062 (708) 480-9138 MIA Marble Institute of America 33505 State St. Farmington, MI 48335 (313) 476-5558 ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Assoc. (A Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers) 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400 Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry 127 Park St., NE Vienna, VA 22180 (703) 281-6613 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400 Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222 NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Assoc. 44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 310 Alexandria, VA 22314 (703) 684-0084


01 09 50 - 16

NAPA National Asphalt Pavement Assoc. NAPA Building 5100 Forbes Blvd. Lanham, MD 20706-4413 (301) 731-4748 NAPF National Association of Plastic Fabricators (Now DLPA) NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Assoc. P.O. Box 482 Barre, VT 05641 (802) 476-3115 NBHA National Builders Hardware Assoc. (Now DHI) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Assoc. P.O. Box 781 Herndon, VA 22070-0781 (703) 435-4900 NCRPM National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements 7910 Woodmont Ave., Suite 800 Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 657-2652 NCSPA National Corrugated Steel Pipe Association 2011 Eye Street, NW Washington, DC 20006 (202) 223-2217 NEC National Electrical Code (from NFPA) NECA National Electrical Contractors Assoc. 7315 Wisconsin Ave. Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 657-3110 NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc. 185 Bridge Plaza, North Fort Lee, NJ 07024 (201) 944-3211


01 09 50 - 17

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Assoc. 2101 L St., NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 (202) 457-8400 NETA International Electrical Testing Assoc. P.O. Box 687 Morrison, CO 80465 (303) 467-0526 NFPA National Fire Protection Assoc. One Batterymarch Park P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 (617) 770-3000 / (800) 344-3555 N.F.P.A. National Forest Products Assoc. 1250 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 200 Washington, DC 20036 (202) 463-2700 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Assoc. P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, TN 38184-0518 (901) 377-1818 NKCA National Kitchen Cabinet Assoc. (Now KCMA) NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority 1055 W. Hastings St., Suite 260 Vancouver, British Columbia Canada V6E 2E9 (604) 687-2171 NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Assoc. P.O. Box 3009 Memphis, TN 38173-0009 (901) 526-5016 NPA National Particleboard Assoc. 18928 Premiere Court Gaithersburg, MD 20879 (301) 670-0604


01 09 50 - 18

NPCA National Paint and Coatings Assoc. 1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW Washington, DC 20005 (202) 462-6272 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Assoc. 10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600 Rosemont, IL 60018-5607 (708) 299-9070 NSF National Sanitation Foundation 3475 Plymouth Rd. P.O. Box 1468 Ann Arbor, MI 48106 (313) 769-8010 NSSEA National School Supply and Equipment Assoc. 8300 Colesville Rd., No. 250 Silver Spring, MD 20910 (301) 495-0240 NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Assoc. 3166 Des Plaines Ave., Suite 132 Des Plaines, IL 60018 (708) 635-7744 NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Assoc. (Now NWWDA) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Assoc. 1400 E. Touhy Ave., #G54 Des Plaines, IL 60018 (708) 299-5200 / (800) 223-2301 PCA Portland Cement Assoc. 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077 (708) 966-6200 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute 175 W. Jackson Blvd. Chicago, IL 60604 (312) 786-0300


01 09 50 - 19

PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute c/o Sol Baker 1106 W. 77th St., South Dr. Indianapolis, IN 46260 (317) 251-6970 PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute 1101 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 700 Washington, DC 20036 (202) 857-1134 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute 966 Hungerford Drive, Suite 12-B Rockville, MD 20805 (301) 340-8580 RIS Redwood Inspection Service 405 Enfrente Drive, Suite 200 Novato, CA 94949 (415) 382-0662 RMA Rubber Manufacturers Assoc. 1400 K St., NW Washington DC 20005 (202) 682-4800 SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 (216) 493-7886 S.D.I. Steel Door Institute 30200 Detroit Road Cleveland, OH 44145 (216) 889-0010 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council c/o ETL Testing Laboratories Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711 SHLMA Southern Hardwood Lumber Manufacturers Assoc. (Now HMA)


01 09 50 - 20

SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Assoc. 401 N. Michigan27 N. Wacker Drive Suite 365, Chicago, IL 60606 (613) 233-1510 SJI Steel Joist Institute 234 W. Cheves Street Florence, SC 29501 (843) 407-4091 SMA Screen Manufacturers Assoc. 3950 Lake Shore Dr., Suite 502-A Chicago, IL 60613-3431 (312) 525-2644 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association 4201 Lafayette Center Dr. Chantilly, VA 20151 (703) 803-2980 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 4709 Scenic Highway Pensacola, FL 32504 (904) 434-2611 SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute 20 Walnut St. Wellesley Hills, MA 02189 (617) 237-7879 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Ave. Pittsburgh, PA 15213-2683 (412) 268-3327 SSPMA Sump and Sewage Pump Manufacturers Assoc. P.O. Box 298 Winnetka, IL 60093 (708) 835-8911 SWI Steel Window Institute c/o Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Ave, Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 (216) 241-7333


01 09 50 - 21

SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Assoc. 600 S. Federal Street, Suite 400 Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222 TCA Tile Council of America P.O. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08542 (609) 921-7050 TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Assoc. 29 Bank Street Stamford, CT 06901 (203) 324-7533 (Standards now issued by NAIMA) TPI Truss Plate Institute 583 D'Onofrio Drive, Suite 200 Madison, WI 53719 (608) 833-5900 UFAC Upholstered Furniture Action Council Box 2436 High Point, NC 27261 (919) 885-5065 UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingsten Rd. Northbrook, IL 60062 (847) 272-8800 USP U.S. Pharmacopoeia Convention 12601 Twinbrook Parkway Rockville, MD 20852 (301) 881-0666 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau P.O. Box 23145 Portland, OR 97223 (503) 639-0651 WCMA Wallcovering Manufacturers Assoc. 355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor New York, NY 10017 (212) 661-4261 (WCMA has moved from this location, perhaps to the Chicago area. Address and phone number not confirmed.)


01 09 50 - 22

WIC Woodwork Institute of California P.O. Box 11428 Fresno, CA 93773-1428 (209) 233-9035 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 1101 Connecticut Ave. NW, Suite 700 Washington, DC 20036-4303 (202) 429-5125 WSC Water Systems Council 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400 Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222 WSFI Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute 4415 W. Harrison St., Suite 242-C Hillside, IL 60162 (708) 449-2933 WLPDIA Western Lath, Plaster, Drywall Industries Assoc. (Formerly California Lath & Plaster Assoc.) 8635 Navajo Road San Diego, CA 92119 (619) 466-9070 WWPA Western Wood Products Assoc. Yeon Building 522 SW 5th Avenue Portland, OR 97204-2122 (503) 224-3930 W.W.P.A. Woven Wire Products Assoc. 2515 N. Nordica Ave. Chicago, IL 60635 (312) 637-1359

1.05 Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal government standard- or Specification-producing agencies are often abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in the Contract Documents indicate names of standard- or Specification-producing agencies of the federal government. Names and addresses are subject to change but are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.


01 09 50 - 23

CE Corps of Engineers (U.S. Department of the Army) Chief of Engineers - Referral Washington, DC 20314 (202) 272-0660 CFR Code of Federal Regulations (Available from the Government Printing Office) N. Capitol St. between G and H St. NW Washington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238 (Material is usually first published in the "Federal Register") CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 5401 Westbard Ave. Bethesda, MD 20207 (301) 492-6580 / (800) 638-2772 CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) Washington, DC 20230 (202) 482-2000 DOC U.S. Department of Commerce 14th St. and Constitution Ave., NW Washington, DC 20230 (202) 482-2000 DOT Department of Transportation 400 Seventh St., SW Washington, DC 20590 (202) 366-4433 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 61 Forsyth Street, SW Atlanta, GA 30303-3104 (404) 562-9900 FAA Federal Aviation Administration (U.S. Department of Transportation) 800 Independence Ave., SW Washington, DC 20590 (202) 267-1111 FCC Federal Communications Commission 1919 M St., NW Washington, DC 20554 (202) 418-0500


01 09 50 - 24

FHA Federal Housing Administration (U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development) Director, Manufactured Housing and Construction Standards Division 451 Seventh St., SW, Room 9158 Washington, DC 20201 (202) 708-6423 FS Federal Specification (from GSA) Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 1800 F St. nw Washington, DC 20006 (844) 472-4111 GSA General Services Administration 1800 F St. NW Washington, DC 20006 (844) 472-4111 MIL Military Standardization Documents (U.S. Department of Defense) Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Ave. Philadelphia, PA 19120 NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (U.S. Department of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20899 (301) 975-2000 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) N3647 200 Constitution Ave., NW Washington, DC 20210 (202) 693-1999 PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Department of Commerce) Washington, DC 20230 (202) 482-2000


01 09 50 - 25

REA Rural Electrification Administration (U.S. Department of Agriculture) 14th St. and Independence Ave., SW Washington, DC 20250 (202) 720-3808 USDA U.S. Department of Agriculture 14th St. and Independence Ave., SW Washington, DC 20250 (202) 720-3808

USPS U.S. Postal Service 475 L'Enfant Plaza, SW Washington, DC 20260-0010 (800) 275-8777

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY PROJECT MEETINGS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 20 00 _______________________________________________________________________

01 20 00 - 1

SECTION 01 20 00 - PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCHEDULING-AND-ATTENDANCE A. The designer, in cooperation with the Owner and the Contractor, will schedule and administer a Pre-Construction Conference, periodic Progress Meetings monthly and bi-monthly as required and other specially called or required meetings. B. Representatives of the Owner and the Designer will attend. C. Representatives of the Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. A Pre-Construction Conference will be scheduled and conducted at the project site prior to the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. B. Pre-Construction Conference shall be attended by the Contractor's:

(Office) Job Manager (Field) Job Superintendent Major subcontractors' representatives Major suppliers' representatives Others, as desired.

C. The Pre-construction Conference is intended to be an opportunity for the Contractor to review administrative, procedural, and temporary facilities requirements of the Contract Documents, and to ask questions concerning the Work. 1.03 PROGRESS-MEETINGS A. Progress Meetings will be scheduled and conducted at the project site prior to the Contractor's submittal of an application for payment, or when deemed advisable by the Designer. B. Progress Meetings shall be attended by the Contractor's:

(Office) Job Manager (Field) Job Superintendent Subcontractor's representatives, as befits the agenda Suppliers' representatives, as befits the agenda Others, as appropriate

C. Progress Meetings are intended to be a monthly opportunity for the Contractor to review and submit applications for payment and attachments and

CHEATHAM COUNTY PROJECT MEETINGS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 20 00 _______________________________________________________________________

01 20 00 - 2

for a general review of the progress of the Work, aimed at identifying and mitigating impediments to timely completion. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY WEATHER DAYS HIGHWAY GARAGE 01 26 20

01 26 20 - 1

SECTION – 01 26 20 WEATHER DAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 EXTENSIONS OF CONTRACT TIME

A. If the basis exists for an extension of time in accordance with paragraph 8.3 of the Conditions, an extension of time on the basis of weather may be granted only for the number of Weather Delay Days in excess of the number of days listed as the Standard Baseline for that month.

1.02 STANDARD BASELINE FOR AVERAGE CLIMATIC RANGE A. The Owner has reviewed weather data available from the National Oceanic and

Atmospheric Administration and determined a Standard Baseline of average climatic range for the State of Tennessee.

B. Standard Baseline shall be regarded as the normal and anticipatable number of calendar days for each month during which construction activity shall be expected to be prevented and suspended by cause of adverse weather. Suspension of construction activity for the number of days each month as listed in the Standard Baseline is included in the Work and is not eligible for extension of Contract Time.

C. Standard Baseline shall be regarded as the normal and anticipatable number of calendar days

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

12 11 08 07 07 06 07 05 04 05 06 11

1.03 ADVERSE WEATHER and WEATHER DELAY DAYS A. Adverse Weather is defined as the occurrence of one or more of the following conditions

which prevents exterior construction activity or access to the site within twenty-four (24) hours: 1. Precipitation (rain, snow, ice) in excess of one-tenth inch (0.10”) liquid measure. 2. Temperatures which do not rise above 32 degrees F by 10:00 a.m. 3. Sustained wind in excess of twenty-five (25) m.p.h. 4. Standing snow in excess of one inch (1.00")

B. Adverse Weather may include, if appropriate, “dry-out” or “mud” days: 1. For rain days above the standard baseline; 2. Only if there is a hindrance to the site access or sitework, such as excavation,

backfill, and footings; and, 3. At a rate no greater than 1 make-up day for each day or consecutive days of rain

beyond the standard baseline that total 1.0 inch or more, liquid measure, unless specifically recommended otherwise by the Designer.

CHEATHAM COUNTY WEATHER DAYS HIGHWAY GARAGE 01 26 20

01 26 20 - 2

C. A Weather Delay Day may be counted if adverse weather prevents work on the project for fifty percent (50%) or more of the contractor's scheduled work day, including a weekend day or holiday if Contractor has scheduled construction activity that day.

1.04 DOCUMENTATION AND SUBMITTALS A. WEATHER DELAY REPORT: Use a copy of Section 01 26 25 as a Weather Delay Report,

indicating for each calendar month the days on which construction activity affecting the critical path of the Work was prevented by weather conditions. Mark the column for the general cause; and, under 'Specifics·, indicate corresponding measurement of precipitation, temperature, wind, or other influencing factors, and the construction activity that was scheduled and delayed. At the end of the month, add up the number of days delay, subtract the baseline number given in Section 01 26 20, and show the resulting claimable days. Submit a copy of the completed report with the next application for payment and with subsequent claim for time extension. Claims for time extension based upon weather delays will be denied If a submitted report does not corroborate the claim or if no report was submitted when it was required in accordance with this paragraph.

B. Submit daily jobsite work logs showing which and to what extent construction activities have been affected by weather on a monthly basis

C. Submit actual weather data to support claim for time extension obtained from nearest NOAA weather station or other independently verified source approved by Designer at beginning of project.

D. Use Standard Baseline data provided in this Section when documenting actual delays due to weather in excess of the average climatic range.

E. Organize claim and documentation to facilitate evaluation on a basis of calendar month periods and submit in accordance with the procedures for Claims established in paragraph 4.3 of the Conditions.

F. If an extension of the Contract Time is appropriate, it shall be implemented in accordance with the provisions of Article 7 of the Conditions, and the applicable General Requirements.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY WEATHER DELAY REPORT HIGHWAY GARAGE 01 26 25

01 26 25- 1

Precip Temp Wind Dryout Specific123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031

Total number of days this month with delay due to weatherBaseline number from Section 01 26 20Total - Basline + Claimable Days

Month and Year reported below

Day of Month

"X" if Work delayed by this cause

Project Name

See Section 01 26 20 for instructions on use of this form

CHEATHAM COUNTY PROGRESS SCHEDULES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 31 00

______________________________________________________________________

01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00 – PROGRESS SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 INITIAL PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Submit within 20 days of award of the Contract, and not later than the date of submission of the first application for payment. Clearly identify the Project on the schedule. B. Outline the orderly progress of the Work as planned from the date of commencement through substantial completion. Provide an identifiable relationship to the schedule of values. Identify projected monthly progress points and points of 50% completion and Substantial Completion. Projected point of Substantial Completion shall correspond to the Contract Time as stipulated in the Agreement. C. A bar chart or critical path method is acceptable, or other method which is approved by the Designer. 1.02 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Submit with the Initial Progress Schedule. Clearly identify the project, and format in a manner similar to the initial progress schedule, utilize the same method, or make a part of the initial Progress Schedule. B. Identify submittals to be made. Show date for submission and date by which Designer should respond, allowing sufficient time for review. C. Designer may require revision of schedule if times allotted for review are insufficient. 1.03 UPDATED PROGRESS SCHEDULE Submit three copies with each application for payment. A. Clearly identify the Project. Format in a manner similar to the initial progress schedule, utilizing the same method. B. Indicate:

1. Work as initially scheduled

2. Actual progress through the period covered by the current application for payment.

3. Planned progress through Substantial Completion, including extensions of time made by change order or construction change directive.

C. If actual progress falls behind projections, show how the backlog is to be made up so that the Work will be completed on time. END OF SECTION

Good people sleep peaceably in their beds at night only because rough men stand ready to do violence on their behalf." CHEATHAM COUNTY SUBMITTALS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 34 00 _____________________________________________________________________

01 34 00 - 1

SECTION 01 34 00 – SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.10 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. General: This section specifies procedural requirements for non- administrative submittals including shop drawings, product data, samples and other miscellaneous work-related submittals. Shop drawings, product data, samples and other work-related submittals are required to amplify, expand and coordinate the information contained in the Contract Documents. B. Shop drawings are technical drawings and data that have been specially prepared for this project, including but not limited to the following items:

1.Fabrication and installation drawings. 2.Setting diagrams. 3.Shopwork manufacturing instructions. 4.Design mix formulas.

5.Standard information prepared without specific reference to a project is not considered to be shop drawings. C. Product data includes standard printed information on manufactured products that has not been specially-prepared for this project, including but not limited to the following items:

1.Manufacturer's product specs. and installation instructions. 2.Standard color charts. 3.Catalog cuts. 4.Roughing-in diagram and templates. 5.Standard wiring diagrams. 6.Printed performance curves. 7.Operational range diagrams. 8.Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.

D. Samples are physical examples of work, including but not limited to the following items:


01 34 00 - 2

1.Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated work. 2.Small cuts or containers of materials. 3.Swatches showing color, texture and pattern. 4.Color range sets. 5.Units of work to be used for independent inspection and testing.

6.Mock-ups are special forms of samples, which are too large or otherwise inconvenient for handling in the manner specified for transmittal of sample submittals. E. Miscellaneous submittals are work-related, non-administrative submittals that do not fit in the three previous categories, including, but not limited to the following:

1.Specially-prepared and standard printed warranties. 2.Maintenance agreements. 3.Survey data and reports. 4.Testing and certification reports. 5.Record drawings. 6.Operating and maintenance manuals. 7.Keys and other security protection devices. 8.Maintenance tools and spare parts. 9.Overrun stock.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Refer to the General Conditions for basic procedures for submittal handling. Refer to Section 01 31 00 for Schedule of Submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate the preparation and processing of submittals with the performance of the work. Coordinate each separate submittal with other submittals and related activities such as testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar activities that require sequential activity.

1.Coordinate the submittal of different units of interrelated work so that one submittal will not be delayed by the Architect/Engineer's need to review a related submittal. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on any submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are forthcoming.

C. Coordination of Submittal Times: Prepare and transmit each submittal to the Architect/Engineer sufficiently in advance of the


01 34 00 - 3

scheduled performance of related work and other applicable activities. Transmit different kinds of submittals for the same unit of work so that processing will not be delayed by the Architect/Engineer's need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. D. Submittal Preparation: Mark each submittal with a permanent label for identification. Provide the following information on the label for proper processing and recording of action taken.

1.Project name. 2.Date. 3.Name and address of Architect/Engineer. 4.Name and address of Contractor. 5.Name and address of subcontractor. 6.Name and address of supplier. 7.Name of manufacturer. 8.Number and title of appropriate specification section. 9.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10.Similar definitive information as necessary. 11.Provide a space on the label for the Contractor review and approval markings, and a space for the Architect/Engineer's "Action" marking.

E. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect/Engineer, and to other destinations as indicated, by use of a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned to the sender "without action". 1.04 SPECIFIC SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. General: Specific submittal requirements for individual units of work are specified in the applicable specification section. Except as otherwise indicated in the individual specification sections, comply with the requirements specified herein for each type of submittal. B. Shop Drawings: Information required on shop drawings includes, dimensions, identification of specific products and materials which are included in the work, compliance with specified standards and notations of coordination requirements with other work. Provide special notation of dimensions that have been established by field measurement. Highlight, encircle or


01 34 00 - 4

otherwise indicate deviations from the contract documents on the shop drawings.

1.Do not permit shop drawings copies without an appropriate final "Action" marking by the Architect/Engineer to be used in connection with the work.

2.Preparation: Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale on sheets not less than 8-1/2" x 11"; except for actual pattern or template type drawings, the maximum sheet size shall not exceed 30" x 42". Indicate the name of the firm that prepared each shop drawing and provide appropriate project identification in the title block. Provide a space not less than 20 sq. in. beside the title block for marking the record of the review process and the Architect/Engineer's "Action" marking.

a. Do not reproduce contract documents or copy standard

printed information as the basis of shop drawings.

3.Initial Submittal: Provide one correctable translucent reproducible print and two blue-line or black-line prints; the reproducible print will be returned.

C. Product Data: General information required specifically as product data includes manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with recognized standards of trade associations and testing agencies, and the application of their labels and seals (if any), special notation of dimensions which have been verified by way of field measurement, and special coordination requirements for interfacing the material, product or system with other work. D. Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 sections for additional general requirements applicable to product data for mechanical and electrical work respectively. E. Preparation: Collect required product data into a single submittal for each unit of work or system. Mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to the project. Where project data has been printed to include information on several similar products, some of which are not required for use on the project, or are not included on this submittal, mark the copies to show clearly that such information is not applicable.


01 34 00 - 5

1.Where product data must be specially prepared for required products, materials or systems, because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit data as "shop drawings" and not as "product data".

F. Submittals: Product data submittal is required for information and record and to determine that the products, materials and systems comply with the provisions of the contract documents. Therefore, the initial submittal is also the final submittal, except where the Architect/Engineer observes that there is non- compliance with the provisions of the contract documents and returns the submittal promptly to the Contractor marked with the appropriate "Action".

1.Initial Submittal: Except as otherwise indicated in individual sections of these specifications, submit 3 copies of each required product data submittal.

2.Do not submit product data or allow its use on the project, until compliance with the requirements of the contract documents has been confirmed by the Contractor.

3.Final Distribution: Furnish copies of product data to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, manufacturers, installers, governing authorities and others as required for proper performance of the work. Show distribution on transmittal form.

4.Installation Copy: Do not proceed with installation of materials, products and systems until a copy of product data applicable to the installation is in the possession of the installer. Do not permit the use of unmarked copies of product data in connection with the performance of the work.

G. Samples: Submit samples for the Architect/Engineer's visual review of general generic kind, color, pattern, and texture, and for a final check of the coordination of these characteristics with other related elements of the work.

1.Distribution of Samples: Maintain the final submittal sets of samples, as returned by the Architect/Engineer, at the project site, available for quality control comparisons throughout the course of performing the work. In addition, throughout the final submittal sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the work associated with each set. Prepare and distribute


01 34 00 - 6

additional sets of samples to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, manufacturers, installers, governing authorities, and others as required for proper performance of the work. Show final distribution on transmittal forms.

2.Mock-Ups are similar samples specified in individual work sections are special types of samples. Comply with sample submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.

H. Miscellaneous Submittals:

1.Inspection and Test Reports: Classify each inspection and test report as being either "shop drawings" or "product data" depending on whether the report is specially prepared for the project, or a standard publication of workmanship control testing at the point of production. Process inspection and test reports accordingly.

2.Warranties: Refer to section "Products and Substitutions" for specific general requirements on warranties, product bonds, workmanship bonds and maintenance agreement. In addition to copies desired for the Contractor's use, furnish 2 executed copies of such warranties, bonds or agreements. Provide 2 additional copies where required for maintenance manuals.

I. Closeout Submittals: Refer to Section 01 70 00 "Contract Closeout", Section 01 72 06 "Project Record Documents" and individual sections of these specifications for specific submittal requirements of project closeout information, materials, tools, and similar items. 1.05 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S ACTION: A. General: Except for submittals for the record and similar purposes, where action and return on submittals is required or requested, the Architect/Engineer will review each submittal, mark with appropriate "Action", and where possible return within 2 weeks of receipt. Where the submittal must be held for coordination the Architect/Engineer will so advise the Contractor without delay.

1.Action Stamp: The Architect/Engineer will stamp each submittal to be returned with a uniform, self explanatory action stamp, appropriately marked and executed to indicate whether the


01 34 00 - 7

submittal returned is for unrestricted use, final- but-restricted use (as marked), must be revised and resubmitted (use not permitted) or without action (as explained on the transmittal form).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable), PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY ADMINISTRATIVE LOGS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 39 00

______________________________________________________________________

01 39 00 - 1

SECTION 01 39 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE LOGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS LOG A. If any shop drawings, product data, or sample submittals are required by the Contract Documents, maintain a submittals log to record the status of submittals made to the Designer.

1. Submit four (4) copies with each application for payment.

2. Clearly identify the Project.

3. Record activities with respect to shop drawings, product data, samples, and such other submittals which are required by the Contract Documents.

4. Indicate for each submittal made to date:

a. Title or name, and type of submittal. b. Date submitted to the designer. c. Date returned by the designer. d. General nature of the Designer's response.

1.02 VISITOR LOG A. Maintain visitor log in the field office (or with the Project Superintendent when no field office is required) to record visits by all persons not a part of the Contractor's forces, material suppliers, or subcontractors forces.

1. Submit four (4) copies with each application for payment.

2. Clearly identify the Project.

3. Indicate:

a. Visitor name and affiliation. b. Date of visit. c. Time of arrival and departure.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY TEMPORARY FACILITIES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 50 00 _____________________________________________________________________

01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for temporary services and facilities, including such items as temporary utility services, temporary construction and support facilities, project security, protection and waste recycling. B. Use Charges: No cost or usage charges for temporary services or facilities are chargeable to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. Cost or use charges for temporary services or facilities will not be accepted as a basis for claims for a change-order extra. C. Temporary utility services required for use at the project site include but are not limited to the following:

1.Water service and distribution. 2.Temporary electric power and light. 3.Mobile phone service. 4.Storm and sanitary sewer. 5.Provide adequate utility capacity at each stage of construction. 6.Prior to availability of temporary utilities at the site provide trucked-in services for start up of construction operations.

D. Temporary construction and support facilities required for the project include but not limited to the following:

1.Temporary heat and ventilation. 2.Field offices and storage sheds. 3.Sanitary facilities, including drinking water. 4.Project identification, bulletin boards and signs. 5.Waste disposal services. 6.Construction aids and miscellaneous general services and facilities.

7.Fax machine and service. 8.Temporary fencing or barriers.


01 50 00 - 2

9.Temporary enclosures. 10.Rodent and pest control.

11.Covered woo shed near the building pad for drawing review. 12.Gravel parking area for vehicles. Gravel walkway from parking to building slab and to job trailer.

E. Security and protection facilities and services required for the project include but are not limited to the following:

1.Barricades, warning signs, lights. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulations: Comply with requirements of local laws and regulations governing construction and local industry standards, in the installation and maintenance of temporary services and facilities. B. Standards: Comply with the requirements of NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations", the ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition", and the NECA National Joint Guideline NJG-6 "Temporary Job Utilities and Services". C. Inspections: Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for required inspections and tests by governing authorities, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. PART 2- PRODUCTS: 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. General: Provide new materials and equipment for temporary services and facilities; used materials and equipment that are undamaged in serviceable condition may be used, if acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Provide only materials and equipment that are recognized as being suitable for the intended use, by compliance with appropriate standards. B. Temporary Offices and Similar Construction: For temporary offices, fabrication shops, storage sheds and similar construction, provide either standard prefabricated or mobile units or the equivalent


01 50 00 - 3

job-built construction. Provide insulated, weather tight units, heated or air-conditioned, lockable entrances, operable windows, wood conference table, roofing, foundations adequate for normal loading, including wind loads, serviceable finishes, and mechanical and electrical equipment necessary to achieve ambient conditions indicated. C. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Provide single-occupant self- contained toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar non- absorbent material. Include handwash facility or hand sanitizer. D. Drinking Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. Where well water must be used, comply with local health authorities recommendations for type and frequency of testing water for potability. E. Sign Materials: For signs and directory boards, provide exterior type, Grade B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay Plywood conforming to PS-1, of sizes and thicknesses indicated. Provide exterior grade acrylic-latex-base enamel for painting panels and applying graphics. F. First Aid Supplies as required by governing regulations. G. Defibrillator & Oxygen Unit and trained field superintendent. Provide to the Owner at completion of construction. H. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried portable UL rated, Class A ,for temporary offices and similar spaces. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for size and extinguishing agent. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. General: Use qualified tradesmen for installation of temporary services and facilities. Locate temporary services and facilities where they will serve the entire project adequately and result in minimum interference with the performance of the Work. 3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION: A. Water Service:


01 50 00 - 4

1.General: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction purposes during the construction period and until permanent service is in use. B. Temporary Electric Power Service: 1.General: Provide a weatherproof, grounded temporary electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics to accommodate performance of work during the construction period. Whenever an overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, install temporary lighting adequate to provide sufficient illumination for safe work and traffic conditions in every area of work. C. Temporary Telephones and Fax: 1.General: Provide adequate telephone service to expeditiously carry out the requirements of the construction contract. Provide one fax machine at the primary job office on site. Arrange for the local telephone company to install these temporary services to the project. 3.03 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION: A. General: Provide a reasonably neat and uniform appearance in temporary construction and support facilities acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner.

1. Locate field offices, storage and fabrication sheds and other support facilities for easy access to the Work.

B. Temporary Heat: 1. General: Provide temporary heat where indicated or needed for performance of the Work, curing or drying of recently installed work or protection of work in place from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. C. Field Offices: Provide temporary field offices of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at the project site. D. Temporary Roads and Paving:


01 50 00 - 5

1. General: To the fullest extent possible, locate temporary roads and paving for storage areas and temporary parking, in the same locations as permanent facilities for similar uses. To incorporate temporary paving provisions, review significant modifications of permanent paving requirements with the Architect/Engineer for acceptance of the proposed improvements. E. Sanitary Facilities: 1. General: Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. Comply with governing regulations including safety and health codes for the type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities; provide not less than specified requirements. Install in locations that will best serve the project's needs. F. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units to the extent permitted by governing regulations. G. Drinking Water Fixtures: Provide containerized tap-dispenser bottled-water type drinking water units, including the paper cup supply. H. Temporary Enclosures: 1. General: At the earliest practical time provide temporary enclosure of materials, equipment, work in progress and completed portions of the Work to provide protection to the Work and employees from effects of exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities on the site. I. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: 1. General: Prepare project identification and other temporary signs as required. Support on suitable posts or framing of treated wood or steel. Maintain signs in a manner which will properly inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs that are visible outside the site. J. Project Identification Signs: Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics in a neat professional manner. Comply with details and notations to be provided by the Architect.


01 50 00 - 6

K. Collection and Disposal of Wastes: 1. General: Establish a system for daily collection and disposal of waste materials from construction areas and elsewhere on the site. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of waste material in a lawful manner.

3. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION: A. General: Provide a reasonably neat and uniform appearance in security and protection facilities acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner. B. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: 1. General: Comply with recognized standards and code requirements for the erection of substantial, structurally adequate barricades where needed to prevent accidents and losses. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel at the site and the public, of the hazard being protected against. Provide lighting where appropriate and needed, including flashing red lights where appropriate. C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: 1. General: Install substantial and durable general temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances adequate to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar deleterious effects and violations of project security. D. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be temporarily stored, prior to and during construction, and are of substantial value or are attractive for possible theft, provide a secure lockup and enforce strict discipline in connection with the timing of installation and release of materials, so that the opportunity for theft and vandalism is minimized. E. Environmental Protection:

1. General: Provide general protection facilities, operate temporary facilities, conduct construction activities, and


01 50 00 - 7

enforce strict discipline for personnel on the site in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and that minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result from the performance of work at the site. Avoid the use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict the use of noise making tools and equipment to hours of use that will minimize noise complaints from persons or firms near the project site.

2. No use of diesel fuel or hazardous materials will be allowed for cleaning equipment on site.

3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL: A. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect/Engineer requests that it be maintained for a longer period of time, remove each temporary service and facility promptly when the need for it or a substantial portion of it has ended, or when it has been replaced by the authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than substantial completion. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY TERMITE CONTROL TREATMENT HIGHWAY GARAGE 01 51 00

01 51 00- 1

SECTION – 01 51 00 TERMITE CONTROL TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Termite control soil poisoning

1. 02 REFERENCES

A. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act

1. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Chemical soil treatment material and procedures shall conform to current FHA "Minimum Property Standards" Publication No. 300, Section 315, and with recommendations contained in USDA H & G Bulletin No. 74 "Subterranean Termites, their Prevention and Control in Buildings".

B. An experienced pest control operator shall perform soil treatment in a timely fashion and in a manner that will produce the specified results. Operator shall have 5 years documented experience and shall be licensed in the state in which the project is located.

C. Provide certification that toxicants conform to requirements of State in which project is located

1. 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store products in accordance with Section 01600

B. Store products in cool, dry, well ventilated, locked storage space meeting all regulatory requirements.

C. Do not store below 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

D. Chemical shall be stored, handled, and applied in accordance with the directions on the manufacturer's label

1. 05 SEQUENCES

A. Apply toxicant barrier immediately prior to installation of vapor barrier under slabs on grade.

B. Apply toxicant barrier around perimeter of structure after foundation is built.

1. 06 WARRANTY

A. Upon completion of the Work, and as condition of final acceptance, furnish the Owner with a written guarantee and warranty providing:


01 51 00- 2

1. The soil has been treated and that the solution used in the treatment, its concentration, rate, method and location, complies in every respect with these specifications; and

2. If subterranean termite infestation should occur in the treated building within a period of five years from date of treatment, the Contractor shall promptly, and without cost to the Owner, retreat the soil in substantial conformance with these specifications, and repair all construction damage caused by subterranean termites within the one-year warranty period.

3. Provisions for renewal of the guarantee for a total period of up to 15 years. 4. Annual inspections for the presence of subterranean termites during the

guarantee period.

B. The guarantee shall be drawn in favor of the Owner, successors, or assigns. A specimen of the form of guarantee shall be submitted for approval before the work begins.

C. The guarantee shall be effectuated by a bond issued by a surety company licensed in the State of Tennessee and approved by the Owner.

D. The pest control firm applying the treatment shall provide at least annual inspections for five years to detect the presence of subterranean termites, upon notice from the Owner that such presence is suspected.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2. 01 MATERIAL

A. Material shall be a chemical formulated as an emulsible concentrate for subsequent dilution with water. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutent.

B. Chemical: 1. Dragnet 0.5, as manufactured by FMC 2. Pryfrom 0.75, as manufactured by Mobay 3. Dursban TC as manufactured by Dow 4. Approved Substitute.

C. Working solution shall be prepared by diluting chemical with water as recommended by the manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3. 01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that backfilling is complete.

B. Verify the soil surfaces are unfrozen and sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant. Do not apply to excessively wet soil or immediately after heavy rains.

C. Verify that anticipated weather conditions comply with label recommendations prior to application.


01 51 00- 3

3. 02 PREPARATION

A. Remove all non-essential wood and cellulose containing material from foundation walls and crawl spaces.

B. Refer to manufacturer’s instruction on package labels.

C. Mix products with water to produce the emulsions on the project site.

3. 03 INSTALLATION

A. Apply solution to all surfaces under floor slabs on grade throughout the new building

B. Apply solution in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and applicable state regulations.

C. Apply as a course spray to ensure uniform distribution.

D. Application shall be by any method, acceptable to FHA, providing a uniform chemical soil barrier.

E. Outside perimeter of slab-on-grade construction shall be treated after finish grading but before paving and walks abutting building are installed.

3. 04 RE-TREATMENT

A. The Owner reserves the right to obtain and pay for services of and independent testing laboratory to test and inspect field conditions to determine compliance with these specifications.

B. If inspection identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. 05 PROTECTION

A. Treated areas shall not be disturbed during subsequent construction operations.

B. Cover treated soil with a waterproof barrier if slab will not be poured the same day as treatment.

C. Keep all personnel off the treated area until solution is completely dry.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 63 10

______________________________________________________________________

01 63 10 - 1

SECTION 01 63 10 - PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: A. Definitions: Definitions used in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in the contract documents, including such terms as, "specialties", "systems", "structure", "finishes", "accessories", "furnishings", "special construction" and similar terms. Such terms are self- explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry.

1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, regardless of whether they were specifically purchased for the project or taken from the Contractor's previously purchased stock. The term "product" as used herein includes the terms "material", "equipment", "system" and other terms of similar intent.

2. "Named Products" are products identified by use of the manufacturer's name for a product, including such items as a make or model designation, as recorded in published product literature, of the latest issue as of the date of the contract documents.

3. "Materials" are products that must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form units of work.

4. "Equipment" is defined as a product with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and in particular, a product that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.

B. Substitutions: The Contractor's requests for changes in the products, materials, equipment and methods of construction required by the contract documents are considered requests for "substitutions", and are subject to the requirements specified herein. The following are not considered as substitutions:


______________________________________________________________________

01 63 10 - 2

1. Revisions to the contract documents, where requested by the Owner, Architect or Engineer are considered as "changes" not substitutions.

2. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, which have been accepted prior to the Contract Date, are included in the contract documents and are not subject to the requirements for substitutions as herein specified.

3. Specified Contractor options on products and construction methods included in the contract documents are choices available to the Contractor and are not subject to the requirements for substitutions as herein specified.

4. Except as otherwise provided in the contract documents, the Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders as issued by governing authorities do not constitute "substitutions" and do not constitute a basis for change orders.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same generic kind, from a single source, for each unit of work. B. Compatibility of Options: Compatibility of products is a basic requirement of product selection. When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the project, the product selected must be compatible with other products previously selected, even if the products previously selected were also Contractor options. The complete compatibility between the various choices available to the Contractor is not assured by the various requirements of the Contract documents, but must be provided by the Contractor. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Substitution Request Submittal: B. Requests for Substitutions: Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution. In each request identify the product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced by the substitution; include related specification section and drawing numbers, and complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions. Include the following information, as appropriate, with each request.


______________________________________________________________________

01 63 10 - 3

1. Provide complete product data, drawings and descriptions of products, and fabrication and installation procedures.

2. Provide samples where applicable or requested.

3. Provide a detailed comparison of the significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the work originally specified. Significant qualities include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect where applicable.

4. Provide complete coordination information. Include all changes required in other elements of the work to accommodate the substitution, including work performed by the Owner and separate Contractors.

5. Provide a statement indicating the effect the substitution will have on the work schedule in comparison to the schedule without approval of the proposed substitution. Include information regarding the effect of the proposed substitution on the Contract Time.

6. Provide complete cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.

7. Provide certification by the Contractor to the effect that, in the Contractor's option, after thorough evaluation, the proposed substitution will result in work that in every significant respect is equal-to or better than the work required by the Contract documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated.

a. Include in this certification, the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time, which may subsequently be necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.

C. Change Order Form: Submit requests for substitutions in the form and in accordance with procedures required for change order proposals. D. Architect/Engineer's Action: the Architect/Engineer will notify the Contractor of either the acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution.

1. Acceptance will be in the form of a change order. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:


______________________________________________________________________

01 63 10 - 4

A. General: Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Control to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular coordinate delivery and installation to ensure minimum holding or storage times for items known or recognized to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other sources of loss. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT COMPLIANCE: A. General: Requirements for individual products are indicated in the contract documents; compliance with these requirements is in itself a contract requirement. These requirements may be specified in any one of several different specifying methods, or in any combination of these methods. These methods include the following:

1. Proprietary. 2. Descriptive. 3. Performance. 4. Compliance with Reference Standards.

5. Compliance with codes, compliance with graphic details, allowances, and similar provisions of the contract documents also have a bearing on the selection process. B. Procedures for Selecting Products: The Contractor's options in selecting products are limited by requirements of the contract documents and governing regulations. They are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by the Contractor on previous construction projects. Required procedures include but are not limited to the following for the various indicated methods of specifying:

1. Proprietary and Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements:

a. Single Product Name: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated, unless the specification indicates the possible consideration of other products. Advise the Architect/Engineer before proceeding, when it is discovered that the named product is not a reasonable or a feasible solution.

b. Two or More Product Names: Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the products named, at


______________________________________________________________________

01 63 10 - 5

the Contractor's option. Exclude products that do not comply with specification requirements. Do not provide or offer to provide an unnamed product, unless the specification indicates possible consideration of other products. Advise the Architect/Engineer before proceeding where none of the named products comply with specification requirements. or are feasible for use.

c. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or-equal" or similar language, comply with the contract document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval from the Architect/Engineer for the use of an unnamed product.

d. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where the specifications describe a product or assembly generically, in detail, listing the exact characteristics required, but without use of a brand or trade name, provide products or assemblies that provide the characteristics indicated and otherwise comply with contract requirements.

e. Performance Specification Requirements: Where the specifications require compliance with indicated performance requirements, provide products that comply with the specific performance requirements indicated, and that are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. The manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by the manufacturer's individual certification of performance. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for specific performances.

f. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where the specifications require only compliance with an imposed standard, code or regulation, the Contractor has the option of selecting a product that complies with specification requirements, including standards, codes, and regulations.

g. Visual Matching: Where matching an established sample is required, the final judgement of whether a product proposed by the Contractor matches the sample satisfactorily will be determined by the Architect. Where there is no product available within the specified product category that matches the sample satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with the provisions of the contract documents concerning "substitutions" and "change orders" for the selection of a matching product in another


______________________________________________________________________

01 63 10 - 6

product category, or for non-compliance with specified requirements.

h. Allowances: Refer to individual sections of the specifications and "Allowances" provisions in Division-1 sections for an indication of product selections that are controlled by established allowances, and for the procedures required for processing such selections.

2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Conditions: The Contractor's request for a substitution will be received and considered when extensive revisions to the contract documents are not required, when the proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the contract documents, when the requests are timely, fully documented and properly submitted, and when one or more of the following conditions is satisfied, all as judged by the Architect/Engineer ; otherwise the requests will be returned without action except to record non-compliance with these requirements.

1. The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution where the request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the contract documents.

2. The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution where the specified product or method cannot be provided within the Contract Time. However, the request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of the Contractor's failure to pursue the work promptly or to coordinate the various activities properly.

3. The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution where the specified product or method cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.

4. The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for a substitution where a substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting of offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. These additional responsibilities may include such considerations as additional compensation to the Architect/Engineer for re-design and evaluation services, the increased cost of other work by the Owner or separate contractors, and similar considerations.


______________________________________________________________________

01 63 10 - 7

5. The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution when the specified product or method cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible with other materials of the work, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

6. The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution when the specified product or method cannot be properly coordinated with other materials in the work, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be properly coordinated.

7. The Architect/Engineer will consider a request for substitution when the specified product or method cannot receive a warranty as required by the contract documents and where the contractor certifies that the proposed substitution receive the required warranty.

B. Work-Related Submittals: The Contractor's submittal of and the Architect/Engineer's acceptance of shop drawings, product data or samples which related to work not complying with requirements of the contract documents, does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for a substitution, nor approval thereof. 2.03 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: A. General: Provide products that comply with the requirements of the contract documents that are undamaged and unused at the time of installation. Provide products that are complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual sections of these specifications, comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect surfaces as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY CONTRACT CLOSEOUT HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 70 00 ______________________________________________________________________

01 70 00 - 1

SECTION 01 70 00 - CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUEST FOR CLOSE-OUT-INSPECTION A. Substantial Completion: When Contractor considers Work substantially complete, Contractor shall submit to designer:

1. Written assertion that Work is Substantially Complete:

2. A list of items to be completed or corrected and dates scheduled for completion or correction of each item.

3. Certification that orientation and training for facility maintenance personnel is complete.

4. Written assertion that Operating & Maintenance Data Binders are complete and available.

B. Final Inspection: When Contractor considers Work complete, Contractor shall submit to Designer:

1. Certification that a qualified person authorized by Contractor has reviewed the Contract Documents and inspected the Work;

2. Written assertion that the Work is complete and in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for final Inspection;

3. Written assertion that additional materials necessary to augment the Operating & Maintenance Data Binders with instructions for adding these to the Binders, or full replacement Binders, are complete and available.

4. Written assertion that project Data Binders, construction Record Documents and Record Site Survey are complete and available.

C. Upon receipt of an appropriate request for Close-Out inspection, Designer will schedule an inspection meeting with Contractor, and Owner's representatives to determine the status of completion. 1.02 RESULTS OF CLOSE-OUT-INSPECTIONS

A. Should the Designer Determine that Work is not complete to the degree asserted by Contractor, Designer will promptly notify Contractor in writing stating the deficiencies and make a request for Re-Inspection.


01 70 00 - 2

1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: A. Designer will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion on AIA Document G704 accompanied by a list of items to be complete or corrected, and will submit Certificate to Contractor and to Owner for signature with an accounting of Liquidated Damages due, when Designer verifies that:

1.Work is Substantially Complete based on an inspection conducted pursuant to an appropriate request for Close-Out Inspection;

2.Orientation and training for facility maintenance personnel is complete. See SECTION 01 79 21.

3.Operating & Maintenance Data Binders are complete and have been delivered to the Owner.

B. Final Inspection: Designer will certify that the Work is Complete, and will initiate Final Adjustments, when Designer verifies that:

1. Work is complete in accordance with Contract documents based on an inspection conducted pursuant to an appropriate request for close-out inspection;

2. Orientation and training for facility maintenance personnel is complete;

3. Additional materials necessary to augment the Operating & Maintenance data Binders with Instructions for adding these to the Binders, or full replacement Binders, are complete and have been delivered to the Owner.

4. Project Data Binders and construction Record Documents are complete and have been delivered to the Designer.

C. Re-Inspection Fees: If the Work fails a close-out inspection, and a subsequent inspection is requested and conducted based on Contractor assertion of the same stage of completion, Owner will compensate Designer for performing such Re-Inspection as additional services, and deduct the amount of such compensation from the Contract sum by appropriate modification. 1.04 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS


01 70 00 - 3

A. When Designer has certified that the Work is complete, Designer will determine whether modification is needed to reflect appropriate adjustments to Contract Sum which were not previously effected. If such modification is needed, Designer shall prepare it and deliver it to Contractor, who in the case of a change order, shall sign and return it to Designer. B. When Designer has certified that the Work and needed modifications to the Contract are complete, designer will request that Contractor submit a final application for payment. 1.05 WARRANTY INSPECTION: A. A Warranty Inspection will be scheduled and conducted at project site prior to one year from date substantial Completion was achieved, but as close to the end of that year as is reasonably possible. B. Warranty Inspection will be attended by at least one representative each of Owner, Designer, and Contractor. C. Warranty Inspection is intended to be an opportunity for Contractor to become aware of any outstanding corrections needed pursuant to the basic first-year warranty of Work. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY FINAL CLEANING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 71 00

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________

01 71 00 - 1

SECTION 01 71 00- FINAL CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touch-up painting of marred surfaces. B. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FINAL CLEANING: A. General: Special cleaning requirements for specific units of Work are included in the appropriate sections of Divisions 2 through 16. General Cleaning during the regular progress of the Work is required by the General Conditions and is included under section "Temporary Facilities". B. Cleaning: Provide final cleaning of the Work at the time indicated. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit of work to the condition expected from a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for operations. C. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting the Architect/Engineer's inspection for certification of substantial completion. D. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. E. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows, to a polished condition. Remove putty and other substances which are noticeable as vision-obscuring materials.

CHEATHAM COUNTY FINAL CLEANING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 71 00

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________

01 71 00 - 2

Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. F. Clean exposed exterior and interim hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. G. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. H. Clean the project site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved not planted, to a smooth, even-textured surface. I. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by the Architect/Engineer, remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed during the course of the work to protect previously completed work during the remainder of the construction period. J. Compliances: Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning operations. Do not burn waste materials at the site. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile or other harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner. K. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have become the Owner's property, dispose of these to the Owner's best advantage as directed. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 72 06 ________________________________________________________________________

01 72 06 - 1

SECTION 01 72 06 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.01 PART 1 – GENERAL A.DIGITAL FILES:

1.Provide two (2) USB flash drives, each drive including all Project Record Documents listed below (sections B to D) in a searchable PDF format. All file names/numbers shall match the title of each document and provide detailed organization.

a. Include digital copies of all photographs(only, no printed copies) taken during the course of the project.

B.PRINTED DATA BINDERS:

1.Provide one (1) complete set. Provide commercial quality three ring binders with durable plastic covers. Identify project and type of data on face and side of each binder. If multiple binders are required, identify as consecutively numbered volumes. Provide information required by Contract Documents organized as outlined below. Include rated documents under the heading to which each is most closely related. Final payment to the Contractor cannot be issued until receipt of the Project Record documents by the Owner.

2.Provide Introductory Information:

a. Cover sheet giving complete project title and number,

Contractor's name, address, phone number, name of project superintendent, and related general information.

b. Table of Contents to generally identify material in

Binders. Reference and bind separately any over-size documents that cannot be neatly folded and included in this binder.

3.Provide a complete listing of subcontractors and material suppliers, including company name, address, phone number, e-mail and web site address, contact person and locate representative.

a. Detailed Table of Contents for this part

4.Provide Certificates and Acceptance information



01 72 06 - 2

5.Certificate of Substantial Completion 6.Use & Occupancy Permits


7.Certificate(s) of Inspection or letter(s) of acceptance from: a. Detailed Table of Contents for this part

1. Fire Marshal 2. Dept of Labor for boilers and pressure vessels. 3. Public Health Authorities. 4. Other governing authorities as apply.

8.Guarantees, Warranties, Bonds, Certifications, and related documents


b. Contractor's warranty of the work

c. Guarantees, warranties, and bonds, executed by the respective vendors, manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors

d. Certifications

e. Maintenance Agreements and service contracts

f. Complete information for each item:

1.Product of work item & scope of installation

2.Name of provider, with name of responsible principal,

address & telephone number

3.Beginning date and duration

4.Information about instances which might affect validity, and proper procedure in case of failure.


01 72 06 - 3

9. Operating & Maintenance Data Manuals

1.Provide Product Data as outlined below.


b. For each system or product: names, addresses, and

telephone numbers of supplier, installer, and maintenance service company; drawing and specification reference; building location; manufacturer and model number

c. Description of unit and component parts, clearly

identifying the specific product or part installed. When manufacturer's cut sheets are used for product identification, plainly mark specific items included in work.

d. Related information required by Contract Documents,

or furnished with items included in project, that Owner may use for maintenance, operation, repair, renovation, or additions to Work.

2.Provide Operating & Maintenance Data as outlined below for mechanical & electrical systems, equipment and products

a. Detailed Table of Contents for this part b. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance

instructions supplemented with drawings and text to clearly illustrate proper operation and a logical sequence of maintenance procedures.

a. Servicing and lubrication schedule with list of

lubricants. e. Manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly

drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. f. As-installed control diagrams by controls

manufacturer. g. Installer's coordination drawings with as-installed

color coded piping diagrams and wiring diagrams.


01 72 06 - 4

h. Charts of valve tag numbers with the location &

function of each valve.

i. Circuit directories of panel boards.

j. Instructions for care, with a list of manufacturer's recommended types of cleaning agents and methods.

k. List materials and parts furnished for the Owner's

C. PRINTED CONSTRUCTION RECORD DOCUMENTS(AS-BUILTS):

1. Provide one set blacklines of As Built drawings consisting of all original contract drawings with all changes noted by the Contractor in red markings. The as-built set of Contract Documents shall be kept in good condition for submittal to Designer upon completion of construction activity. In the course of the work, Contractor shall legibly mark these documents to record actual conditions of Work, including: location, depth, and identification of new and existing underground items, location by dimension and identification of utilities, valves, tap points, equipment, service access, test points, and related features, field changes in dimensions and detail, changes by addenda, change orders, and construction change directives, description and details of features for maintenance, service, replacement, or expansion of the Work.

D. FINAL RECORD SITE SURVEY:

1. Provide one printed copy of the as-built site survey as described under Section 01 05 00 Field Engineering.

E. RECORD DRAWING CHECKLIST: See attached. END OF SECTION

RUFUS JOHNSON ASSOCIATESarchitecture + planning + interior design + sustainability

CLOSE OUT/ RECORD DRAWING CHECKLIST

# Description Com

plet

ed

Initials DateA-1 (1) Two USB including all Project Record

Documents in PDF formatA-2 (2) Digital Photographs

B-1 Printed Data Binder (1 hard copy) including all information listed below in sections B-2 thru B9

B-2 Introductory Information and Table of Contents

B-3 List of Subcontractors and suppliers

B-4 Certificates and Acceptance information

B-5 Certificate of Substantial Completion (AIA form G704) and all related information

B-6 Use and occupancy permits

B-7 Certificates of Inspection or letters of acceptance

B-8 Guarantees, Warranties, Bonds, Certification, and related documents

B-9 Operational and Maintenance Manuals

C Printed Construction Record Documents (As-builts)

D Final Record Site Survey (1 hard copies)

Company Name Address

Company Representative Phone no.

Email

Signature Date

The above named representative certifies that the above close out check list is complete to the best of his/her knowledge.

All items mentioned below are required to be summited prior to the designer requesting submission of final payment.

CHEATHAM COUNTY DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 01 79 21

___________________________________________________________________________________

01 79 21 - 1

SECTION 01 79 21 DEMONSTRATION and TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL: not used

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: not used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Equipment Start-up

A. Conduct demonstration and instruction as soon as practicable upon installations, and prior to Substantial Completion inspection. Substantial Completion shall not be certified, nor shall Owner be required to assume responsibility for operating, maintaining, or insuring system, prior to complete demonstration and instruction.

B. Demonstrate operation of newly provided equipment and systems to Owner and to Owner's representatives. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems, using the operating and maintenance data as the basis of instruction.

C. Make lists of persons witnessing equipment and systems demonstration, and persons receiving operating instruction. Include copy of lists in the Operating and Maintenance Data Binders.

D. Provide two copies to the Owner of a video on a USB Flash Drive of each training session.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 03 30 00

03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:

a. Foundations and footings. b. Slabs-on-grade. c. Equipment pads and bases.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including

reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Architect.

C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending,

and placing concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures.

D. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design

test. E. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports

when permitted by Architect. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.


03 30 00 - 2


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for

Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of

Standard Practice."

B. Provide special inspections and verifications for concrete construction in compliance with Section 1705.3 of the International Building Code, 2012 Edition, meeting the minimum requirements of Table 1705.3. Concrete Testing Service: A qualified special inspector, approved by the Architect, shall be retained by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.

C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at

any time during progress of Work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's expense.

D. Contractor shall notify the Architect or Structural Engineer a

minimum of 24 hours prior to any concrete pour totaling more than 10 cubic yards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.

2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.

(Fabricated from sheets, rolls are not allowed.)


03 30 00 - 3

C. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide

aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. D. Water: Potable. E. Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not

more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer

to be compatible with other required admixtures. G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. H. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.

2.04 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested according to ASTM E 154, as follows:

1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 10 mils thick.

B. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type

membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I-D, Class B.

2.05 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.


03 30 00 - 4

B. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control

testing. C. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 20 percent of cement content by

weight. D. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each

class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect.

E. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following

properties as indicated on drawings and schedules:

1. 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.60 maximum.

2. 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.45 maximum.

F. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete

slump at point of placement as follows:

1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 4 inches. 2. Footings: 5 inches. 3. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches.

G. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be

requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work.

2.06 ADMIXTURES

A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient

temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C). C. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless

otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of


03 30 00 - 5

placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within the following limits:

D. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing,

deicer chemicals, or hydraulic pressure:

1. 3% to 5% for maximum 2 inch aggregate. 2. 3% to 7% for maximum ¾ inch aggregate. 3. 6% to 8% for maximum ½ inch aggregate.

E. Other concrete not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic

pressure, or to receive a surface hardener: 2 to 4 percent air. F. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or

retarding in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. 2.07 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.

B. For normal weight concrete a maximum of 2 gallons of water per

cubic yard may be added to batch for material with insufficient slump.

C. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F

(32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

3.02 FORMS

A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits.


03 30 00 - 6

3.03 VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. General: Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.

B. Lap joints and seal according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.04 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified.

B. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during

reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.

C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and

other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against

displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.

E. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum cover as indicated for

concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

F. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap

adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.05 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.

B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints

in walls and slabs and between walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs.


03 30 00 - 7

C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in

slabs-on-grade at points of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

E. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section

"Joint Sealants." F. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct

contraction joints in slabs-on-grade to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard,

or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris.

H. Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw

cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate.

I. If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15

feet in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays).

3.06 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.

B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate

screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.


03 30 00 - 8

3.07 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing,

Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that

no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.

D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal

layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

E. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment

supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.

F. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert

and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.

G. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in

a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section.

H. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete

is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.

I. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike

off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps


03 30 00 - 9

or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

J. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete

placement. K. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as

follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

L. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40

deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

M. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.

Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

N. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing

antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

O. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that

would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.

P. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at

time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

Q. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too

hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

R. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before

placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.

S. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high

temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.


03 30 00 - 10

3.08 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed.

B. Pattern Formed Finish: Repair and patch defective areas with fins

and other projections completely removed. Sandblast finish (amount of material removed to be coordinated with the Architect).

C. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Provide grout-cleaned finish on scheduled

concrete surfaces that have received smooth-formed finish treatment.

D. Combine one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine

sand by volume, and a 50:50 mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding admixture and water to form the consistency of thick paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.

E. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and

fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing.

F. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets,

and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.09 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES

A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing,


03 30 00 - 11

membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated.

B. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not

work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

C. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces

exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.

D. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a

power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

E. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to

be installed with thin-set mortar, apply a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly scarifying the surface with a fine broom.

F. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior

concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. G. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete

surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or


03 30 00 - 12

directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping

forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment

bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.

B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from

concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting; keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing,

by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.

D. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior

slabs, walks, and curbs as follows: E. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing

operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

F. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs,

floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method.


03 30 00 - 13

G. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a

moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.12 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as work progresses. Failure to detect defective work shall not prevent rejection when defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate the Owner for final acceptance.

B. The Special Inspector described in Part 1 of this specification

section shall provide quality control testing. His testing firm shall meet the requirements of “Standard Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction”, ASTM E329.

C. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement

shall comply with the requirements of Section 1705.3 of the International Building Code, 2012 Edition.

D. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to

comply with ASTM C 94. E. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's

pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.

F. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or

normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

G. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air

temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

H. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour

exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

I. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength

tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least


03 30 00 - 14

five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

J. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50

cubic yd., Architect may waive strength testing if adequate evidence if satisfactory strength is provided.

K. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of

companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

L. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if

averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

M. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural

Engineer, ready-mix producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

N. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of

in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

END OF SECTION 03 30 00

CHEATHAM COUNTY UNIT MASONRY HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 04 20 00 ________________________________________________________________________

04 20 00 - 1

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and schedule. B. Types of masonry work required include:

1. Concrete unit masonry (CMU). 2. Mortar.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: B. Single Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color and without excessively large open pores from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. C. Single Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. D. Mortar and Grout Testing: The General Contractor shall provide an Independent Testing Agency approved by the Architect to verify on- site mortar mix compliance with the specifications. The testing agency shall submit formal test reports from periodic on-site sampling to the Architect for review. Mortar found not to be in compliance with the specifications will result in block removal and reinstallation as directed by the Architect. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS:


04 20 00 -2

A. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns. B. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Cold Weather Protection:

1. Do not lay masonry units which are wet or frozen.

2. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch.

D. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. 1.05 TEMPERATURE: Do not erect masonry when ambient temperature has dropped below 45° F. unless it is rising and at no time when it has dropped below 40° F except by written permission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS. A. Provide special shapes where required for lintels, corners, jambs, headers, bonding and other special conditions. B. Concrete Block: Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for Grade, Type, face size, exposed face and, under each form included, for weight classification.

1. Grade N.

2. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual) x thicknesses indicated.

3. Hollow Loadbearing Block: ASTM C 90 and as follows:

a. Weight Classification: Lightweight.

2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS:


04 20 00 -3

A. MORTAR: ASTM C270. Admixtures are not allowed, other than the factory blended integral water repellent.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Aggregates for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. F. Water: Clean and potable. 2.03 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHORING DEVICES: A. Materials: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic materials and with requirements indicated under each form of joint reinforcement, tie and anchor for size and other characteristics:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire and with ASTM A 123, Class B-2 (1.5 oz. per sq. ft. of wire surface) for zinc coating applied after prefabrication into units.

2. Mill Galvanized Steel Wire will be acceptable for interior walls only.

B. Joint Reinforcement: Provide welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10', with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below:

1. Width: Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to provide mortar coverage of not less than 5/8" on joint faces exposed to exterior and 1/2" elsewhere.

2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.1483" diameter.

3. For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:

a. Truss design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c.


04 20 00 -4

C. Anchor Bolts: Provide steel bolts with hex nuts and flat washers complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A, in sizes and configurations indicated. D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 2. Rodenhouse Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES: A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615. 2.05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES. A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air- entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellant agents, anti-freeze compounds or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregate in a mechanical batch mixer; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specifications, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement- lime.

2. Use Type S mortar for all concrete masonry. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for grout for use in construction of reinforced and non-reinforced unit masonry. Use grout of consistency indicated or if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which will completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout.

1. Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2" in horizontal direction, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2" or more in least horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated.


04 20 00 -5

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Do not wet concrete masonry units. B. Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcing. C. Thickness:Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. D. Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size units without cutting where possible.

1. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units 3.02 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES: A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1/4" in 10'. For external corners and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20' maximum. For vertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 10'. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8" in 10' or 1/16" within width of a single unit. C. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8", with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2". Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8". D. Gaps above exterior door frames shall not exceed 1/2". 3.03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS: A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and to accurately locate opening, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations.


04 20 00 -6

B. Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Do not use units with less than nominal 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Built-in Work: As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

3. Fill cores in hollow masonry units with grout 3 courses (24") under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS: A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on slabs and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. B. Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not shown, lay walls with 3/8" joints. C. Tool all joints concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness and with a 16” sled runner. This includes all joints, both concealed and exposed. D. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. 3.05 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT: A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire


04 20 00 -7

length with a minimum cover of 5/8" exterior side of walls, 1/2" elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6". B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted to be omitted. D. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. F. Space continuous horizontal reinforcement as follows:

1. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcement at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcement placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints.

1. In addition to wall reinforcement, provide additional reinforcement at openings as required to comply with the above.

3.06 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK: A. General: Provide anchor devices of type indicated. B. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3.Space anchors 16” on center both ways. 3.07 LINTELS:


04 20 00 -8

A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 2'-0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or formed-in-place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.

1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintel units with reinforcement bars placed as shown filled with coarse grout.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.08 REPAIR, POINTING, AND CLEANING: A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer's directions. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY STRUCTURAL STEEL HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 05 12 00

05 12 00 - 1

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on drawings including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required.

B. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of

Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings.

C. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in

Division 5. D. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt installation in concrete,

Division 4 for anchor bolt installation in masonry. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Shop drawings including complete details and schedules for

fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures, and diagrams.

C. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other

pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each weld.

D. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for

installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections.


05 12 00 - 2


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated:

B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of

Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." C. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion

of the following sentence: D. "This approval constitutes the owner's acceptance of all

responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings."

E. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including

"Commentary." F. "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490

Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections.

G. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code -

Steel." H. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel

Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use." I. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and

welding operators in accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements.

J. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have

satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests. K. Provide special inspections and verifications for steel

construction in compliance with Section 1705.2 of the International Building Code, 2012 Edition, and meeting the minimum requirements of Table 1705.2.2. A qualified special inspector, approved by the Architect, shall be retained by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.


05 12 00 - 3

B. Deliver anchor rods and anchorage devices, which are to be

embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work.

C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and

identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and re-lubricate before use.

D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause

distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be

exposed to view, use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface finishes.

B. Structural Steel W Shapes: ASTM A572, Grade 50 or ASTM A992. C. Channels, Angles,Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36. D. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. E. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A 501. G. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. H. Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or

1020, cold-finished carbon steel with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications.

I. Anchor rods: ASTM F1554 Grade 36, unless otherwise indicated. J. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural

bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows:


05 12 00 - 4

K. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers, complying with ASTM A 325.

L. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, type as required. M. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. N. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC - Paint 11.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble

structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated.

B. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.

C. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including

welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects.

D. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. E. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or

other connections are indicated. F. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all bolted

connections, except where unfinished bolts are indicated. G. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength

threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

H. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

I. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing

other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings.


05 12 00 - 5

J. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty

items as indicated to receive other work. K. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

2.03 SHOP PAINTING

A. General: Shop-paint structural steel, except those members or

portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only.

B. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after

assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

C. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping,

clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:

D. SP-2 "Hand-Tool Cleaning." E. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply

structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to

inspection and tests in mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements.

B. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components

that do not comply.


05 12 00 - 6

C. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work.

D. Promptly notify Architect whenever design of members and

connections for any portion of structure are not clearly indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION

A. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates.

B. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for

structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. C. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been

positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

D. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or

plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.

E. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's

instructions. F. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and

elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

G. Level and plumb individual members of structure within

specified AISC tolerances. H. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop

drawings.


05 12 00 - 7

I. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

J. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of

temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds

K. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using

drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

L. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for

correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted.

M. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field

welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting.

N. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness

of 1.5 mils. 3.02 QUALITY CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION


B. The Special Inspector described in Part 1 of this

specification section shall provide quality control testing. His testing firm shall meet the requirements of “Standard Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction”, ASTM E329.

C. The Special Inspector’s testing firm shall provide all

required testing and inspections of steel construction as required by Section 1705.2 of the International Building Code, 2012 Edition.


CHEATHAM COUNTY METAL DECK HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 05 31 00

05 31 00 - 1

SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Steel roof deck (dust cover deck). 2. Steel Floor Deck.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements

that relate to this Section:

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing openings with miscellaneous steel shapes.

2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for touch up and repair painting of deck.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each type of deck, accessory, and product

specified. C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage

details, reinforcing channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.

D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of steel deck

certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed steel deck similar in material, design, and extent to


05 31 00 - 2

that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Provide special inspections and verifications for steel deck construction in compliance with Section 1704.3 of the International Building Code, 2009 Edition, meeting the minimum requirements of Table 1704.3. A qualified special inspector, approved by the Architect, shall be retained by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.

C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1

"Structural Welding Code--Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS

qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide

drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Roof Deck, Inc. 2. United Steel Deck, Inc. 3. Vulcraft Div. of Nucor Corp. 4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.

2.02 DUST COVER DECK

A. Steel Mezzanine Deck: Fabricate panels without top-flange stiffening grooves conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck" and the following:


05 31 00 - 3

1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, Grade C, shop primed

as follows: a. Shop Primer: Grey or white baked-on, lead- and

chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer, conforming to the performance requirements of Fed. Spec. TT-P-664.

2. Deck Profile: Type B, wide rib or Type N metal deck. 3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) Type B or 3 inches (76

mm) Type N. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch (0.75 mm). 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 6. Side Joints: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's

option.

2.03 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK

A. Metal Floor Deck:

1. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A653. 2. Galvanizing: ASTM A653. 3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm). 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0474 inch (1.2 mm). 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 6. Side Joints: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's

option.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide accessory materials for steel deck that comply with requirements indicated and recommendations of the steel deck manufacturer.

B. Side Lap Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant,

hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel deck.


05 31 00 - 4

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Do not place deck panels on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and is dry.

B. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting

members. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary of SDI Publication No. 28, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels when required

to meet deflection limitations. C. Place deck panels on supporting framing and adjust to final

position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting framing before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.

D. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting framing

without warp or deflection. E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and

other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking. F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as

required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work.

G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded

metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

3.04 DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten deck units to steel supporting members as indicated on the drawings. Use manufacturers suggested method if not shown otherwise on drawings.

B. Touch-Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean

and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and steel supporting members.


05 31 00 - 5

3.05 QUALITY CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION


B. The Special Inspector described in Part 1 of this specification

section shall provide quality control testing. His testing firm shall meet the requirements of “Standard Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction”, ASTM E329.

C. The Special Inspector’s testing firm shall provide all required

testing and inspections of steel construction as required by Section 1705.2 and Table 1705.2.2 of the International Building Code, 2012 Edition.


CHEATHAM COUNTY METAL FABRICATIONS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 05 50 00

05 50 00 - 1

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following metal fabrications:

1. Rough hardware. 2. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 3. Grout. 4. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following:

a. Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other sections.

5. Metal stairs.


1. Division 5 Sections “Inclined Metal Ladders” and "Pipe and Tube Railings”.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

C. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect.

D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.


05 50 00 - 2

E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.

B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel," AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

C. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS as applicable 2.01 FERROUS METALS


05 50 00 - 3

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786/A 786M.

D. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:

1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. 2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

a.For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 53.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight required by structural loads.

1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

F. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.

G. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010). H. Steel channel stair stringers: ASTM A36 I. Steel tube columns: ASTM 500 J. Channel shaped perforated checkerplate stair treads: ASTM A569 K. Steel perforated checkerplate stair landings: ASTM A569 L. Steel angle framing: ASTM A36

M. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


05 50 00 - 4

1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153.

N. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded.

2.02 PAINT

A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers.

2.03 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6), with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M), and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Machine Screws: ANSI B18.6.3.

D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1 (ANSI B18.2.3.8M).

E. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ANSI B18.6.1.

F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI B18.22.1 (ANSI B18.22M).


05 50 00 - 5

G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B18.21.1.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

I. Material: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM

B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

J. Material: Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

K. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as required.

2.04 GROUT

A. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.

B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Nonshrink, Metallic Grouts:

a.Supreme Plus; Cormix Construction Chemicals. b.Hi Mod Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. c.Embeco 885 and 636; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. d.Ferrolith G Redi-Mix and G-NC; Sonneborn Building e.Products--ChemRex, Inc. f.Met-ox; The Spray-Cure Company.

2. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts:


05 50 00 - 6

a. B-6 Construction Grout; W. R. Bonsal Co. b. Diamond-Crete Grout; Concrete Service Materials Co. c. Supreme; Cormix Construction Chemicals.

d. Sure-grip High Performance Grout; Dayton Superior Corp. e. Euco N-S Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. f. Five Star Grout; Five Star Products. g. Vibropruf #11; Lambert Corp. h. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. i. Masterflow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. j. Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows, Inc. k. Sonogrout 14; Sonneborn Building Products--ChemRex, Inc. l. Kemset; The Spray-Cure Company.

2.05 METAL STAIRS

A. Metal stair design shall be provided by the Metal Stair fabricator through comprehensive shop drawings sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for their preparation.

2.06 CONCRETE FILL

A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless higher strengths are indicated.

2.07 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners.


05 50 00 - 7

Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

D. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F (55.5 deg C).

E. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

F. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

G. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.

H. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

I. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

1. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 2. Remove welding flux immediately. 3. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

J. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

K. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

L. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

M. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.


05 50 00 - 8

N. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.08 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. Furnish bent, or otherwise custom-fabricated, bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 Sections.

B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections and furnish steel washers elsewhere.

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not a part of structural steel framework as required to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

C. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.

1. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by 8 inches (200 mm) long.

2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Refer to Section "09 91 00 Painting" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION


05 50 00 - 9

A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from water and concrete entry.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.


05 50 00 - 10

3.03 SETTING LOOSE PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.

B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonshrink, metallic grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal utilizing low VOC paint is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY INCLINED METAL LADDERS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 05 51 33 _______________________________________________________________________

05 51 33

SECTION 05 51 33 INCLINED METAL LADDERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Aluminum Ships Ladder.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous metal supports.

B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 34 00.

B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings for Ladders: 1. Plan and section of ladder installation.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store ladder until installation inside under cover. If stored outside, under a tarp or suitable cover.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Limited Warranty: Five years against defective material and workmanship, covering parts only, no labor or freight. Defective parts, if deemed so by the manufacturer, will be replaced at no charge, freight excluded, upon inspection at manufacturer's plant which warrants same.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Precision Ladders is the design standard herein.

B. Substitution requests will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 63 10.

2.2 ALUMINUM SHIPS LADDER

A. Aluminum Ships Ladder 1. Model: SL-72 Aluminum Ships Ladder as manufactured by

Precision Ladders, LLC. 2. Capacity: Unit shall support a 1000 lb (454 kg) total


05 51 33

load without failure. 3. Degree of Incline: 70 degrees. 4. With Model ER-1 Extend-A-Rail.

B. Components: Ladder, mounting brackets and handrails on both sides. 1. Ladder Stringer: 5 inch by 2 inch by 3/16 inch (127 mm by

51 mm by 5 mm) extruded 6005-T5 aluminum channel.

2. Ladder Treads: 8 1/2 inch by 1-1/8 inch by 1/8 inch (131 mm by 29 mm by 3 mm) extruded 6005-T5 aluminum with serrated slip resistance surface standard. 1-1/4 inch by 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 inch angle welded to underside of treads. Treads shall be welded and bolted to stringer with 1/4” stainless steel bolts.

3. Risers: Open.

4. Ladder Mounting Brackets:

a. Floor Brackets: 2 inch by 3 inch by 1/4 inch (51 mm by 76 mm by 6 mm) aluminum angle.

b. Top Bracket: 4-3/4 inch by 5 inch by 1/4 inch (121 mm by 127 mm by 6 mm) aluminum angle.

5. Handrails: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) Schedule 40, 6005-T5 aluminum pipe provided with internal aluminum fittings.

6. Finishes: a. Standard: Mill finish on aluminum ladder components. b. Optional Finishes

1. Powder Coated – Safety Yellow.

C. Selected Options 1. Tread material: bar grating. 2. Extend-A-Rail, ladder safety post attached to one side of

ladder to assist the climber in entering or exiting the top of ladder.

2.3 LADDER SAFETY POST

A. Ladder Safety Post and Components: Telescoping post, mounting plate, adjustable tension bushing, locking slot, and knob. 1. Model: Model ER-1 Extend-A-Rail Ladders Safety Post as

manufactured by Precision Ladders LLC. 2. Capacity: Unit shall support a 200 lb (91 kg) loading

without failure. 3. Performance Standard: Units designed and manufactured to

meet or exceed ANSI A14.3, OSHA 1910.23, and OSHA 1910.29.

B. Components: 1. Telescoping Post: 1.62” OD (42 mm) Schedule 40 aluminum

pipe. 2. Mounting Plate: 16 inch by 4 inch by 1/4 inch (407 mm by


05 51 33

102 mm by 6 mm) aluminum plate. 3. Adjustable Tension Bushing: Delrin bushing with internal

compression ring. 4. Locking Slot and Knob: Allows safety post to remain in

raised position. Raising and quarter turning will disengage the post and allow it to be returned to its lowered position.

5. Hardware: All mounting hardware shall be type 316 stainless steel.

6. Finishes: Anodized Aluminum (red) post and (black) mounting plate.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Completely fabricate ladder ready for installation before shipment to the site.

B. Completely fabricate handrail components ready for field assembly to ladder before shipment to site.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

B. Examine materials upon arrival at site. Notify the carrier and manufacturer of any damage.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY PIPE AND TUBE HIGHWAY GARAGE RAILINGS SECTION 05 52 13 _______________________________________________________________________

05 52 13 - 1

SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: B. Steel pipe, steel plate and tube handrails and railing systems. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this Section.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of materials based on the following:

1.Cold-Formed Structural Steel: AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials for handrails, railing systems, anchors, and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising handrails and railing systems.

1.Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated:

A.Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction.

2.Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated:


05 52 13 - 2

A.Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction.

3.Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied to 1 sq. ft. (0.09 sq. m) at any point in the system including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing the infill area.

A. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails of railing systems in determining stress on guard.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in engineering, fabricating, and installing handrails and railing systems to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components and connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

1.Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C) ambient 180 deg F (100 deg C) material surfaces.

D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for mechanically connected handrails and railing systems, each kind of fitting, grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railing systems including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.

D. For installed handrails and railing systems indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for their preparation.


05 52 13 - 3

E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. F. Include a list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and material from a single manufacturer.

1.07 STORAGE

A. Store handrails and railing systems inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railing systems are indicated to fit to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows:

1. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements.

2. Mount handrails on plaster or gypsum board assemblies only where reinforced to receive anchors and where the location of concealed reinforcements has been clearly marked for benefit of Installer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METALS

A. General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.


05 52 13 - 4

1. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated, complying with the following requirements:

a. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:

b. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight, type, and grade required by structural loads.

c. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010).

d. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS

A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loadings.

1. For steel railings and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and their attachment to other work, except where otherwise indicated.


05 52 13 - 5

D. Cast-in-Place and Post-installed Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified, independent testing agency.

1. Cast-in-place anchors. 2. Chemical anchors. 3. Expansion anchors. 4. Undercut anchors.

2.03 PAINT

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers to comply with applicable requirements of Division 9 Section "Painting."

2.04 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

B. Interior Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Use for interior applications only.

C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts:

A. Euco N-S Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. B. Five Star Grout; Five Star Products. C. Masterflow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. D. Sealtight 588 Grout; W.R. Meadows, Inc. E. Sonogrout 14; Sonneborn Building Products--ChemRex, Inc.

2. Interior Anchoring Cement:

A. Ankertite Cement; Dayton Superior Corp. B. Por-Rok; Minwax Construction Products Division.


05 52 13 - 6

2.05 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow members, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than those required to support structural loads.

B. Assemble handrails and railing systems in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Form changes in direction of members as detailed and as follows:

D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe.

E. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railing systems for connection of members by welding. For connections made during fabrication, weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop

strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At tee and cross intersections, cope ends of intersecting

members to fit contour of pipe or tube to which end is joined, and weld all around.

5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces

smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

F. Nonwelded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railing systems by connecting members with railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise indicated.


05 52 13 - 7

G. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where this represents manufacturer's standard splicing method.

H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing system members to other construction.

I. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices to connect handrails and railing systems to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and railing systems. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

J. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel, not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, and steel plate forming bottom closure.

K. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel pipe whose inside diameter is sized for a close fit with posts and to limit deflection of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than 1/12 of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist accidental dislodgement.

L. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges.

M. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

N. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

O. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.

P. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at the edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.


05 52 13 - 8

Q. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers, of thickness and size indicated or required to support structural loads of handrails, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing substrate.

2.06 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of handrails and railing systems.

2.07 STEEL FINISHES

A. For steel handrails and railing systems, provide ferrous metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrails and railing components, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION


05 52 13 - 9

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.


A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing handrails and railing systems. Set handrails and railing systems accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 12 feet (2 mm in 1 m).Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (2 mm in 1 m).

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

2. Remove welding flux immediately.

3. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

D. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by design loadings.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railing systems and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.


05 52 13 - 10

3.03 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical joints for permanently connecting railing components. Locate exposed fasteners in least conspicuous locations. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws with plastic filler, cement colored to match finish of handrails and railing systems.

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components by welding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contact, or use fittings designed for this purpose.

3.04 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Anchor posts in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, solidly fill annular space between post and sleeve with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.

B. Anchor posts in concrete by forming or core-drilling holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of all loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.

Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

C. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave 1/8-inch (3-mm) buildup, sloped away from post.

D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.

3.05 ANCHORING RAIL ENDS

1. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with postinstalled anchors and bolts.


05 52 13 - 11

2. Anchor rail ends to metal surfaces with oval or round flanges.

3. Weld flanges to rail ends. Connect flanges to rail ends using nonwelded connections. Bolt flanges to metal surfaces. 3.06 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS

A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

C. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows:

D. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts with square heads.

3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of handrails and railing systems from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY ROUGH CARPENTRY HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 06 10 00 _____________________________________________________________________

06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Definition: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Types of work in this section include rough carpentry for:

1. Wood blocking. 2. Plywood. 3. Fire retardant treated wood. Where

indicated on the plans. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER, GENERAL:

A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.

B. Grade Stamps: Factory-mark each piece of lumber with grade

stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.


06 10 00 - 2

C. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.

D. Provide seasoned lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at

time of dressing shipment for sizes 2" or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 PLYWOOD: A. Exterior grade designation CDX. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER:

A. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including bucks,blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows:

B. Moisture content: 19% maximum for lumber items not specified

receive wood preservative treatment.

C. Grade: Construction Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber as required. No. 3 Common or Standard grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards per SPIB rules.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:

A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails.

1. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground

contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153).

2.05 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS:


06 10 00 - 3

A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "P.T." or "Treated," or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements.

B. Comply with most recent EPA regulations regarding content of

preservatives.

1. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content, respectively of 19% and 15%. Treat indicated items and the following:

2. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing.

3. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

C. Pressure treatment shall be with non-salt preservatives. This

requirement supersedes any preservatives noted in any above listed references.

D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment,

where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:

A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members

plumb and true to line and cut and fitted.


06 10 00 - 4

C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

3.02 WOOD GROUNDS BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS:

A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.

B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading.

Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated,

key- bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY INTERIOR HIGHWAY GARAGE ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 06 40 23

____________________________________________________________________

06 40 23 - 1

SECTION 06 40 23 – INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. Extent of each type of architectural woodwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of architectural woodwork include the following:

1.Laminate Clad Cabinets and Countertops. 1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Quality Certification: Submit woodwork Manufacturer's (Fabricator's)certification, stating that fabricated woodwork complies with quality grades and other requirements indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. C. Samples: Submit the following samples:

1. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit of each type and finish. 2. Plastic laminate.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except as otherwise indicated. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork items by same firm.


____________________________________________________________________

06 40 23 - 2

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Conditioning: Woodwork Manufacturer and Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork installation and storage areas. Do not install woodwork until required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas. B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed woodwork within a 1.0 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content, from date of installation through remainder of construction period. Require Woodwork Manufacturer to establish optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated with openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items and work. C. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D. Pre-Cut Openings: Fabricate architectural woodwork with pre-cut openings, where possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams for proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in countertops and similar exposures seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant coating. E. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field


____________________________________________________________________

06 40 23 - 3

measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as required for accurate fit. 2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS, LAMINATE CLAD: A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400B. B. Laminate Clad Cabinets: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3 and as follows:

3. Colors, Patterns and Finishes: As indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from laminate manufacturers' standard products in the following categories:

A. Standard Colors.

4. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Provide surface material indicated below:

A. Woodworker's standard low pressure laminate.

2.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. High Performance Core: Shall be particleboard, minimum 47 lb. (21.3 kg) density, of balanced 3-ply construction with moisture content not to exceed 8%. Particleboard shall conform to ANSI A208.1-1999, Grade M-3. Further, core shall be of 40% post-industrial recycled content or 20% post-consumer recycled content. B. VOC content: Wood to contain less than 30 g/L. 2.04 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS: A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items which are specified in Division-8 section "Finish Hardware".


____________________________________________________________________

06 40 23 - 4

B. Cabinet Hardware : Refer to Cabinet Hardware Schedule at the end of this section. C. Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA 1301 for finishes indicated by BHMA Code Numbers or if not otherwise indicated, provide finishes complying with requirements indicated below:

1. For exposed hardware comply with requirements indicated for finish and base indicated below:

2. US26 D Satin Chrome.

2.05 LAMINATE CLAD COUNTERTOPS: Comply with the following requirements: A. Grade:Custom.

B. Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3 and as follows:

1. Colors, Patterns and Finishes: As indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from laminate manufacturers' standard products .

C. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Provide surface material indicated below:

1. Woodworker's standard low pressure laminate. D. Countertops with sinks shall be specified laminate cladding on Moisture Resistant particleboard. Submit for review and approval.

E. Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface: High pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3 and as follows:

1. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected from laminate manufacturer's standard products in the following categories:

A. Standard colors.

2. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surface.


____________________________________________________________________

06 40 23 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. B. Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion, and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install woodwork plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including tops); and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. B. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. C. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where pre-finished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposing nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork, and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. Maintain veneer sequence matching (if any) of cabinets with transparent finish. D. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. E. Wood Storage Shelving: Complete the assembly of units and install in the areas indicated, including hardware and accessories as indicated. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION:


____________________________________________________________________

06 40 23 - 6

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. D. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section, to whatever extent not completed at shop or prior to installation of woodwork. E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Fabricator and Installer, which ensures architectural woodwork being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. 3.04 CABINET HARDWARE SCHEDULE: A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Grass. 2. Stanley. 3. Knape and Vogt B. Cabinet door Hinges: Grass No. 3803 VS8 concealed self-closing or equal. C. Door and Drawer Pulls: Stanley No. 4484 or equal. D. Drawer Guides: Knape and Vogt No. 1429 or equal. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY WATER REPELLENTS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 07 19 00 _________________________________________________________________________________________________________

07 19 00 - 1

WATER REPELLENTS SECTION 07 19 00 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Application of water repellents to protect above-grade, vertical and

horizontal concrete surfaces. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 2369-92 - Test Methods for Volatile Content of Coatings. B. ASTM D 3960-93 - Practice for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content

of Paints and Related Coatings. C. Federal Specification SS-W-110C - Water Repellent, Colorless Silicon,

Resin Base. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 34 00 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets on all

products to be used for the work. Submit description for protection of surrounding areas and nonmasonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, and final cleaning.

C. Applicator Qualifications: Submit qualifications of applicator. 1. Certification stating applicator is experienced in the application

of the specified products. 2. List of recently completed water repellent projects, including

project name and location, names of owner and architect, and description of products used, substrates, applicable local environmental regulations, and application procedures.

D. Environmental Regulations: Submit applicable local environmental

regulations.


07 19 00 - 2

E. VOC Certification: Submit certification that water repellents furnished comply with regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC).

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Experienced in the application of the specified products. 2. Employs persons trained for the application of the specified

products. B. Pre-Application Meeting: Convene a pre-application meeting 2 weeks

before the start of application of water repellents. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including the Contractor, Architect, applicator and Manufacturer representative. Review environmental regulations, test panel procedures, protection of surrounding areas and nonmasonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, field quality control, final cleaning, and coordination with other work.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS A. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local environmental

regulations. 1.07 TEST PANELS A. Before full-scale application, review manufacturer's product data

sheets to determine the suitability of each product for the specific surfaces. Apply each water repellent to test panels to determine number of applications, coverage rates, compatibility, effectiveness, surface preparation, application procedures, and desired results.

B. Apply water repellents to test panels in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions. Allow 48 hours or until test panels are thoroughly dry before evaluating final appearance and results. Do not begin full-scale application until test panels are inspected and approved by the Architect.

C. Test Panel Requirements: 1. Size: Minimum 4 feet by 4 feet each. 2. Locations: As determined by the Architect. 3. Number: As required to completely test each water repellent with

each type of substrate to be protected. D. Retain and protect test panels approved by the Architect in

undisturbed condition during the work of this section, to be used as a standard for judging the water repellent work.



07 19 00 - 3

A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage and Handling: Store containers upright in a cool, dry, well

ventilated place, out of the sun. Store away from all other chemicals and potential sources of contamination. Keep lights, fire, sparks, and heat away from containers. Do not drop containers or slide across sharp objects. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperature Limitations: 1. Do not apply at surface and air temperatures below 40°F or above

95°F, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not apply when surface and air temperatures are not expected to remain above 40°F for a minimum of 8 hours after application, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not apply under windy conditions such that water repellent may be

blown to surfaces not intended. C. Do not apply to frozen substrate. Allow adequate time for substrate

to thaw, if freezing conditions exist before application. D. Do not apply earlier than 24 hours after rain or if rain is predicted

for a period of 8 hours after application, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Provide protection of adjacent surfaces with polyethylene plastic

sheeting. Suspend protective sheeting on scaffolding on the down-wind side of work to prevent over-blowing to adjacent surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Prosoco, Inc., as the Design Standard herein. B. Tnemec Inc. C. Pecora Corporation. D. Approved equal.

2.02 WATER REPELLENTS A. Consolideck® Saltguard® WB is a ready-to-use water-based, VOC Compliant

silane/siloxane water repellent and “chloride screen” for the


07 19 00 - 4

protection of concrete and masonry surfaces. Saltguard® WB penetrates more deeply than conventional water- or solvent-based water repellents. Low odor and alkaline stable, Saltguard® WB is ideal for field or in-plant application to concrete surfaces. Saltguard® WB protects horizontal and vertical surfaces from moisture intrusion and chemical attack of chloride salts.

1. Form: Liquid 2. Color: Milky White

3. Specific Gravity: 0.990 4. Active Content: 10% 5. pH: 7-8 6. Flash Point: >200°F (>93°C) 7. Freeze Point: 32°F (0°C)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify by examination that concrete surfaces are acceptable to receive

the specified water repellents. Notify the Architect if surfaces are not acceptable to receive the specified products.

3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect surrounding areas, landscaping, building occupants,

pedestrians, vehicles, and non-concrete surfaces during the work from contact with water repellents, residues, rinse water, fumes, wastes, and effluents in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply water repellents before installation of windows. C. Divert and protect pedestrian and auto traffic. D. Supplemental to the manufacturer’s instructions provide protection of

adjacent surfaces with polyethylene plastic sheeting. Suspend protective sheeting on scaffolding on the down-wind side of work to prevent over-blowing to adjacent surfaces.

3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean all dirt, dust, oil, grease and other contaminants from surfaces

that interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents. Use appropriate concrete cleaners approved by the water repellent manufacturer where necessary. Rinse thoroughly using pressure water spray to remove cleaner residues. Allow surfaces to dry completely before application of water repellents.


07 19 00 - 5

B. Repair, patch, and fill all cracks, voids, defects, and damaged areas

in surface as approved by the Architect. Allow repair materials to cure completely before application of water repellents.

C. Apply specified sealants and allow to cure completely before

application of water repellents. Verify compatibility of sealant with water repellent manufacturer before application.

D. Seal all open joints. E. Allow new concrete construction and repointed surfaces to cure for

minimum of 28 days before application of water repellents. E. Test for pH level according to water repellent manufacturer's written

instructions to ensure chemical bond to silicate minerals if using water repellents containing silanes.

3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply water repellents to substrates in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, environmental regulations and application procedures determined from test panel results.

B. Apply to clean, dry, cured, and properly prepared surfaces. C. Consult manufacturer's written instructions for information on

application equipment to be used and precautions to be taken with the specified products.

D. Do not dilute or alter water repellents. Apply as packaged. E. Do not apply to below-grade surfaces. F. Do not apply to asphalt. G. Do not apply to painted surfaces. H. Do not apply to compensate for structural or material defects in

substrates. I. Avoid overspray, wind drift, and splash of water repellents.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Inspect the water repellent work with the Contractor,

Architect, applicator, and the manufacturer’s representative, and compare with test panel results. Determine if the substrates are suitably protected by the water repellents.


07 19 00 - 6

3.06 FINAL CLEANING A. Clean site of all unused water repellents, residues, rinse water,

wastes, and effluents in accordance with environmental regulations. B. Remove and dispose of all materials used to protect surrounding areas

and non-concrete surfaces, following completion of the work of this section.

A. Repair, restore, or replace to the satisfaction of the Architect, all

materials, landscaping, and non-concrete surfaces damaged by exposure to water repellents.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY INSULATION HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 07 21 00

07 21 00 - 1

SECTION 07 21 00 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY


1. Building thermal insulation in batt form. Low VOC content.

2. Building sound insulation in batt form. Low VOC content. 3. Perimeter foundation insulation.

B. Certification of given R-values is required. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products are designated by "r-values," they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-values). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of insulation product specified.

C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of insulation products with requirements including r-values, fire performance


07 21 00 - 2

characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products.

D. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance of plastic foam insulations with building code in effect for Project.


A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

B. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:


07 21 00 - 3

1. Johns Manville 2. Owens Corning

3. Knauf GreenGuard. 2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS-In addition to exterior insulation provided by the Pre-Engineered Building Contractor.

A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.

B. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. C. Faced Fiberglass Blanket/Batt Thermal Insulation: High Density Thermal insulation produced by combining glass fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less; foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face, and as follows:

1. Thickness: R-15, 3 ½” thickness.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively. 3.Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Formaldehyde less than .022ppm/22ppb, Aldehydes less than 043ppm/43ppb, Phthalates less than 10vg/m3, Individual VOCs less than 1/100TLV, Total VOCs less than 21.5vg/m3, Total particles less than 22vg/m3.

4. GreenGuard Certification Required.

D. Unfaced Fiberglass Blanket/Batt Sound Insulation: Sound insulation produced by combining glass fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A blankets and as follows: 1. Thickness: 3 ½” at 3 5/8” or 4” metal studs, 6” at 6” metal studs.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively.


07 21 00 - 4

3. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Formaldehyde less than .022ppm/22ppb, Aldehydes less than 043ppm/43ppb, Phthalates less than 10vg/m3, Individual VOCs less than 1/100TLV, Total VOCs less than 21.5vg/m3, Total particles less than 22vg/m3. 4. GreenGuard Certification Required.

E. 1 ½” Extruded polystyrene perimeter foundation insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation.

B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION


07 21 00 - 5

A. Apply insulation units between studs by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. Compact tightly. Fill all voids.

B. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, except as otherwise indicated.

C.Tape ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. Seal joints with a sealant recommended by the insulation manufacturer and in accordance with Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants.

D. Set reflective, foil-faced units accurately with not less than 0.75-inch air space in front of foil as indicated.

E. Stuff glass fiber loose fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume (to a density of approximately 2.5 pcf).

3.04 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY THERMAL BRIDGING BARRIER INSULATION HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 07 21 35 ______________________________________________________________________________

07 21 35 - 1

THERMAL BRIDGING BARRIER INSULATION - SECTION 07 21 35 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Thermablok thermal bridging barrier insulation applied to framing members to reduce thermal bridging and heat loss or gain, and provides a continuity of thermal barrier.


A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board. B. Section 13 01 20 - Pre-engineered Metal Buildings.

1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM C518 - 04 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus C. ASTM C1338 – Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings. D. ASTM E2178 – Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Materials of This Section: Provide continuity of Thermablok thermal bridging barrier at building enclosure elements in conjunction with thermal insulating materials specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 34 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special environmental conditions required for installation, installation techniques, and special precautions. D. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the requirements of Credit will be met: 1. List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate post-consumer recycled content and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content. 2. Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content.


07 21 35 - 2


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to U.L. Assembly Design numbers as indicated on Drawings. B. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke ratings, non-combustibility. 1.8 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of materials of this section and framing members or substrate and wall

cladding materials of related Sections under provisions of Division 01. B. Locate where directed. C. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENT A. Do not install Thermablok thermal bridging barrier insulation when temperature or weather

conditions are detrimental to successful installation. If climate conditions affect adhesion common construction adhesives or fasteners may used to hold material in place.

1.10 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Division 01. B. Sequence work to ensure fireproofing, fire stop, vapor retarder, and air barrier materials are in place before beginning the Work of this section. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Division 01. B. Coordinate the with work with related Sections. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. B. Store materials in an area protected from freezing and overheating damage and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage and contamination.


07 21 35 - 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS -INSULATION MATERIAL A. Thermablok, Inc. 6900 Interbay Blvd., Suite A Tampa, FL 33616.

Tel: 813-980-1400. Fax: 813-549-2653. Web Site: www.thermablok.com

B. Substitutions: Allowed under provisions of Division 01 . 2.2 THERMABLOK® THERMAL BRIDGING BARRIER INSULATION MATERIAL A. Thermablok Thermal Bridging Barrier Insulation: Flexible, thermal insulation material consisting of silica composite with reinforcing fibers [self-adhering]; 1. Density: 9.4 lb/ ft³ (0.15 g/cc). 2. Thickness: 0.4 inches (10 mm). 3. Thermal Resistance: R of 4.0 (RSI of 0.70). 4. Thermal Conductivity: a. ASTM C518 (Heat Flow Meter), 0.097 BTU-in/hr²ft-˚F (14.0 mW/m-K). b. ASTM C177 (Guarded Hot Plate), 0.091 BTU-in/hr²ft-˚F (13.1 mW/m-K). 5. Compressive Stress/Strain ASTM C165 a. 8.0 psi @ 10% Strain b. 30.5 psi @ 25% Strain 6. Maximum Use Temperature: 390 deg F (200 deg C). 7. Fungal Resistance: ASTM C1338, no fungal growth observed. 8. Flame/Smoke Properties: ASTM E84, Class A, FSI <5, SDI 20 9. Color: White. 10. Hydrophobic: Yes. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Adhesive: Peel and stick self-adhering tape. 2.5 FASTENERS A. Insulation Fasteners: Staples, galvanized steel to mechanically fasten thermal bridging barrier insulation to substrate surface, length, 7/16 inch (12 mm) minimum, to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place until sheathing and covering materials are installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Division 01. B. Verify that substrate, and adjacent materials are dry, clean and ready to receive self-adhering thermal bridging barrier insulation.

http://www.thermablok.com/


07 21 35 - 4

C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of irregularities, and materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.2 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Place Thermablok thermal bridging barrier insulation over substrate materials and framing members in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Cut and fit self-adhering or mechanically fastened Thermablok thermal bridging barrier insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Prevent Thermablok thermal bridging barrier insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarders, sheathing and covering materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply self-adhering thermal bridging barrier insulation over exterior or interior surface of framing members and metal studs as shown on the drawing details. B. Apply to minimum thickness of 0.4 inch . C. Apply thermal bridging barrier to fill gaps around doors and windows. D. Apply thermal bridging barrier to fill gaps around accessible service and equipment penetrations. E. Extend full length of framing members. F. Butt edges and ends of self-adhering or mechanically fastened thermal bridging barrier insulation tight to each other without gaps. G. Cut and fit self-adhering or mechanically fastened thermal bridging barrier insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. H. Remove release backing from adhesive tape on self-adhering thermal bridging barrier insulation. I. Immediately following application of self-adhering thermal bridging barrier insulation, press self-adhering thermal bridging barrier insulation firmly and uniformly to substrate surfaces to insure adhesion. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect application for thermal bridging barrier insulation thickness and gaps.

3.5. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit subsequent work to disturb applied thermal bridging barrier insulation 3.6 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Plan and coordinate the thermal bridging barrier insulation work to minimize the generation of off-cuts and waste. Reuse thermal bridging barrier off-cuts to the maximum extent feasible . B. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and to the extent economically feasible. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK


07 21 35 - 5

A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division 01. B. Do not permit work to be damaged prior to covering self-adhering or mechanically fastened thermal bridging barrier insulation. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY JOINT SEALANTS AND EXPANSION JOINTS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 07 92 00 ________________________________________________________________________

07 92 00 - 1

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:


1.02 SUMMARY:

A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealant is indicated on drawings.

B. Types of joints to receive joint sealant includes, but is not

limited to:

1. Exterior: a. Caulking perimeter of doors, windows and louvers. b. Building sealant joints. c. Building control joints. d. Joints between dissimilar materials.

2. Interior:

a. Joints between dissimilar materials. b. Juncture of toilet fixtures to walls. c. Juncture of countertops to walls.

3. Pre-fabricated Expansion Joints a. Exterior and interior expansion joints.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each joint sealant product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealant application 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last 3 years at least 3 joint sealant applications similar in type and size to that of this project and who will assign mechanics from these earlier applications to this project, of which one will serve as lead mechanic.

B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain

joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required.


07 92 00 - 2

1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES:

A. Provide joints sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL:

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.

B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealant indicated or, if

not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.02 Medium Modulus Silicone Sealant – Sealant joints and glazing joints. A. Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant as manufactured by Dow

Corning Corporation. B. Compliance: Sealant shall meet or exceed requirements of these

standards: 1. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, A, and O. C. Joint size limitations: 1. Width: 1/4 to 3/4 inch. 2. Depth: 1/4 to 1/2 inch for each: primary joint and backup

joint. D. Color: As selected by the Owner/Owner’s representative. E. Shelf life: 12 months. F. Tack-free time: 3 hours. G. Working time: 20 to 30 minutes. H. Curing time: 7 to 14 days. I. Full adhesion time: 14 to 21 days.


07 92 00 - 3

J. Flow, sag, or slump: [0.1 inch] [2.5 mm], tested in accordance with ASTM C639.

K. Volatile organic compound (VOC) content: 28 grams/liter. L. Cured sealant properties after 21 days at 77 degrees F and 50

percent relative humidity. 1. Joint movement capability: Plus and minus 50 percent, tested in

accordance with ASTM C719. 2. Hardness: 35-durometer hardness, Shore A, tested in accordance

with ASTM D2240. 3. Maximum peel strength: 32 ppi, tested in accordance with ASTM

C794. 4. Tensile adhesion modulus, tested in accordance with ASTM C1135: a. At 25 percent extension: 45 psi. b. At 50 percent extension: 60 psi. 5. Service temperature range: Minus 40 to plus 300 degrees F. 6. Weathering after 10,000 hours, tested in accordance with ASTM

C1135 using QUV Weatherometer: c. At 25 percent extension: 35 psi. d. At 50 percent extension: 50 psi. 2.03 Low Modulus Silicone Sealant - Control joints and joints between

dissimilar materials. A. Dow Corning® 790 Silicone Building Sealant, as manufactured by Dow

Corning Corporation. B. Compliance: Sealant shall meet or exceed requirements of these

standards: 5. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use T, NT, G, M, A,

and O. C. Joint size limitations: 1. Width: 1/4 to 3/4 inch. 2. Depth: 1/4 to 1/2 inch each: backup joint and exterior joint.


07 92 00 - 4

D. Color: As selected by the Architect. E. Shelf life: 12 months. F. Application temperature range: Minus 20 to plus 120 degrees F. G. Tack-free time: 1 hour at 50 percent relative humidity, tested in

accordance with ASTM C679. H. Working time: 10 to 20 minutes. I. Curing time at 3/8-inch depth: 7 to 14 days at 77 degrees F and 50

percent relative humidity. J. Flow, sag, or slump in 3 inches wide joint: None, when tested in

accordance with ASTM D2202. K. Volatile organic compound (VOC) content: 43 grams/liter maximum. L. Cured sealant properties after 21 days at 77 degrees F and 50

percent relative humidity. 3. Joint movement capability: Plus 100 percent extension and 50

percent compression, tested in accordance with ASTM C719. 4. Hardness: 15-durometer hardness, Shore A, tested in accordance

with ASTM C661. 5. Properties tested in accordance with ASTM D412: e. Ultimate tensile strength: 100 psi. f. Ultimate elongation: 1,600 percent. 6. Minimum peel strength: 15 ppi, tested in accordance with ASTM

C794. 7. Properties, tested in accordance with ASTM C1135: a. Adhesion at 25 percent extension: 15 psi. b. Adhesion at 50 percent extension: 20 psi. 8. Weathering after 22,400 hours, tested in accordance with ASTM

C1135 using QUV Weatherometer: a. At 25 percent extension: 30 psi. b. At 50 percent extension: 40 psi.


07 92 00 - 5

9. Staining after 14 days at 50 percent compression: None on concrete, granite, limestone, and brick, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1248.

2.04 A minimum of 20-year Warranty required for exterior sealants. 2.06 INTERIOR SEALANT FOR PAINTED CONTROL JOINTS:

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard

chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses.

B. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with the following requirements for uses:

C. Uses NT, M, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Uses NT, M, A, and O:

a. Isoflex 2000; The Harry S. Peterson Company. b. Vulkem 227; Mameco International, Inc. c. Dymeric; Tremco Inc.

2.09 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS: (For interior use)

A. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, one part, non-sag, acrylic, mildew-resistant, acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, formulated to be painted and recommended for exposed applications on interior and on protected exterior exposures involving joint movement of not more than +7.5%.

B. VOC content: Limit to less than 250 g/L less water.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1.Bostik. 2.Sonneborne. 3.Tremco Inc.

2.10 JOINT SEALANT BACKING:


07 92 00 - 6

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

1. Round tubular Plastic Foam Joint Fillers( backer rod): Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding strips of plastic foam of material indicated below, and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

a.Either flexible, open cell polyurethane foam or non-gassing, closed-cell polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer.

b.Backer rod shall be tightly compressed into joint with a 25% compression so as to deter easy movement, but retain the oval shape.

2. Backerseal(Greyflex)preformed foam sealant for secondary

sealing behind sealant and backer rod. Noted as compressible joint filler on the drawings. Utilization directly behind the liquid sealant is RESRICTED and only with approval of the Architect, when the joint between window frame and wall surface is less than 3/16” wide.

2. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic

tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at back (3rd) surface of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant -substrate and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide non-staining, chemical

cleaner of type acceptable to manufacturer of sealant and sealant backing materials which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials.

C. Masking Tape: Provide non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible

with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION


07 92 00 - 7

3.01 INSPECTION:

A. Require installer to inspect joints indicated to receive joint sealants for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Obtain Installer's written report listing any conditions detrimental to performance of joint sealant work. Do not allow joint sealant to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Conduct an inspection with Architect and Owner representatives to view all backer rods in-place in joints prior to sealant application. Make any corrections as noted by the Architect.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturers.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where

recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact

of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS:

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with

recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.

C. Latex Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of

ASTM C 790 for use of latex sealants.

D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:


07 92 00 - 8

1. Install Joint-fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.

2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint-fillers, compression seals or back of joints where required to prevent third-side adhesion of sealant to back of joint.

3. Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to comply with requirements indicated above for joint fillers.

E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques

that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application

and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

G. Concave joint configuration on a backer rod per Figure 6A in ASTM C

962. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING:

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealant installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.

B. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as

work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY METAL DOORS AND FRAMES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 08 11 13 __________________________________________________________________________

08 11 13 - 1

SECTION 08 11 13 – METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:


1.02 SUMMARY:

A. Extent of standard steel doors and frames is indicated and scheduled on drawings. Batt insulated doors required at exterior locations.

B. Finish hardware is specified elsewhere in Division 8.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of

steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference

numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings.

2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with

glass and glazing requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100) and as herein specified.


08 11 13 - 2

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies

are indicated or required, provide fire-rated door and frame assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows", and have been tested, listed, and labeled in accordance with ASTM E 152 "Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" by a nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Steel Frames with noticeable warpage or dents will be

replaced. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering steel doors and frames which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following:

B. Steel Doors and Frames, (General):

1. Allied Steel Product, Inc. 2. Ceco Corp. 3. Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Co.

4. Republic 5. MPI, Metal Products Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS:

A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel,

complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18- gage

galvanized sheet steel.


08 11 13 - 3

E. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units,

except hot-dip galvanized items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.

F. Shop Applied Paint:

1. Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either

air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints.

2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL:

A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with SDI-100 requirements as follows:

1. Interior Doors: SDI-100, Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 1, minimum 18-gage faces.

B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles

and rails of non-flush units, from only cold-rolled steel.

C. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold-rolled or hot- rolled steel (at fabricator's option).

D. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide

countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts.

E. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Assemblies:

F. At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors which have been fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated

assemblies with U factor of 0.24 Btu/(hr. x ft.sq. x °F).

G. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templated provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of


08 11 13 - 4

ANSI A 115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.

H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied

hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site.

I. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or,

if not shown, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware," published by Door and Hardware Institute.

J. Shop Painting:

1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door

and frame units, including galvanized surfaces.

2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint.

3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to

provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint.

2.05 STANDARD STEEL DOORS:

A. Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on drawings or schedules.

B. Doors in smoke tight walls shall have a maximum clearance

between door and frame and door and floor finish of 1/8”. 2.06 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES:

A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 16-gage cold-rolled furniture steel.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered and welded corners.

2. Form exterior frames of hot dip galvanized steel.

B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops

to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-swing frames.


08 11 13 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.

B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105

"Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated.

1 Except for frames located at in-place concrete or masonry

and at drywall installations, place frames prior to construction at enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

2. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb

at hinge and strike levels.

3. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.

4. Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std.

No. 80. 5. Fill exterior frames with unfaced batt insulation.

C. Door Installation:

1. Fit hollow metal doors in frames, within clearances

specified in SDI-100.

2. Place fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.

3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN:

A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.


08 11 13 - 6

B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.

3.03 STORING:

A. Store doors and frames inside of the building from time of delivery to site until installation.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS

HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 08 36 00

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________

08 36 00 - 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Glazed Sectional Overhead Doors with Insulated slats.

B. Electric Operators and Controls.

C. Operating Hardware, tracks, and support. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel frame and supports.

B. Section 06 10 00 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Rough wood framing and blocking for door opening.

C. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and backup materials.

D. Section 09 91 00 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting.

E. Section 26 - Raceway and Boxes: Empty conduit from control station to door operator.

F. Section 26 - Wiring Connections: Electrical service to door operator.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/DASMA 102 - American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors.

1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand loads caused by pressure and suction of wind acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with applicable code.

B. Wiring Connections: Requirements for electrical characteristics.

1. 115 / 230 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 34 00.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

http://www.dasma.com/PDF/Publications/Standards/102-2004.pdf

CHEATHAM COUNTY SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 08 36 00 _________________________________________________________________________________

08 36 00 - 2

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plans and elevations including opening dimensions and required

tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details.

D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Authorized representative of the manufacturer with minimum five

years documented experience.

C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified.

D. Warranty: 10 year limited delamination, 1 year limited on door, 3 year/20,000 cycle limited on

door & operator system (when purchased together; on material and workmanship), 20 year limited on high performance fluoropolymer coating option


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened labeled packaging until ready for installation.

B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture until ready for installation.

C. Store materials in a dry, ventilated weather-tight location. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene a pre-installation conference just prior to commencement of field operations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (Design specifications base on Overhead Door products)\

A. Overhead Door Corp. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 63

10. 2.2 ALUMINUM SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS

A. Sectional Overhead Doors: Thermacore 591 Series Insulated Steel Doors with windows by Overhead Door Corporation.

1. Door Assembly: Stile and rail assembly secured with 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter through rods. a. Panel Thickness: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). Insulated slats.


08 36 00 - 3

b. Center Stile Width: 2-11/16 inches (68 mm) c. End Stile Width: 3-5/16 inches (84 mm) d. Intermediate Rail Pair Width: 3-11/16 inches (94 mm). e. Top Rail Width:

1) 2-3/8 inches (60 mm). f. Bottom Rail Width: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm)

g. Steel Panels: 0.015 inch (.38 mm) thick, insulated. h. Stiles and Rails: 6063 - Steel. i. Springs:

1) See 1.6.D. j. Glazing:

1) 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) Tempered Insulating glass. See drawings for glazing elevations.

2. Finish and Color: a. Powder Coating Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s

standard colors. b. A smooth panel surface is required. Patterned, embossed or simulated

woodgrain surfaces will not be acceptable. 3. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Ball bearing rollers with hardened

steel races.

4. Weatherstripping: a. Flexible bulb-type strip at bottom section. b. Flexible Jamb seals. c. Flexible Header seal.

5. Track: Provide track as recommended by manufacturer to suit loading required and clearances available.

6. Manual Operation: As backup to electric motor operation: Pull chain to disengagement lever on motor with wall brackets at 10’ and 5’ to keep pull chain above the height of trucks and an RSX operator Side Mount with Trolley Rail. This would mount the operators on the sides of the door openings with an auxiliary chain hoist so the doors could be operated manually in the event of a power failure.

7. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size and type as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second. Operator shall meet UL325/2010 requirements for continuous monitoring of safety devices. a. Entrapment Protection: Required for momentary contact, includes radio control

operation. 1) Pneumatic sensing edge up to 20 feet (5.5 m) wide. Constant contact

only complying with UL 325/2010. 2) Electric sensing edge monitored to meet UL 325/2010. 3) Photoelectric sensors monitored to meet UL 325/2010.

b. Operator Controls: 1) Push-button and key operated control stations with open, close, and stop

buttons.

2) Surface mounting. 3) Interior location.

B. SCHEDULE: 1. 14’ W. X 14’ H. Glazed as shown on the plans. Quantity = (7). 2. 10’ W. X 16’ H. Glazed as shown on the plans. Quantity = (1).


08 36 00 - 4

3. 20’ W. X 14’ H. Glazed as shown on the plans. Quantity = (1).

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until openings have been properly prepared.

B. Verify wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits.

C. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics.

D. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead doors and track in accordance with approved shop drawings and the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for

maintenance.

C. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.

D. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only.

E. Fit and align door assembly including hardware.

F. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from

disconnect to unit components.

G. Provide a wall mounting device for the pull rope to disengagement lever. 3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Adjust door assembly to smooth operation and in full contact with weatherstripping.

B. Clean doors, frames and glass.

C. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. 3.5 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning.


08 36 00 - 5

B. Protect installed products until completion of project.

C. Touch-up, damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage before Substantial

Completion. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY ALUMINUM STOREFRONT HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 08 41 13

08 41 13 - 1

SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.00 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum entrance and storefront work: All frames are thermally broken. 1. Exterior entrance doors. 2. Transoms and Sidelites. 3. Frames for entrances. 4. Storefront Windows.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Finish Hardware Section 08 71 00 regarding execution. B. Glazing Section 08 81 00 for glass requirements.

1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide aluminum storefront assemblies that comply with performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock assemblies according to test methods indicated.

B. Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum framing systems to provide

for expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors shall function normally over the specified temperature range.

1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface

temperature range of 180 deg F (100 deg C) without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, stress on glass, or other detrimental effects.

C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum storefront systems that

comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated.


08 41 13 - 2

1. Wind Loads: Provide aluminum storefront assemblies capable of withstanding wind pressures of 20 psf inward and 20 psf outward acting normal to the plane of the wall.

D. Structural Performance: Conduct tests for structural performance

in accordance with ASTM E 330. At the conclusion of the tests there shall be no glass breakage or permanent damage to fasteners, anchors, hardware or actuating mechanism. Framing members shall have no permanent deformation in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear span.

E. Deflection Normal to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressure required

to measure deflection of framing members normal to the plane of the wall shall be equivalent to the wind load specified above. Deflection shall not exceed 1/175 of the clear span, when subjected to uniform load deflection test.

F. Deflection Parallel to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressures

required to measure deflection parallel to the plane of the wall shall be equal to 1.5 times the wind pressures specified above. Deflection of any member carrying its full dead load shall not exceed an amount that will reduce glass bite below 75 percent of the design dimension and shall not reduce the edge clearance between the member and the fixed panel, glass or other fixed member above to less than 1/8 inch. The clearance between the member and an operable door or window shall be at least 1/16 inch.

G. Air Infiltration: Provide storefront aluminum framing system with

an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area (excluding operable door edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward test pressure differential of 1.57 psf.

H. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no uncontrolled

water penetration (excluding operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft.

I. Condensation Resistance: Where framing systems are "thermal-break"

construction, provide units tested for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503 showing condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45.

J. All doors shall meet 2010 ADA code as to opening force and closing time.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


08 41 13 - 3

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the

Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

1. Product data for each aluminum storefront system required, including:

a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods. b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories. C Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.

2. Shop drawings for each aluminum storefront system required, including:

a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work. b. Elevations at 1/4-inch scale. c. Detail sections of typical composite members. d. Anchors and reinforcement. e. Hardware mounting heights. f. Provisions for expansion and contraction. g. Glazing details.

3. Hardware Schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule

organized into sets based on hardware specified. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete designations of every item required for each door opening.

4. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of samples

of each specified color and finish on 12-inch-long sections of extrusions or formed shapes. Where normal color variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of color variations.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installations of aluminum entrances similar in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum storefront systems

produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.


08 41 13 - 4

C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum storefront systems

from one source and from a single manufacturer.

D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional requirements of aluminum storefront work required and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Aluminum storefront by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.


A. Deliver aluminum storefront components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging.

B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured

masonry or concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage. Store only indoors.


A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration. 2. Faulty operation. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.

B. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or

remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract


08 41 13 - 5

Documents and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. The specified warranty period is 20 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to the specified requirements, manufacturers offering thermally broken entrance and window storefront systems that may be incorporated in the work are: 1. Oldcastle Building Envelope. 2. YKK AP. 3. Kawneer. 4. Tubelite. B. Acceptable model number given or equal: 1. Oldcastle Series MS375 Thermal Clad Medium Stile Door.

2. Oldcastle Thermal Flush Glaze Series 3000 MultiPlane 2 x 4 ½”.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Recycled material: Aluminum for frames shall contain 45% to 75% pre-consumer recycled material.

B. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer

for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire.

C. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply

with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip.

1. Hinge stile shall be reinforced internally with 1 1/4" x 3/16"

Continuous steel bar extending full height of hinge stile of door.

2. Top rail shall be reinforced with 3" x 1/4" steel bar internally, which shall run full width of door rail, for anchorage of closers and hold open devices.


08 41 13 - 6

D. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of the “Glazing" section of these specifications.

E. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless

steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components.

F. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members

less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for

application of hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat-head machine screws that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened.

G. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead-soft

stainless steel, or 0.026-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components.

H. Slip sheet of 30 lb. asphalt coated building felt or brush applied

liquid membrane coating to separate the aluminum sub-sill above the pre-engineered metal building steel window sill flashing as detailed.

I. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum

brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.

J. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable

compressible weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287.

K. Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable

weatherstripping of vinyl on aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2.

2.03 HARDWARE

A. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required; finish to match door.


08 41 13 - 7

1. Door-mounted Holder: Flip-up type holder with rubber shoe,

for mounting on lower rail; comply with ANSI A156.16, Grade 1. 2. Door Stop: Floor- or wall-mounted door stop, as appropriate,

with integral rubber bumper; comply with ANSI A156.16, Grade 3. Thresholds: Provide Hager Products ADA compliant # 520S. 4. Top Offset Pivot-Frame OP-6, Top Offset Pivot-Door OP-7,

Bottom Offset Pivot-Frame OP-10 and adjustable Bottom Offset Pivot-Door OP-9, as provided by Oldcastle or equal approved by Architect. All pivots shall have a 1/8” backset.

5. Oldcastle PH-12/PB-16 BB Offset aluminum door pull with straight aluminum push bar, 2 ¼” projection, 1” dia., back to back mounting. 6. V-231 aluminum weatherstrip sweep for door bottom rail or equal. 7. Door closer: LCN Super smooth surface mounted 4040-18G or 18TJ and regular arm for mounting on hinge side / push side.

2.04 COMPONENTS

A. Storefront Framing System: Provide framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include sub-frames and other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush glazing from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop-fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. Provide t frame sections without exposed seams.

B. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face

to receive resilient elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior.

C. Entrance Door Frames: Provide tubular and channel frame entrance

door frame assemblies, as indicated, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Reinforce as necessary to support required loads.

D. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members,

fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts.

E. Door Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for non-removal.


08 41 13 - 8

2.05 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate aluminum storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work.

B. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate storefront framing system

with an integrally concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and exposed interior members to eliminate direct metal-to-metal contact. Use manufacturer's standard construction that has been in use for similar projects for period of not less than 3 years.

C. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing,

hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

D. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting,

forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes.

1. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. 2. Pre-glaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible.

E. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds

smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish.

Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface.

F. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as

necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.

G. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous

paint, or a suitable sealant, or a non-absorptive plastic or


08 41 13 - 9

elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead.

H. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members.

1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum

members shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal.

I. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.

2.06 FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system

established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. Finish shall be 70% Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 and shall meet the

requirements for a 20 year warranty without loss of adhesion, gloss, chalk resistance and fading.

D. Finish color to be selected from the full range of manufacturer’s

selections.


A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the installation.

1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

INSTALLATION


08 41 13 - 10

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.

B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of

framing members, doors, or panels. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.

C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance to comply with the following tolerances:

D. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or 1/4 inch in any total length.

1. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch.

2. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch.

3. Offset at Corners: The maximum out-of-plane offset of framing at corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch.

E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources

of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication. 2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum. 3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with alkali resistant coating. 4. Paint wood and similar absorptive material in contact with

aluminum and exposed to the elements or otherwise subject to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint. Seal joints between the materials with sealant.

F. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface-mounted hardware

items. Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible.

G. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated,

or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets.


08 41 13 - 11

H. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not pre-glazed by manufacturer.

3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight closure.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings.

B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with

requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.

3.05 STORING

A. Store doors and frames inside building from time of delivery until installation. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY DOOR HARDWARE HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 08 71 00

1 of 17

SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes furnishing and installation of mechanical and electronic door hardware for doors specified in “Hardware Sets” and required by actual conditions: including screws, bolts, expansion shields, electrified door hardware, and other devices for proper application of hardware.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division

01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

C. Related Divisions: 1. Division 07 Joint Sealants 2. Division 08 Openings 3. Division 09 Finishes 4. Division 26 Electrical

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI):

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 Butts & Hinges (2016) 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Bored & Preassembled Locks & Latches (2011) 3. ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Exit Devices (2014) 4. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Door Controls – Closers (2013) 5. ANSI/BHMA A156.6 Architectural Door Trim (2015) 6. ANSI/BHMA A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions (2016) 7. ANSI/BHMA A156.8 Door Controls – Overhead Stops and Holders (2015) 8. ANSI/BHMA A156.18 Materials & Finishes (2016) 9. ANSI/BHMA A156.21 Thresholds (2014) 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.22 Door Gasketing Systems (2012) 11. ANSI/BHMA A156.28 Keying Systems (2013) 12. ANSI/BHMA A156.31 Electric Strikes (2013)

B. International Code Council/American National Standards Institute (ICC/ANSI)/ADA:

1. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Standards for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2006

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 1784 Air Leakage Test of Door Assemblies. 3. UL 294 Access Control System Units

D. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI):

1. DHI Publications – Keying Systems and Nomenclature (1989). 2. DHI Publication – Abbreviations and Symbols. 3. DHI Publication – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 4. DHI Publication – Sequence and Format of Hardware Schedule (1996).


2 of 17

E. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2008 2. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives 2007 3. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 2006 4. NFPA 105 Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies 2007

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Administrative Requirements and Submittal

Procedures Section.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Organize hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated in DHI Publications Sequence and Formatting for

the Hardware Schedule. Include abbreviations and symbols page according to DHI Publications Abbreviations and Symbols. Complete nomenclature of items required for each door opening as indicated.

2. Coordinate final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of hardware.

3. Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), as certified by DHI, who will affix seal attesting to completeness and correctness, including the review of the hardware schedule prior to submittal.

C. Submit manufacturer’s catalog sheet on design, grade, and function of items listed in hardware schedule. Identify

specific hardware item per sheet, provide an index, and cover sheet.

D. Templates: 1. Upon final approval of the architectural hardware schedules, submit one set of complete templates for each

hardware item to the door manufacturers, frame manufacturers, and the installers. Date and index these 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch papers in a three ring binder, including detailed lists of the hardware location requirements for mortised and surface applied hardware within fourteen days of receiving approved door hardware submittals.

E. Electrified Hardware: Provide electrical information to include voltage and amperage requirements for electrified door hardware and description of operation. 1. Description of operation for each electrified opening to include description of component functions including

location, sequence of operation and interface with other building control systems. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control system and differentiate between

manufacturers installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. System schematic. b. Point to point wiring diagram. c. Riser diagram. d. Elevation of each door.

3. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm, access control, security, and building control systems.

F. Upon door hardware submittal approval, furnish for each electrified opening, three copies of point to point

diagrams.


3 of 17

G. Closeout Submittals: Submit to Owner in a three-ring binder or CD if requested. 1. Warranties. 2. Maintenance and operating manual. 3. Maintenance service agreement. 4. Record documents. 5. Copy of approved hardware schedule. 6. Copy of approved keying schedule with bitting list. 7. Door hardware supplier name, phone number, and fax number.


A. Listed and Labeled electrified door hardware as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable

to authority having jurisdiction.

B. Hardware supplier will employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) as certified by DHI and a member of the seal program who will be available at reasonable times during course of work for Project hardware consultation.

C. Door hardware conforming to ICC/ANSI A117.1: Handles pulls, latches locks and operating devices: Shape that

is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist.

D. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and/or labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Fire Door Inspection: Prior to receiving certificate of occupancy have fire rated doors inspected by an independent

Certified Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI), as certified by Intertek (ITS), a written report be submitted to Owner and Contractor. Doors failing inspection must be adjusted, replaced or modified to be within appropriate code requirements.

F. Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke and draft control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

G. Door hardware certified to ANSI/BHMA standards as noted, participate and be listed in BHMA Certified Products Directory.

H. Substitution request: create a comparison chart that includes the testing information as well as the warranty for

both the specified product and the proposed substitution. Include the reason for requesting the substitution, clear catalog copy highlighting the proposed product and options, compliance statement, technical data, product warranty and lead time, to show how the proposed can meet or exceed established level of design, function, and quality. Approval of request is at the discretion of the owner, architect, and their designated consultants and will be addressed via addendum prior to bid date.


4 of 17

I. Meetings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Meetings.” 1. Low-voltage Coordination Meeting

a. Prior to furnishing door hardware submittals, convene a low-voltage coordination meeting. Participants required to attend: Contractor, installer, material supplier, manufacturer representatives, electrical contractor, security consultant, and fire alarm consultant.

b. Review sequence of operation for each opening with electrified hardware to ensure that every opening functions in the proper manner for the Owner’s use.

c. Discuss the types of electrified door hardware, inspection, and electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

d. Verify wire quantities, wire types, wire sizes, conduit sizes, and locations including if the power supplies will be centrally located or if they will be located near each opening.

e. Coordinate the door hardware, power supplies, back-up power requirements, access control components, fire alarm interfaces, elevator controls, and related building systems have all proper and necessary components to interface and operate correctly.

2. Keying Meeting a. Within fourteen days of receipt of approved door hardware submittals, contact Owner with representative

from hardware supplier to establish a keying conference. Verify keyway, visual key identification, number of master keys and keys per lock. Provide keying system per Owner’s instructions.

3. Pre-installation Meeting a. Convene meeting within fourteen days of receipt of approved door hardware submittals. Participants

required to attend: Contractor, installer, material supplier, manufacturer representatives, electrical contractor, security consultant, and fire alarm consultant.

b. Include in-conference decisions regarding proper installation methods and procedures for receiving and handling hardware.

c. Review all system, elevation, and point-to-point drawings to ensure that all necessary components are provided and detailed.

d. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer’s personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

J. Installer Qualifications: Specialized in performing installation of this Section and have five years minimum documented experience.

K. Hardware listed in 3.07 – Hardware Schedule is intended to establish minimum level of design, type, function and

grade of hardware to be used.


A. Provide clean, dry and secure room for hardware delivered to Project but not yet installed. Shelve hardware off of the floor and with larger items of hardware being stored on wooden pallets. Arrange locksets and keyed cylinders by opening number. Organize the balance of hardware by brand, model of hardware, and hardware set number. Leave the door markings of the hardware visible for installers.

B. Furnish hardware that is not bulk packed with each unit marked and numbered in accordance with approved finish

hardware schedule. Include architect’s opening number, hardware set number, and item number for each type of hardware. Include keyset symbols and corresponding hardware component for keyed products.

C. Pack each item complete with necessary parts and fasteners in manufacturer’s original packaging.


5 of 17

D. Deliver architectural hardware to the job site according to the phasing agreed upon in the pre-installation meeting. Inventory the delivery with the supplier’s assistance. Immediately note shortages and damages on the shipping receipts and bill of ladings. Coordinate replacement or repair with the supplier.

E. Deliver permanent keys and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package

service. Establish the instructions for delivery to Owner at “Keying Conference.”

F. Waste Management and Disposal: Separate waste materials for use or recycling in accordance with Division 1.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Owner may have under provisions of the Contract Documents and be an addition and run concurrently with other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract documents.

B. Special Warranty: Warranties specified in this article will not deprive Owner of other rights.

1. Ten years for manual door closers. 2. Five years for mortise, auxiliary and bored locks. 3. Five years for exit devices. 4. One year for electromechanical door hardware.

C. Replace or repair defective products during warranty period in accordance with manufacturer’s warranty at no

cost to Owner. There is no warranty against defects due to improper installation, abuse, and failure to exercise normal maintenance.

D. Maintenance Tool and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for

Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 HINGES

A. Hinges, electric hinges, and self-closing hinges of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Standards: Products to be certified and listed by the following:

1. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 2. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7. 3. Self-Closing Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.17.

C. Butt Hinges:

1. Hinge weight and size unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets: a. Doors up to 36” wide and up to 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a minimum thickness of .134” and a

minimum of 4-1/2” in height. b. Doors from 36” wide up to 42” wide and up to 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a minimum thickness of

.145” and a minimum of 4-1/2” in height. c. For doors from 42” wide up to 48” wide and up to 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a minimum thickness

of .180” and a minimum of 5” in height.


6 of 17

d. Doors greater than 1-3/4” thick provide hinges with a minimum thickness of .180” and a minimum of 5” in height.

e. Width of hinge is to be minimum required to clear surrounding trim. 2. Base material unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets:

a. Exterior Doors: 304 Stainless Steel, Brass or Bronze material. b. Interior Doors: Steel material. c. Fire Rated Doors: Steel or 304 Stainless Steel materials. d. Stainless Steel ball bearing hinges to have stainless steel ball bearings. Steel ball bearings are

unacceptable. 3. Quantity of hinges per door unless otherwise stated in hardware sets:

a. Doors up to 60” in height provide 2 hinges. b. Doors 60” up to 90” in height provide 3 hinges. c. Doors 90” up to 120” in height provide 4 hinges. d. Doors over 120” in height add 1 additional hinge per each additional 30” in height. e. Dutch doors provide 4 hinges.

4. Hinge design and options unless otherwise indicated in hardware sets: a. Hinges are to be of a square corner five-knuckle design, flat button tips and have ball bearings unless

otherwise indicated in hardware sets. b. Out-swinging exterior and out-swinging access controlled doors are required to have Non-Removable

Pins (NRP) to prevent removal of pin while door is in closed position. c. When full width of opening is required, use hinges that are designed to swing door completely from

opening when door is opened to 95 degrees. d. When shims are necessary to correct frame or door irregularities, provide metal shims only.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Standard Weight Hager BB1279/BB1191 Bommer BB5000/BB5002 McKinney TA2714/TA2314

2.02 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Provide for use with type of locks shown on hardware schedule.

B. Products to be certified and listed by the following: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.31 Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted Actuators Grade 1. 2. UL Tested 1500 lb. static strength. 3. UL listed for Fire Doors and Frames where applicable. 4. UL 1034 Burglary Resistance. 5. UL 10C.3H fire-rated, 4’ x 8’ door.

C. Material and Design:

1. To accept up to 3/4” latch bolt and 1” deadbolt. 2. Field reversible, Fail Safe or Fail Secure. 3. Dual voltage 12/24 VDC. 4. Tamper resistant, stainless steel corrosion resistance parts, and cast body and keeper.


7 of 17

D. Options: 1. Latch Bolt Monitoring (LBM) Signals the door is closed and latched or unlatched and open. 2. Door Secure Monitor (DSM) Door secure and unlocked monitoring. 3. Deadbolt Monitoring (DBM) Signals deadbolt projected or retracted. 4. Plug in buzzer (BUZZ) Indicates Fail Secure strike is energized and unlocked. 5. Rectified (RECT) Converts AC to DC.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Hager 2930 Series SDC 55 Series RCI

2.03 LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Locks and latches of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Standards: Product to be certified and listed by following: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000 Certified to Grade 1. 2. ANSI/BHMA A250.13 Certified for a minimum design load of 1150 Ibf (100 psf) for single out-swinging

doors measuring 36” in width and 84” in height and a minimum design load of 1150lbf (70psf) for out-swinging single doors measuring 48” in width and 84” in height.

3. UL/cUL Labeled and listed for functions up to 3 hours for single doors up to 48” in width and up to 96” in height.

4. UL10C/UBC 7-2 Positive Pressure Rated. 5. ICC/ANSI A1117.1

C. Lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufacturer’s series as listed in hardware sets.

D. Material and Design:

1. Lock and latch chassis to be zinc dichromate for corrosion resistance. 2. Keyed functions to be of a freewheeling design to help resist against vandalism. 3. Non-handed, field reversible. 4. Thru-bolt mounting with no exposed screws. 5. Levers, zinc cast and plated to match finished designation in hardware sets. 6. Roses, wrought brass or stainless steel material.

E. Latch and Strike:

1. Stainless Steel latch bolt with minimum of 1/2” throw and deadlocking for keyed and exterior functions. Provide 3/4” latch bolt for pairs of fire-rated doors where required by door manufacturer. Standard backset to be 2-3/4” and adjustable faceplate to accommodate a square edge door or a standard 1/8” beveled edge door.

2. Strike is to fit a standard ANSI A115 prep measuring 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” with proper lip length to protect surrounding trim.

F. Acceptable manufacturers:

Hager 3400 Series Schlage ND Series Best 9K Series

2.04 CYLINDERS AND KEYING


8 of 17

A. Cylinders of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Products to be certified and listed by the following: 1. Auxiliary Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.5

C. Cylinders: 1. Provide cylinders matched to the types required for hardware that has a locking function and for keyed

electronic functions. Furnish with appropriate collars, cams, and tailpieces to fit and operate associated hardware. Stacking collars is not acceptable, a single collar of proper size is required.

2. Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, seven-pin conventional core supported by the Hager H series keyway.

D. Keying: 1. Provide a new factory registered key system. 2. Provide a bitting list to Owner of combinations as established, and expand to twenty-five percent for future

use or as directed by Owner. 3. Keys to be shipped directly to the Owner’s Representative as established during the keying conference.

a. Package the keys in individual envelopes, grouped by keyset symbol, and label envelopes with project name, factory registry number, and keyset symbol.

4. Provide construction keyed cylinders as required per the keying meeting.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hager Schlage Sargent

2.05 CLOSERS

A. Closers of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty. Unless otherwise

indicated on hardware schedule, comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for size of closer, depending on width of door, frequency of use, atmospheric pressure, ADAAG requirements, and fire rating.

B. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified by the following:

1. BHMA Certified ANSI A156.4 Grade 1. 2. ADA Complaint ANSI A117.1. 3. UL/cUL Listed up to 3 hours. 4. UL10C Positive Pressure Rated. 5. UL10B Neutral Pressure Rated.

C. Material and Design:

1. Provide aluminum non-handed bodies with full plastic covers. 2. Closers will have separate staked adjustable valve screws for latch speed, sweep speed, and backcheck. 3. Provide Tri-Pack arms and brackets for regular arm, top jamb, and parallel arm mounting. 4. Double heat-treated steel, tempered springs. 5. Precision machined heat-treated steel piston. 6. Triple heat-treated steel spindle. 7. Full rack and pinion operation.


9 of 17

D. Mounting: 1. Out-swing doors surface parallel arm mount closers except where noted on hardware schedule. 2. In-swing doors surface regular arm mount closers except where noted on hardware schedule. 3. Provide brackets and shoe supports for aluminum doors and frames to mount fifth screw. 4. Furnish drop plates where top rail conditions on door do not allow for mounting of closer and where backside

of closer is exposed through glass.

E. Size closers in compliance with requirements for accessibility (ADAAG). Comply with following maximum opening force requirements. 1. Interior hinged openings: 5.0 lbs. 2. Fire-rated and exterior openings are to be adjusted to have minimum opening force allowable by authority

having jurisdiction.

F. Fasteners: Provide self-reaming, self-tapping wood and machine screws, and sex nuts and bolts for each closer.

G. Acceptable manufacturers: Hager 5200 Series Norton 8000 Series Sargent 1330 Series

2.06 PROTECTIVE TRIM

A. Protective trim of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Size of protection plate: single doors, size two inches less door width (LDW) on push side of door, and one inch less door width on pull side of door. For pairs of doors, size one inch less door width (LDW) on push side of door, and 1/2 inch on pull side of door. Adjust sizes to accommodate accompanying hardware, such as, edge guards, astragals and others. 1. Kick Plates 10” high or sized to door bottom rail height. 2. Mop Plates 4” high.

C. Products to be certified and listed by the following:

1. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6. 2. UL.

D. Material and Design:

1. 0.050” gage stainless steel. 2. Corners square, polishing lines or dominant direction of surface pattern so they run across door width of plate. 3. Bevel top, bottom, and sides uniformly leaving no sharp edges. 4. Countersink holes for screws. Space screw holes so they are no more than eight inches CTC, along a

centerline not over 1/2” in from edge around plate. End screws maximum of 0.53” from corners.

E. UL label stamp required on protection plates when top of plate is more than 16 inches above bottom of door on fire rated openings. Verify door manufacturer’s UL listing for maximum height and width of protection plate to be used.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Hager 190S


10 of 17

Trimco Burns

2.07 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops and holders of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Wall Stops: Provide door stops wherever necessary to prevent door or hardware from striking an adjacent

partition or obstruction. Provide wall stops when possible. Door stops and holders mounted in concrete floor or masonry walls have stainless steel machine screws and lead expansion shields.

C. Products to be certified and listed by the following: 1. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Convex Concave Hager 232W 236W Rockwood Burns

E. Overhead Stops and Holders: Provide overhead stops and holders for doors that open against equipment,

casework sidelights and other objects that would make wall stops/holders and floor stops/holders inappropriate. Provide sex bolt attachments for mineral core wood door applications.

F. Products to be certified and listed by the following:

1. Overhead Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8 Grade 1.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Heavy Duty Surface Hager 7000 SRF Series Glynn Johnson 90 SRF Series Sargent 590 Series

2.08 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical openings in full bed of sealant with lead expansion shields and stainless

steel machine screws complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants: Notched in field to fit frame by hardware installer. Refer to Drawings for special details.

C. Standards: Manufacturer to be certified by the following:

1. Thresholds: ANSI/BHMA A156.21. 2. American with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Hager 417S/520S K.N. Crowder Reese


11 of 17

2.09 DOOR GASKETING AND WEATHERSTRIP

A. Door gasketing and weatherstrip of one manufacturer as listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty.

B. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing where indicated on hardware schedule. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications. 1. Perimeter gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting stile gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are in closed position. 3. Door bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold or floor when door is in closed position. 4. Sound Gasketing: Cutting or notching for stop mounted hardware not permitted. 5. Drip Guard: Apply to exterior face of frame header. Lip length to extend 4” beyond width of door.

C. Products to be certified and listed by the following:

1. Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems: ANSI/BHMA A156.22. 2. BHMA certified for door sweeps, automatic door bottoms, and adhesive applied gasketing.

D. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Comply with NFPA 105 listed, labeled, and acceptable to Authorities Having

Jurisdiction, for smoke control indicated. 1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20 minute rated doors and on smoke rated doors.

E. Fire-Rated Gasketing: Comply with NFPA 80 listed, labeled, and acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction,

for fire ratings indicated.

F. Refer to Section 08 1416 Wood Doors for Category A or Category B. Comply with UBC 7-2 and UL10C positive pressure where frame applied intumescent seals are required.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Perimeter Gasketing:

Stop Applied Adhesive Applied Hager 881S 726 K.N. Crowder Reese

2. Door Bottom Sweeps: Hager 750S / 770SV K.N. Crowder Reese

3. Overhead Drip Guard

Hager 810S K.N. Crowder Reese

2.10 SILENCERS


12 of 17

A. Where smoke, light, or weather seal are not required, provide three silencers per single door frame, two per double door frame and four per Dutch door frame.

B. Products to be certified and listed by the following:

1. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hollow Metal Frame Hager 307D Rockwood Trimco

2.11 KEY CABINET

A. Provide key cabinet; surface mounted to wall.

B. Key control system: 1. Include two sets of key tags, hooks, labels, and envelopes. 2. Contain system in metal cabinet with baked enamel finish. 3. Capacity will be able to hold actual quantities of keys, plus 50 percent. 4. Provide tools, instruction sheets, and accessories required to complete installation.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Lund Equipment Telkee Incorporated Key Control

2.12 FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if within range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved samples.

B. Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by ANSI/BHMA A156.18 designations in hardware

schedule. PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installers present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify Architect via a prepared written report and endorsed by Installer of any discrepancies between the door

schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Report will have a list of conditions detrimental to application, to the proper and timely completion of the work and performance of the hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.02 INSTALLATION


13 of 17

A. Install hardware using manufactures recommended fasteners and installation instructions, at height locations and

clearance tolerances that comply with: 1. NFPA 80 2. NFPA 105 3. ICC/ANSI A117.1 4. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames 5. ANSI/BHMA A156.115W hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames 6. DHI Publication – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware 7. Approved shop drawings 8. Approved finish hardware schedule

B. Install soffit mounted gaskets prior other soffit mounted hardware to provide a continuous seal around the

perimeter of the opening without cutting or notching.

C. Install door closers so they are on the interior of the room side of the door. Stairwell doors will have closers mounted on the stair side and exterior doors will be mounted on the interior side of the building.

D. In drywall applications provide blocking material of sufficient type and size for hardware items that mount directly to the wall.

E. Locate wall mounted bumper to contact the trim of the operating trim.

F. Mount mop and kick plates flush with the bottom of the door and centered horizontally on the door.

G. Set thresholds for exterior, and acoustical doors at sound control openings in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” forming a tight seal between threshold and surface to which set.

H. Anchor all components firmly into position and use anchoring devices furnished with the hardware item, unless otherwise specified.

I. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. Set unit level, plumb and true to line location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Material supplier to schedule final walk through to inspect hardware installation ten (10) business days before final acceptance of Owner. Material supplier will provide a written report detailing discrepancies of each opening to General Contractor within seven (7) calendar days of walk through.

3.04 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING

A. Adjustment: Adjust and check each opening to ensure proper operation of each item of finish hardware. Replace items that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for application at no cost to Owner.

B. Cleaning: Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finish hardware per manufacturer’s instructions after final adjustments have been made. Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer’s level of finish quality at no cost to Owner.


14 of 17

C. Conduct a training class for building maintenance personnel demonstrating the adjustment, operation of mechanical and electrical hardware. Special tools for finish hardware to be turned over and explained usage at the meeting. Record all training and provide to the Owner for future reference.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Leave manufacturer’s protective film intact and provide proper protection for all other finish hardware items that

do not have protective material from the manufacture until Owner accepts project as complete.

3.06 HARDWARE SET SCHEDULE

A. Intent of Hardware Groups 1. Should items of hardware not specified be required for completion of the Work, furnish such items of type

and quality comparable to adjacent hardware and appropriate for service required. 2. Where items of hardware aren’t correctly specified and are required for completion of the Work, a written

statement of such omission, error, or other discrepancy is required to be submitted to Architect, prior to date specified for receipt of bids for clarification by addendum; or, furnish such items in the type and quality established by this specification, and appropriate to the service intended.

B. Guide: Door hardware items have been placed in sets which are intended to be a guide of design, grade, quality,

function, operation, performance, exposure, and like characteristics of door hardware, and may not be complete. Provide door hardware required to make each set complete and operational.

C. Hardware schedule does not reflect handing, backset, method of fastening, and like characteristics of door

hardware and door operation.

D. Review door hardware sets with door types, frames, sizes and details on drawings. Verify suitability and adaptability of items specified in relation to details and surrounding conditions.

3.07 HARDWARE SCHEDULE Hardware Sets SET #1 Doors: 1-102, 1-103, 1-104, 1-105, 1-106, 1-108B 3 Hinge(s) BB1279 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D HA 1 Office Lockset 3450 WTN US26D HA 1 Wall Stop 232W/236W (as required) US32D HA 1 Seal 726 x LAR S HA


15 of 17

SET #2 Doors: 1-107B 1 Continuous Hinge 780-112HD 83" CLR HA 1 Lockset 3480 WTN US26D HA 1 Electric Strike 2930 CYL w/2-679-0028 Plug-In Buzzer US32D HA 1 Closer 5200 HDCS ALM HA 1 Kick Plate 190S 10" x 2" LDW US32D HA 1 Desk Pushbutton 2-679-0708 HA 1 Power Supply 2908 HA 1 Seal 726 x LAR S HA Description of operation: Door is normally closed and secure, Access by key leaves trim in locked position Upon activation of pushbutton at reception, entry is permitted Free egress all times Door remains closed and locked upon power failure SET #3 Doors: 1-108A 3 Hinge(s) BB1279 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D HA 1 Office Lockset 3450 WTN US26D HA 1 Overhead Stop 7016 SRF ALM HA 1 Seal 726 x LAR S HA SET #4 Doors: 1-109, 1-110 3 Hinge(s) BB1279 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D HA 1 Lockset 3480 WTN US26D HA 1 Wall Stop 232W/236W (as required) US32D HA 1 Seal 726 x LAR S HA SET #5 Doors: 1-112 3 Hinge(s) BB1279 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 NRP US26D HA 1 Lockset 3480 WTN US26D HA 1 Closer 5200 ALM HA 1 Wall Stop 232W/236W (as required) US32D HA 1 Seal 726 x LAR S HA


16 of 17

SET #6 Doors: 1-113, 1-114 3 Hinge(s) BB1279 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D HA 1 Privacy Set 3440 WTN US26D HA 1 Closer 5200 ALM HA 1 Kick Plate 190S 10" x 2" LDW US32D HA 1 Mop Plate 190S 4" x 1" LDW US32D HA 1 Wall Stop 232W/236W (as required) US32D HA 3 Door Silencer 307D GREY HA SET #7 Doors: 3-100A 3 Hinge(s) BB1279 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D HA 1 Office Lockset 3450 WTN US26D HA 1 Closer 5200 ALM HA 1 Kick Plate 190S 10" x 2" LDW US32D HA 1 Wall Stop 232W/236W (as required) US32D HA 1 Seal 726 x LAR S HA 1 Door Sweep 750S N x LAR CLR HA 1 Threshold 417S x LAR MIL HA SET #8 Doors: 3-108 3 Hinge(s) BB1279 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D HA 1 Lockset 3470 WTN US26D HA 1 Closer 5200 ALM HA 1 Kick Plate 190S 10" x 2" LDW US32D HA 1 Wall Stop 232W/236W (as required) US32D HA 1 Seal 726 x LAR S HA 1 Door Sweep 750S N x LAR CLR HA 1 Threshold 417S x LAR MIL HA SET #9 Doors: 3-107 3 Hinge(s) BB1279 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D HA 1 Privacy Set 3440 WTN US26D HA 1 Closer 5200 ALM HA 1 Kick Plate 190S 10" x 2" LDW US32D HA 1 Wall Stop 232W/236W (as required) US32D HA 3 Door Silencer 307D GREY HA


17 of 17

SET #10 Doors: 1-100, 1-107A NOTE: CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED. REMAINDER OF HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER SET #11 Doors: 3-100B, 3-102A, 3-106A, 3-109A 3 Hinge(s) BB1191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D HA 1 Lockset 3480 WTN US26D HA 1 Closer 5200 HDCS ALM HA 1 Set Weatherstrip 881S N x LAR MIL HA 1 Drip Cap 810S x LAR MIL HA 1 Door Bottom 770S V x LAR MIL HA 1 Threshold 520S V x LAR MIL HA SET #12 Doors: 3-102B, 3-102C, 3-103A, 3-103B, 3-104A, 3-104B, 3-105, 3-106B, 3-109 NOTE: HARDWARE BY OVERHEAD DOOR SUPPLIER SET #13 Doors: 3-101 3 Hinge(s) BB1279 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D HA 1 Passage 3410 WTN US26D HA 1 Closer 5200 ALM HA 1 Kick Plate 190S 10" x 2" LDW US32D HA 1 Wall Stop 232W/236W (as required) US32D HA 1 Seal 726 x LAR S HA 1 Door Sweep 750S N x LAR CLR HA 1 Threshold 417S x LAR MIL HA SET #14 Doors: 3-103 6 Hinge(s) BB1191 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP US32D HA 1 Lockset 3480 WTN US26D HA 2 Flushbolt 282D US26D HA 2 Closer 5200 HDCS ALM HA 1 Set Weatherstrip 881S N x LAR MIL HA 1 Drip Cap 810S x LAR MIL HA 2 Door Bottom 770S V x LAR MIL HA 1 Threshold 520S V x LAR MIL HA END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY GLAZING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 08 81 00

08 81 00 - 1

SECTION 08 81 00 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Related Sections: 1. 07 92 00 Joint Sealants. 2. 08 41 13 Aluminum Storefronts. 3. 08 11 13 Metal Doors and frames. 4. 08 79 00 Bullet Resistant Windows.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Door view lite glass. 2. Storefront glass. 3. Mirrored glass. 4. Bullet resistant glass. See Glazing Schedule under Part 2 of this section.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard.

B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that

are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under

normal use due to causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directions.

1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


08 81 00 - 2

A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites in exterior walls is

6.0 mm (0.24 inch).

2. Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat-treated glass, are selected so the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the following:

a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees

off vertical and under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300. For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass.

b. 1 lite per 1000 for lites set over 15 degrees off vertical and under action of wind or snow.

C. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range)

in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass-framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

C. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F

(100 deg C), material surfaces. D. Air leakage requirements are set at 0.3 cfm/sf for windows (cubic feet

per minute per square foot of window area) Fenestration systems must be tested in accordance with NFRC 400 or AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, by an accredited, independent laboratory and listed and labeled by the manufacturer. Provide written certification from testing agency that requirements are met.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


08 81 00 - 3

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated.

C. Samples for verification purposes of 12-inch-square samples of each type

of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12-inch-long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

D. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying

that their products comply with specified requirements.

1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer

indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

F. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge

sealant indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks.

G. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing compliance with 1 requirements specified.

H. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in

Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual."


08 81 00 - 4

B. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below:

1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).

C. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed

glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for

each product indicated below:

1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated. 2. Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated. 3. Insulating glass of each construction indicated. 4. Fire rated safety glass.

E. Single-Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing

accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated.


A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty on Coated Glass Products: Submit written

warranty signed by coated glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty


08 81 00 - 5

covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years

after date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years

after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.00 GLAZING SCHEDULE:

A. Interior glass: ¼” clear, typical. ¼” clear FT fully tempered, where required. ½” bullet resistant glass. UL Level 3.

B. Exterior glass: As follows:

The design standards for this specification are Guardian SunGuard SN 54, FT (fully tempered where required).

1. North elevation: Guardian SunGuard S N 54. a. Inside lite: ¼” clear b. Air space: ½” c. Outside lite: ¼” clear d. LT = 54, SHGC = .28, VLRO = 28%, VLRI = 13%, U-VALUE = .24 2. East elevation: Guardian SunGuard SN 54. a. Inside lite: ¼” clear b. Air space: ½” c. Outside lite: ¼” Gray d. LT = 27, SHGC = .19, VLRO = 7%, VLRI = 17%, U-VALUE = .24 3. South elevation: Guardian SunGuard SN 54. a. Inside lite: ¼” clear b. Air space: ½” c. Outside lite: ¼” Gray d. LT = 27, SHGC = .19, VLRO = 7%, VLRI = 17%, U-VALUE = .24


08 81 00 - 6

4. West elevation: Guardian SunGuard SN 54. a. Inside lite: ¼” clear b. Air space: ½” c. Outside lite: ¼” Gray d. LT = 27, SHGC = .19, VLRO = 7%, VLRI = 17%, U-VALUE = .24 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements specified herein and to the design standard note above, glass by one of the following companies may be provided: 1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 3. AFG Industries, Inc. 4. Glasstemp, Inc. 5. PPG Industries, Inc. 6. Tempglass. 7. TGP 8. Armortex (bullet resistant glass)

2.02 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class as indicated below, and Quality q3 (glazing select).

B. Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

C. Refer to Primary Clear Float Glass Product Data Sheet for Class 1

uncoated tinted glass for monolithic glazing.

D. Refer to requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of assembled units composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light transmittance, U-values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance.

E. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0-mm (0.23-inch) thick, conforming to ASTM C

1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating.

2.03 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.

2.04 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS


08 81 00 - 7

A. Uncoated, Clear, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below. 1. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.

2.05 FIRE RATED GLASS

A. As the design standard: TGP Fire Rated Glass, FireLite Plus, Fire tested, Passes required hose stream test, High impact safety rated per CPSC 16CFR 1201 Cat.II. Not an applied film.

2.06 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774.Wired insulating glass units consist of one lite of wired glass facing the interior of the building.

B. Requirements:

1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units.

2. Provide heat-treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or, if

not otherwise indicated, Kind HS (heat strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is designated or required.

3. Performance characteristics designated for coated insulating glass

are nominal values based on manufacturer's published test data for units with lites 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) thick and nominal 1/2-inch dehydrated space between lites, unless otherwise indicated.

3. U-values are expressed as Btu/hour x sq. ft. x deg F.

2.06 BULLET RESISTANT GLAZING

A. Bullet resistant glass shall stop projectiles without shattering, absorbing their energy and retaining the bullet.

B. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL)Product Rating: Level 3: Bullet resistant glass that can withstand a minimum of three shots of .44 magnum rounds at a velocity of 1350f/s.

C. The UL Listed Level 3 glazing must be Laminated Glass or Glass/Polycarbonate Composite or Glass Clad Polycarbonate or Multi-ply Polycarbonate or Acrylic Polycarbonate Composite.

D. Reference section 08 79 00 Bullet Resistant Windows. Glazing shall be provided under that section as part of the window assembly.


08 81 00 - 8

2.07 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864.

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following companies.

1. Lock-Strip Gaskets:

a. Stanlock Div., Griffith Rubber Mills.

2. Preformed Gaskets: a. Advanced Elastomer Systems, L.P. b. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. c. `Tremco, Inc.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness

of 85 plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass

lateral movement (side-walking). 2.09 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.


08 81 00 - 9

B. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in

a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.


A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size,

squareness, offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.03 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary

bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows:

1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to

glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label.


08 81 00 - 10

2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants,

as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for

installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows:

1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness

equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

3.04 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.

B. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to

compress gaskets producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.05 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING


08 81 00 - 11

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's printed recommendations. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.

3.06 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from

construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other

masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or

damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days

prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY GYPSUM BOARD DRYWALL HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 09 29 00 _________________________________________________________________________

09 29 00 - 1

SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Section 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing. C. Section 10 26 41 Bullet Resistant Fiberglass Sheeting.


A. Types of work include:

2. Mold resistant gypsum drywall. Certified. 3. Screw-type metal stud support system. 4. Level Four Drywall finishing (joint tape-and-compound

treatment). 5. Metal furring channels.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each gypsum drywall component, including other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Gypsum Board Terminology Standard: GA-505 by Gypsum Association.

D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum board products

from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards.

E. Provide certification of product resistance to mold.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:


09 29 00 - 2

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products of one of the following:

1. Metal Support Materials:

Allied Structural Industries. Bostwick Steel Framing Co. Dale Industries, Inc. Gold Bond Building Products Siv., National Gypsum Co. Milcor Division; Inryco Inc. Marino Industries, Inc. United States Gypsum Co.

2. Direct Suspension Systems:

Chicago Metallic Corp. Donn Corporation. National Rolling Mills Co. United States Gypsum Co.

3. Gypsum Board and Related Products:

American Gypsum Co. Flintkote Products, Genstar Building Materials Co. Georgia-Pacific Corp. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. United States Gypsum Co. Security Wall Products, Inc.

2.02 METAL SUPPORT MATERIALS:

A. Ceiling Support Materials and Systems:

1. General: Size ceiling support components to comply with ASTM C 754 unless otherwise indicated.

2. Main Runners: Steel channels with rust inhibitive paint finish, hot or cold-rolled.

3. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized.

4. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts, cast-in-place concrete inserts or other devices applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction practices or by certified test data. Size devices for 3 x calculated load supported except


09 29 00 - 3

size direct pull-out concrete inserts for 5 x calculated loads.

5. Furring Members: ASTM C 645; 0.0179" min. thickness of base metal, C-shaped studs.

6. Furring Anchorages: 16 gage galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire-type clips, bolts, nails or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer and complying with C 754.

7. Direct Suspension Systems: Manufacturer's standard zinc-coated or painted steel system of furring runners, furring tees, and accessories designed for concealed support of gypsum drywall ceilings; of proper type for use intended.

I. Wall/Partition Support Materials:

1. Studs: ASTM C 645: Interior partitions and inside of

exterior wall studs = 25 gauge; 20 gauge if exceeding 15’-0” in height.

3. Runners: Match studs; type recommended by stud

manufacturer for floor and ceiling support of studs, and for vertical abutment of drywall work at other work.

1. Metal furring channels: 18 gauge 7/8” Hat or C shaped.

2.03 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS:

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, of types, edge configuration and thickness indicated below; in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

1. Mold resistant paperless glass matt type at all

locations. 3. Type X where required for fire-resistive-rated

assemblies. 4. Edges: Tapered. 5. Thickness: 5/8".

C. Recycled content regular drywall: Outside paper layers on each

face of product shall be 100 % recycled material. Gypsum core shall be recycled product in percentage which is manufacturers standard.


09 29 00 - 4

F. VOC content of adhesives: Limits to be less than 50 g/L.

2.04 TRIM ACCESSORIES:

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated for drywall work, formed of galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated, with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide corner beads, L-type edge trim-beads, U-type edge trim-beads, special L-kerf- type edge trim-beads, and one-piece “V” shaped control joint beads.

2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:

A. General: ASTM C 475; type recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape.

C. Joint Compound: Ready-mixed vinyl-type for interior use.

D. Grade: 2 separate grades; one specifically for bedding tapes

and filling depressions, and one for topping and sanding.

E. Joint Compound: On interior work provide chemical-hardening-type for bedding and filling, ready-mixed vinyl-type or vinyl-type powder type for topping.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials including wall control joints for gypsum drywall work of the type and grade recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum board.

B. Gypsum Board Screws: Comply with ASTM C 646.Pan head metal

screws for metal to metal connections. Flared head screws for drywall to metal connections only.

C. Drywall ceiling control joints: V shaped. D. Confirm type and length of fasteners at partitions with bullet

resistant fiberglass sheeting installer. Fasteners shall be of sufficient length to penetrate the metal studs by ¾”.


09 29 00 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate work with structural ceiling work to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers.

1. Furnish concrete inserts, steel deck hanger clips and

similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS:

A. General:

1. Metal Support Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 754.

2. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support

system, frame both sides of joints with Furring and other support as indicated.

3. Ceiling Support Suspension Systems:

4. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting

directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated.

5. Space main runners 4'-0" o.c. and space hangers 4'-0"

o.c. along runners, except as otherwise shown.

B. Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/4" in 12'-0", measured both lengthwise on each runner and transversely between parallel runners.

C. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other

structural supports as indicated.

D. Space furring member 16" o.c., except as otherwise indicated.

E. Install auxiliary framing at termination of drywall work, and at openings for light fixtures and similar work, as required


09 29 00 - 6

for support of both the drywall construction and other work indicated for support thereon.

F. Wall/Partition Support Systems:

1. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if not available, of "Gypsum Construction handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co.

2.Isolate stud system from transfer of structural loading to system, both horizontally and vertically. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.

3.Install runner tracks at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other work, except as otherwise indicated.

J Extend partition stud system up to the roof deck.

K. Space studs 16" o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

L. Space wall furring members 16" o.c., unless otherwise

indicated. 3.03 GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA 216.

B. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and

ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 1'-0" in alternate courses of board.

C. Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner which will

minimize the number of end-butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 1'-0".

D. Install wall/partition boards vertically to avoid end-butt

joints wherever possible.


09 29 00 - 7

E. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not

install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16" open space between boards. Do not force into place.

F. Located either edge or end joints over supports, except in

horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.

G. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking

provided for additional support at openings and cutouts.

H. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced standards and manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated.

3.04 METHODS OF GYPSUM DRYWALL APPLICATION:

A. Single-layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard.

1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible.

2. On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically

(parallel), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints.

3. On partitions with a layer of bullet resistant sheeting

the gypsum board drywall is installed as the outside layer per the drawings. Fasteners shall be of sufficient length to penetrate the metal studs by ¾”.

B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to

supports as follows: Fasten with screws. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES:

A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in


09 29 00 - 8

accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

B. Install metal corner beads at external corners of drywall

work.

C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where semi-finishing type is indicated. Install L-type trim where work is tightly abutted to other work and install special kerf-type where other work is kerfed to receive long leg of L-type trim. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled (including control joints).

D. Install semi-finishing trim where indicated, and where

exterior gypsum board edges are not covered by applied moldings or indicated to receive trim with face flanges covered with joint compound.

E. Provide control joints at 20’ on center. Consult Architect for

exact locations. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL FINISHING:

A. Level Four drywall finishing is required at surfaces exposed to view. Concealed surfaces above the ceiling are taped, but not finished.

B. General: Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for finishing. Pre-fill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer.

C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where

a trim accessory is indicated.

D. Apply joint compound in 3 coats (not including pre-fill of openings in base), and sand between last 2 coats and after last coat.

3.07 PROTECTION OF WORK:

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures gypsum drywall work being


09 29 00 - 9

without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 09 51 13 _____________________________________________________________________

09 51 13 - 1

SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceilings composed of 2 x 2 acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. Acoustical panels shall contain recycled material content in the percentages listed herein.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of product specified.

C. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required,

prepared on samples of size indicated below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.

1. 24-inch- square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel

ceilings that comply with the following requirements:

1. Fire-response tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. Qualified testing and inspecting agencies include Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock Hersey, or another agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow-up services.


09 51 13 - 2

2. Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type

of acoustical ceiling panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.

D. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each

type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.


A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room

temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components (if any), and partition assemblies (if any).

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS


09 51 13 - 3

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents.

1. Acoustical Panel Ceilings and Suspension System: Furnish

quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern and size. Provide on full box of Type 2 fire rated ceiling tile.


A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical panels that shall be incorporated in the Work include the following or equal: 1.Armstrong Fine Fissured HumiGuard Plus performance series mineral fiber, high humidity and sag resistant trim edge, 2’x 2’. NRC=0.70. Recycled content =56%. Suspension System shall be manufacturer’s 15/16” Intermediate Duty System, 2’x 2’ grid.

B. Acceptable manufacturers:

1. Armstrong 2. Certainteed 3. USG Corp.

C. VOC content: Limited to less than 80 g/L. D. Color for all components: White.

2.02 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide the above specified grid or manufacturer's equal systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.

B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard

factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.


09 51 13 - 4

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M),

Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

E. Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

F. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with

rust-inhibitive paint. G. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with

rust-inhibitive paint.

H. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide, formed with 0.0396-inch- (1-mm-) thick galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, G 90 (ASTM A 446M, Z 275) Coating Designation, with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.

I. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated, or

if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

1. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

J. See additional requirement notes on the Reflected Ceiling Plan drawings.


A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


09 51 13 - 5

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections.

1. Furnish cast-in-place anchors and similar devices to other

trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordinating other work.

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of acoustical

panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders shown otherwise, and conform to the layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636 and ASTM E 580. Refer to Structural Drawings for Seismic Design Category Classification.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as

follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset

resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling

plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to

supports above with a minimum of 3 tight turns. Connect


09 51 13 - 6

hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

6. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along

each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

7. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter

of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

8. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16

inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.18 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

9. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

10. Install suspension system runners so they are square and

securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

11. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted

accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY VINYL BASE HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 09 65 13

09 65 13- 1

SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY


1. Resilient wall base. 1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of product specified.

C. Samples for initial selection purposes of manufacturer's standard

sample sets in form of pieces cut from each type of product specified showing full range of colors and patterns available.


A. Single-Source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product specified from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.


A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

b. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient

temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

c. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48

hours in advance of installation.


09 65 13- 2


A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive products specified in this Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C).

B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as

that of the space where they are to be installed.

C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products specified in this Section.

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence installing products specified in this Section with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or

fraction thereof of each different type and color of resilient wall base installed.


A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, those specified in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of

the products specified in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section.

2.02 RESILIENT WALL BASE

A. Vinyl Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type II, and


09 65 13- 3

requirements specified in the Vinyl Wall Base Data at end of this Section.

2.03 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.

B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified,

portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Adhesives: Latex-based type recommended by manufacturer to suit

resilient flooring product and substrate conditions indicated. D. VOC content in adhesives: Less than 50 g/L less water.


A. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications for preparing substrates indicated to receive products indicated.

E. Clean wall substrates to be covered immediately before installing

products specified in this Section. Following cleaning, examine substrates for excessive drywall compound or other debri and sand smooth before installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to manufacturer's installation directions.

B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and

other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

C. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids

along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended

CHEATHAM COUNTY RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 09 65 13

09 65 13- 4

adhesive filler material. D. Install inside and exterior preformed corners before installing

straight pieces. E. If bullnose corners occur, bend straight pieces around and adhere

tightly. (Masonry specification calls for first course of block above floor slab to have square corners.)

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation:

1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner

recommended by manufacturers of resilient product involved.

2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.

3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer.

4. Damp-mop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil.

B. Protect base and floor against mars, marks, indentations, and other

damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product involved.

VINYL WALL BASE PRODUCT DATA A. Vinyl Wall Base Designation: VINYL B. Style: Cove with top-set toe. C. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 1/8 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer but not less than 100 feet. F. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and

patterns produced for vinyl wall base complying with requirements indicated. 1. Available Products:


09 65 13- 5

Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc. Flexco Div., Textile Rubber Co. Johsnon Rubber Co., Inc. Kentile Floors, Inc.

END OF SECTION


09 65 13- 6

CHEATHAM COUNTY PAINTING

HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 09 91 00 ______________________________________________________________________________

09 91 00 - 1

SECTION 09 91 00 – PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:


1.02 SUMMARY:

A. Low odor, low VOC paints are specified for interior spaces. Multiple colors as required per the architectural drawings.

B. Painted text on the interior wall is included in the work. See schedule at the end of this section.

C. Extent of painting work is as herein specified and takes precedence

over any painting noted on the drawings. Any surfaces not to be painted are specifically noted on the drawings.

D. Work requires painting and finishing of all interior and exterior

exposed items and surfaces throughout Project whether specifically noted or not noted on the drawings and except as otherwise indicated herein.

E. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in

addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.

F. Each of the two finish coats will vary slightly in color with the

top coat being the desired color.

G. Work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding of unexposed items specified in the mechanical, plumbing and electrical documents), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise indicated. All items on the roof including equipment, louvers, vents and fans shall match the color of the metal roof. Includes painting of interior wall graphics and lettering shown on the drawings and stenciling of rated walls.



09 91 00 - 2

H. Factory standard colors: The painter is required to paint mechanical, plumbing and electrical equipment and piping in accordance with the Owners requirements.

I. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials,

including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.

J. Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is

specifically noted as a surface not to be painted, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated on the drawings. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Architect will select these from standard colors or finishes available.

K. The following categories of work are not included as part of field-

applied finish work.

1. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing or installer-finishing is specified for such items as metal toilet enclosures, pre-finished partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural laminated casework, entrance doors and frames and finished mechanical and electrical equipment, including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets.

2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is

not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, inside of furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe chases and duct shafts.

L. Following categories of work are included under other sections of

these specifications.

1. Shop Primers: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and similar items.

2. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated

components such as architectural woodwork, wood casework and shop-fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical



09 91 00 - 3

equipment or accessories is included under other sections of these specifications.

M. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters'

Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including Paint label analysis, application instructions and color chips for each material proposed for use and should include:

1. Product characteristics. 2. Surface preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Primer requirements and finish specification. 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

5. Application methods. 6. Cautions.

B. On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" x 8" samples of natural and

stained wood finish. Label and identify each as to location and application.


A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:



09 91 00 - 4

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Benjamin Moore and Co.

2. The Sherwin-Williams Company. 3. Porter Paint Co. 2.02 MATERIALS:

A. Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable.

B. Proprietary names used to designate color or materials are not

intended to imply that products of named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers.

C. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit

substrates and service indicated.

D. Lead content: All materials must be lead, mercury and chromate free.

E. VOCs: Interior paints shall be formulated without Volatile Organic

Compounds or solvents.

F. Certification: Interior paints shall be GreenGuard Indoor Air Quality Certified by the GreenGuard Environmental institute under GreenGuard Standard for low emitting products and meet Green Seal Environmental standards for volatile organic compounds and other ingredients.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION:

A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been correct in a manner acceptable to Applicator.



09 91 00 - 5

B. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area.

C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed

surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION:

A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION:

A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

3.04 APPLICATION:

A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes, are indicated

in "schedules" of the contract documents.

2. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.

B. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions

show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

C. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as

similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently- fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment.

D. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers

or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.



09 91 00 - 6

E. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

F. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

G. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been

shop-primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

I. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper

drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firms, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.

J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than

manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.

K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and

electrical work is limited to those items exposed to mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.

L. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be

painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others.

M. Transparent (Clear) Finish: Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.

N. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and

coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.

3.05 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION:



09 91 00 - 7

A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day.

B. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other

paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using car not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.

C. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or

not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.

D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted

finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.

E. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all

damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.06 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE: Sherwin Williams numbers utilized.

A. General: Provide the following low odor, low VOC paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. Each coat shall be 4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry-thickness

B. Gypsum Drywall Systems:

1. 1 Coat Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Primer, B11W900. 2. 2 Coats Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex EG-SHEL, B9 Series. First

coat Color #1, Second coat Color#2.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. 1 Coat Loxon Block Surfacer A24W200.

1. 1 Coat Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Primer, B11W900. 2. 2 Coats Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B10 Series.

First coat Color #1, Second coat Color#2.

D. Ferrous Metal:

1. 1 Coat All Surface Enamel Latex Primer A41W210. 2. 2 Coats Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Semi-gloss, B10 Series.




09 91 00 - 8

E. Galvanized Metal: 1. 1 Coat All Surface Enamel Latex Primer A41W210. 2. 2 Coats Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Semi-gloss, B10 Series.


F. Painted Woodwork: If applicable to project.

1. 1 Coat PrepRite Classic Primer, B28W101. 2. 2 Coats Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Semi-gloss, B10 Series.


H. Plastic, PVC, Fiberglass: 1. 1 Coat All Surface Enamel Latex Primer A41W210. 2. 2 Coats Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Semi-gloss, B10 Series.

I. VOC content limitation: Less than 50 g/L less water.

3.07 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE:

A. General: Provide the following Paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.

B. Ferrous Metal:

1. 1 Coat KemKromik Universal B50wz 2. 2 Coats Industrial Enamel B54wz

C. Galvanized Metal:

1. 1 Coat Galvite High Solids H50wz30 2. 2 Coats Industrial Enamel B54wz

D. Wood:

1. 1 Coat A-100 Alkyd Primer Y24w20 2. 2 Coats Industrial Enamel B54wz

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY CONCRETE FLOOR STAIN HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 09 92 00 ____________________________________________________________________

09 92 00 - 1

SECTION 09 92 00 CONCRETE FLOOR STAIN PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete floor stain and sealer.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 09 91 00 - Painting.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 34 00 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including

surface preparation and application instructions. C. Color Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard color and custom

color charts. D. Installer's Project References: Submit list of successfully

completed projects, including project name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of concrete floor stain applied.

E. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and

cleaning instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Concrete floor stain materials

shall be products of a single manufacturer. B. Installer's Qualifications:

1. Successful experience in application of similar concrete floor stains.

2. Employ persons trained for application of concrete floor stains.


09 92 00 - 2

C. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting before start of application of concrete floor stain. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor, Architect, and applicator. Review surface preparation, application, protection, and coordination with other work.

D. Mock-up: Following the Pre-installation meeting, install the

concrete floor stain and sealer at an inconspicuous area of the building as agreed by all parties. Allow curing time prior to the review of the application.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original,

unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying manufacturer, product name, and concrete floor stain color.

B. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry area indoors in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Keep containers sealed until ready for use.

C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to

prevent damage or contamination. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply concrete floor stain when air or surface

temperature is below 40 degrees F. B. Concrete Floor Wax: Do not apply when air or surface

temperature is below 55 degrees F. C. Concrete Floor Sealer: Do not apply when air or surface

temperature is below 55 degrees F D. Exterior Surfaces: Do not apply materials in wet weather.

1.7 SEQUENCING A. Prepare surface and apply concrete floor stain after other

interior finish work is completed and before baseboards are installed.


09 92 00 - 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Kemiko Concrete Products B. Elite Crete Systems C. Scofield

2.2 CONCRETE FLOOR STAIN A. Concrete Floor Stain: Approved example given: Kemiko Stone Tone

Stain.

1. Description: Combination of acid solution, wetting agents, and metallic ions. When mixed with water, chemically combines with portland cement to form permanent colors.

2. Colors to be included with submitted color charts: Malay

Tan, Cola, English Red, Golden Wheat and Vintage Umber. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Floor Wax: Kemiko Stone Tone Wax.

1. Aliphatic petroleum wax. 2. Non-yellowing. 3. Fast drying.

B. Concrete Floor Sealer: Kemiko Stone Tone Sealer.

1. Acrylic water-based urethane clear sealer. 2. Solids Content: 30 percent. 3. Non-yellowing. 4. Resistant to blush. 5. Satin finish. 6. VOC compliant. 7. Quick drying.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive concrete floor stain. Notify

Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.


09 92 00 - 4

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Protection:

1. Protect walls and surrounding surfaces not to receive concrete floor stain.

2. Do not allow stain to come in contact with wood or metal surfaces.

B. Prepare concrete surface in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. C. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00. Ensure

concrete is a minimum of 28 days old. D. Ensure concrete surface is clean, dry, structurally sound, and

free from dirt, dust, oil, grease, solvents, paint, wax, asphalt, concrete curing compounds, sealing compounds, surface hardeners, bond breakers, adhesive residue, and other surface contaminants.

D. Do not acid wash or use heavy alkali cleaners.

E. A water method of concrete curing is recommended to avoid

conflict with an incompatible concrete curing compound. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply concrete floor stain in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions at locations indicated on the drawings. B. Control depth of color by adjusting volume of stain applied to

floor. C. Apply 2 coats of concrete floor stain. Allow floor to

completely dry after each coat. Do not scrub clean between coats.

D. After floor has completely dried, scrub off stain residue in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow floor to completely dry.

E. Concrete Floor Sealer: Apply concrete floor sealer over

concrete floor stain in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


09 92 00 - 5

F. Concrete Floor Wax: Apply concrete floor wax over interior

concrete floor stain in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Keep material containers closed when not in use to avoid

contamination.

3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect stained concrete floor from damage during construction.

B. Protect concrete surfaces from foot traffic for a minimum of 24

hours. C. Avoid washing concrete surfaces for a minimum of 48 hours.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY SIGNAGE HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 10 14 00 _______________________________________________________________________

10 14 00 - 1

SECTION 10 14 00 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.


A. Extent of specialty signs is as scheduled at the end of this specification.

B. Forms of specialty signs required include the following:

1. Exterior letters. 2. Job Site sign. 3. ADA toilet panel signs.

C. Illuminated exit signs are specified in a Division-16 section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Samples: Submit samples of each sign form and material showing finishes, colors, surface textures and qualities of manufacture and design of each sign component, including graphics.


A. General standard: Comply with the recommendation of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers of Panel Signs:

1. American Graphics


10 14 00 - 2

2. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 3. ASE, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL:

A. Plastic Laminate: High pressure plastic laminate engraving stock with face and core plies in contrasting colors, in finishes and color combinations indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard.

C. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated,

which are fabricated from metals which are non-corrosive to either sign materials or mounting surface.

D. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized

anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.03 FABRICATION OF ADA PANEL SIGNS:

A. General:

1. Fabricate panel signs to comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes and details of construction.

2. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed condition within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16" measured diagonally from corner to corner.

3. Provide: ASE Window Series, Type W-5, Layout 5,Corner/Border Style RR, with Helvetica Medium lettering.

4. Size: 6" x 8" Typical. 5. Edge Condition: Blast Etch 6. Edge Color for Plastic Laminate: Same as lettering 7. Corner Condition: Round

B. Raised characters and edge: 1/32" minimum thickness letters,

numbers, symbols and other graphic devices attached to sign panel on face indicated to provide precisely formed copy.

2.04 FINISHES:

A. General:


10 14 00 - 3

1. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign materials which require selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.

2.05 EXTERIOR LETTERS:

1. 10” Helvetica Medium cast aluminum with baked on Kynar 500 factory painted surface.

2.06 JOB SITE SIGN:

1. Painted plywood sign 4’ x 8’. See drawing at the end of this section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. General:

1. Locate sign units and accessories where shown or scheduled, using mounting methods of type described and in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install sign units level, plumb and at height indicated, with

sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects of appearance.

3. Vinyl Tape Mounting (VTM): Use double-sided foam tape, of

thickness indicated, to mount signs to smooth non-porous surfaces. Do not use for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.

3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. At completion of installation, clean soiled sign surface in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by Owner.

3.03 Schedule of Interior Signage:

A. Text for panel signs shall read: Room Name and Braille.

B. Coordinate with Owner on signage schedule prior to fabrication.


10 14 00 - 4

C. Provide ADA signage at all toilet doors. See the plans. D. Provide one set of cast aluminum exterior letters to read as

follows:

CHEATHAM COUNTY HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY TOILET ACCESSORIES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 10 28 13

10 28 13 - 1

SECTION 10 28 13 - TOILET ACCESSORIES 1.01 PART 1 - GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items as scheduled and as shown on the drawings. Where noted as provided by Owner, the contractor shall install.

1. Toilet paper dispenser. Provided by Owner.

2. Paper towel dispenser. Provided by Owner. 4. Framed plate mirror. See Section 10 81 00 for specification.

5. Stainless steel grab bar – 36”. 6. Stainless steel grab bar – 52”.

7. Soap dispenser. Provided by Owner. 8. Stainless Steel Sanitary Napkin Disposal. Provided by Owner. 9. Stainless Steel 30” mop and broom strip with shelf. 10.Robe Hook. 11.Waste Receptacle. Provided by Owner. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections.

B. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including

construction details relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified options, and finishes.

C. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including

templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices.

D. Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service

recommendations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.


10 28 13 - 2

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.


A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may

have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.


A. Bobrick B. Georgia Pacific C. Sparta Chemical D. Bradley E. ASI

2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034-inch (22-gage) minimum thickness.

B. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.

C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel where concealed.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. TOILET PAPER HOLDER: Provided by Owner. Installed by Contractor. B. Toilet PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER: Provided by Owner. Installed by Contractor.


10 28 13 - 3

D.GRAB BARS: Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 0.05 inch (18 gage) and as follows:

1. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and

anchorages. 2. Clearance: 1-1/2-inch clearance between wall surface and inside

face of bar. 3. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish. 4. Heavy-Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/2 inches. 5. Capacity: Capable of supporting 250 pound load in any

direction. 6. Dimensions: 36" x 54" L shape or individual 36" bar and 54" bars.

F. SOAP DISPENSER: Provided by Owner. Installed by Contractor.

G. MOP AND BROOM HOLDER UTILITY SHELF: Combination unit with 18 gage stainless steel shelf with 1/2" returns, 16 gage support brackets for wall mounting, 16 gage stainless steel hooks on front of shelf, with rubber cam type mop holders, 1/4" diameter stainless steel drying rod suspended below shelf. Provide 36" long unit with 4 mop holders and 3 hooks.

H. FEMININE NAPKIN DISPOSAL: Provided by Owner. Installed by Contractor.

I. DOUBLE ROBE HOOK: Heavy-duty satin-finished stainless steel double rung

robe hook; with rectangular escutcheon with backplate for concealed mounting. One on each toilet door.

J. WASTE RECEPTACLE: Provided by Owner. Installed by Contractor. 2.03 FABRICATION – Toilet Accessories

A. General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory item either by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.

B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise

indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.

C. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units

requiring internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION


10 28 13 - 4

A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf,

complying with ASTM F 446. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's

recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY FIRE EXTINGUISHERS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 10 44 00 _______________________________________________________________________________

10 44 00 - 1

SECTION 10 44 00 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY


1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 3. Fire extinguisher mounting brackets.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that

relate to this Section:

1. Division 15 Section "Standpipe and Sprinkler Systems" for fire protection standpipe and hose systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for cabinets include rough-in dimensions, details

showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style, and materials.

C. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's

color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of cabinet finish indicated or exposed to view.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Coordination: Verify that cabinets are sized to accommodate type and

capacity of extinguishers indicated and provided by Owner under separate Contract.


10 44 00 - 2

C. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL

listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

J.L. Industries. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. Modern Metal Products by Muckle. Potter-Roemer, Inc. Samson Metal Products, Inc.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, that comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:10:B:C, 5-lb nominal

capacity, in enameled steel container. C. Extinguishers shall have a current inspection label by a Certified

Inspector. 2.03 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Brackets: Designed to prevent accidentally dislodging extinguisher, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated finish.

1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets and

for those located in cabinets. 2.04 CABINETS

A. Construction: Manufacturer's standard box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.


10 44 00 - 3

B. Fire-Rated Cabinets: UL listed with UL listing mark with fire-resistance rating of wall where it is installed.

C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing the following:

1. Fire extinguisher.

D. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:

1. Semi-recessed: Cabinet box (tub) partially recessed in walls of

shallow depth.

E. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door

frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

2. Rolled-edge trim with 2-1/2-inch backbend depth. 3. Trim Metal: Of same metal and finish as door.

F. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

G. Enameled Steel: Manufacturer's standard finish, hollow steel door

construction with tubular stiles and rails. Door Glazing: Fully tempered float glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, Kind FT, Class as follows:

1. Class 1 (clear).

H. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with FIRE EXTINGUISHER

lettering applied to door. Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location.

1. Application Process: Silk screen.

j. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with FIRE EXTINGUISHER in red letter decals applied to wall surface. Use letter size, style, and location as selected by Architect.

K. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design.

1. Full-Glass Panel: Float glass, 1/8 inch thick.


10 44 00 - 4

L. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 deg.

2.05 FINISHES FOR CABINETS, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by

applying temporary strippable protective covering prior to shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine rough-in for hose vales, hose racks, and cabinets to verify locations of piping connections prior to cabinet installation.

B. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets

to verify cabinet depth and mounting prior to cabinet installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.

B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.

1. Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and

size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Fasten mounting brackets and cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

3. Install per ADA standards. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY MIRROR UNITS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 10 81 00 __________________________________________________________________________

10 81 00 - 1

SECTION 10 81 00 - MIRROR UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



A. Extent of mirror units is indicated on drawings.

B. Types of mirror units required include the following:

1.Stainless steel framed mirror with stainless steel shelf. Size: 48”w. x 36”h.

2.Option: Provide two 24” x 36” framed mirrors.

C. Toilet accessories are specified elsewhere in Division 10.


A. General: Provide mirror units produced by single manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data, detail drawings, and installation instructions for mirror units.

1.5 SPECIFIED PRODUCT WARRANTY:

A. Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors, agreeing to replace any mirrors which develop visible defects within warranty period.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering mirror units which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:


10 81 00 - 2

American Specialties, Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corp.

2.2 MATERIALS:

A. Mirror Glass: 1/4" thick, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, conforming to FS DD-G-451, with silvering, copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.

B. Stainless Steel Framing: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish.

C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 386, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication. 2.3 FABRICATION:

A. Edge Protection: Fabricate frames for glass mirrors to accommodate wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material.

B. Backing: Provide mirror backing and support system which will permit

rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent accumulation of moisture, as follows:

1. Galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 22 gage and full

mirror size, with non-absorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material.

C. Hangers: Provide system of mounting mirror units which will permit

rigid, tamper-proof and theft-proof installation, as follows:

1. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring special tool to remove.

D. Stainless Steel Framed Mirrors:

1. Standard Type: Fabricate frame with channel shapes of not less than 20 gage, with square corners carefully mitered to hairline joints and mechanically interlocked.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION:


10 81 00 - 3

A. Secure mirrors to walls in tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. Mounting height = 40" to bottom of mirror.

3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN:

A. Verify that adjustable tilting mirrors are properly installed and are operating smoothly.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of mirror units in compliance with manufacturer's

recommendations. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY FUEL STATION EQUIPMENT HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 11 15 10 _______________________________________________________________________________

10 44 00 - 1

SECTION 11 15 10 – FUEL STATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY


1. Fuel storage tanks, accessories and equipment. 2. Fuel dispenser pumps, accessories and equipment. 3. Electrical power, underground conduit and trenching. 4. Underground fuel Piping and trenching. 5. 4-column Canopy with reinforced concrete footings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of equipment. Include rough-in dimensions,

details showing mounting methods and materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain all equipment from one source from a single manufacturer.

C. UL-Listed Products: Fuel equipment shall be UL listed with UL listing mark

for type, rating, and classification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FUEL EQUIPMENT

A. Fleet non computing – Electronic register. B. Gas Dispenser: Gasboy Model 9853KXTW1DFZ electronic single product twin

hose - for use with remote pumping unit. C. Diesel dispenser: Gasboy Model 9850KXTW1DZ electronic single product twin

hose 50 GPM – for use with remote pumping unit. D. Flowrate – capable of delivery in typical installations.

1. Gas: Standard Flow (SF) = 15 gpm. 2. Diesel: Ultra-hi Flow (UHF) = 50 gpm.

E. Models

1. Single product twin hose (TW1) – one fuel product unit with two hoses.


10 44 00 - 2

F. Hardware Requirements

1. Display: a. Electronic Fleet: Volume only (gallons) displays. 1” back lighted LCD displays. Maximum 999.999 gallons (9850 models: 9999.99 gallons. Displays both front and back of cabinet. Last transaction maintained for more than 15 minutes by on board capacitor. Backlight by 6 Super-brite LEDs for long life.

2. Meter: a.Four-piston, positive displacement flow-through CFT meter bolsters resistance to fuel contamination with self-cleaning central chamber. 9850K Series: Six-step, rotary motion, positive displacement meter. 4. Pump with air separator (Pump models only): a. Standard and High Flow Pumps: Rotary 10 vane pump with an air eliminator and self-priming built into pump casting. Belt driven. Pumps include field replaceable shaft seal and optional inlet check valve. Ten (10) vanes provide quieter operation and better suction lift. b. Ultra-hi Pumps (9850): High speed rotary vane pump, belt driven. 5. Filter / Strainer: a. Internal Filter: Spin on filter canister located before meter and valve to ensure product purity and protect critical components from contamination. Provide 30-micron particulate or water alert filtration with 1-1/2” opening. One filter provided per hose position on standard and high flow models. Standard on SF, HF, and SHF models. Internal filter not available on UHF models - see external filter option. b. Internal Strainer: 80-mesh removable strainer included in filter adapter housing. One strainer per hose position for standard and high flow, Internal Strainer (9850): 40-mesh removable strainer basket, one per hose position. 6. Valves: a. Standard & High-Flow: 2-stage, 1” solenoid valve for preset operation (PP) that can be cleaned or replaced without breaking down pipe work – standard on dispensers and pumps.

b. Ultra-hi (9850): 2-stage, 1-1/2” solenoid valve – standard on dispensers and pumps.

7. Inlet connection: a. Standard and High flow: 1-1/2” NPT. b. Super-hi and Ultra-hi flow: 2” NPT. 8. Piping: a. Standard, High Flow, and Super-hi: 1” steel tube feedline on single and TW2 dispensers, 1” brazedcopper feedline on TW1 dispenser and all pumps. Discharge is 1” black iron threaded pipe. b. Ultra-hi: 1-1/2” black iron threaded pipe. 10. Discharge: a. Standard & High flow: 1” NPT, convert to ¾” with customer supplied NPT reducer.


10 44 00 - 3

b. Super-hi & Ultra-hi flow: 1-1/4” NPT with bushing to 1” NPT supplied. 11. Junction Box: a. Explosion-proof field wiring junction box for AC wiring. Includes two 1” NPT field wiring openings and one ¾” NPT opening for DC control interface wiring. 12. Totalizer: a. Internal Electronic - Commercial SF, HF, SHF, & UHF: Displayed on LCD by magnetic switch activation. Displays up to 999,999 per meter / hose. Electronically backed up. Whole units only. 13. System Interface: a. Pulse Output. Selectable pulse per gallon outputs for other fuel control systems. Configure for pulse rates of 1:1, 10:1, 100:1, 250:1, or 500:1. Max recommended rate for Ultra-hi Flow 9850 is 100:1. 14. Hose Retriever: a. Hose hook standard. b. Internal spring driven cable retriever.

H. Frame and Panels: 1. Frame: a. Hot dip 13-gauge G90 galvanized steel (0.093”) with welded corners for rigidity and added strength. 2. Cosmetic panels - Hot dip G60 painted galvanized steel a. Replaceable top and sides in black, with lower panels painted white. Lower panels locked to prevent tampering. b. Painted Finish – High quality polyester powder coat. Gas, oil, and UV resistant. 3. Nozzle Boot: a. Side load - island orientation: Standard nozzle boot located on the side of the cabinet, meets W&M interlock requirements, die cast aluminum. 4. Bezel and Dialface Graphics: a. Bezel: High strength structural foam for improved rigidity painted black with one-piece clear polycarbonate window. Gas, oil and UV resistant. b. Dialface: Back screened one-piece polycarbonate overlay (black print on white background per customer spec) with cutouts as needed for displays. Gas, oil and UV resistant. c. Brand: Replaceable polycarbonate back screened brand panel. Gas, oil and UV resistant. I. Unit of Measure: 1. US Gallons. J. Performance / Ratings: 1. Working pressure = 50 psi rated working pressure. 2. Meter accuracy = +/- 0.25%. 3. Flow Rating: Delivery rating is max test rates at the dispenser discharge. Actual rates will vary depending on installation conditions, product dispensed, and accessory items. a. Standard Flow (SF) = 15 gpm – uses ¾” bushing at dispenser discharge.


10 44 00 - 4

b. Ultra-hi Flow (UHF) = 50 gpm. 4.Temperature Rating: Ambient -30ºC (-22ºF) to +55ºC (+131ºF). 5.Relative Humidity: 20% to 95% non-condensing. K. Fuel Compatibility: 1. Suitable for use with conventional motor fuels, oxygenated fuel blends up to 15% ethanol, and bio-diesel blends up to 20% (B20). L. Electrical Requirements: 1. Electronics: 115/230V, 50/60Hz,1-phase. 2. Motors (UHF): a. 230V, 60Hz, 1-phase, 1-1/2 Hp (standard). M. Above Ground Tank Applications: 1. All dispenser models are approved for AST applications. N. Regulatory Approvals: 1. Safety: UL approved (File# MH1941). 2. Weights & Measures: Meter accuracy meets requirements for retail custody transfer, sealable by local officials. a. National Conference of Weights & Measures certified. 3. FCC Part 15 Compliant. 4. NYCFD approved. O. Warranty: 1. 5 year parts & labor warranty. P. Standard Feature: 1. INTERNAL FILTER ADAPTER (“F”): Provides adapter inside the cabinet for a filter element to help ensure product purity. Specify standard or high flow and element type. Not available for 9850K series.

Q. SATELLITE PIPING (“S”): Provides internal piping and union for connecting to a satellite dispenser for convenient fueling of saddle tanks. Available on remote dispensers and 9850K. R. LIGHT (“L”): Illuminates products panels and register areas. LED strip with 15 high brightness LEDs per side. S. INTERNAL HOSE RETRACTOR (“I”) - Keeps hoses out of the fueling lane. T. HIGH HOSE RETRACTOR (“H”) - Eases hose handling during fueling and keeps hose up and out of the way to reduce wear and run-over damage. High, post-mounted with enclosed spring return reel.

W. Accessories: 1. Hose. 2. Breakaway. 3. Swivel. 4. Nozzle. 5. (2) Emergency shut off switch.

X. Fuel storage tanks. 1. 1-Red Jacket ¾ h.p. submerged pump for diesel. 2. 1-Red Jacket 1 ½ h.p. submerged pump for gasoline. 3. 2-Red Jacket mechanical leak detectors 4. 2-Red Jacket control boxes 5. 2-Red Jacket leak detector tees 6. I-Morrison 15 gallon remote fill box with 3" cap and fill

adaptor (diesel)


10 44 00 - 5

7. I-Morrison 15 gallon remote fill box with 2 openings for gasoline and Stage I vapor recovery for gasoline with 3" fill cap and adapter.

8. 1-OPW Stage I check valve 9. 1-OPW Stage I check valve cap 10. 2-Morrison 3" overfill prevention drop tubes 11. 4-Morrison emergency vents 12. 1-OPW standard vent for diesel 13. 1-OPW pressure vacuum vent for gasoline 14. 2-3" ball valves 15. 2-Morrison 3" swing check valves 16. 2-Morrison clock gauges 17. 2-1 1/2" ball valves 18. 2-1 1/2" solenoid valves 19. 4’-0" W X 30' long X 9" high island forms 20. 2-u-shaped bumper posts 21. 1-APT piping transition sump 22. 2-APT Gasboy dispenser sumps 23. 4-APT impact valve support brackets

Z.FUEL STATION CANOPY 1. Provide 1-(4) column canopy, with (9) LED canopy lights. Install

reinforced concrete footings to support the columns. Provide all electrical power and trenching to Building 2 main panel. Include underground storm drain lines from the drain columns to the storm line on-site. Provide Engineered drawings stamped and sealed by a Registered Engineer. See Architectural Drawings for plan and views.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Review the site conditions to confirm that all work proceeding the

installation of fuel equipment has been completed, including concrete pads, underground utilities, rough-ins, supports, etc. Do not proceed until unfinished work is completed or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

1. Install all fuel station equipment specified in this Section 11 15 10. 2. Excavate, form and pour (4) reinforced concrete canopy footers for new fuel

station canopy. 3. Furnish and install fuel station canopy. 4. Excavate ditches from Main Electrical Panel at Building 2 to storage tank

pad to fuel island with conduit and electrical cabling. 5. Furnish and install emergency shut off switches; one at the fuel station

and one at Building 3 6. Furnish and install all necessary electrical for equipment specified in

this Section 11 15 10.


10 44 00 - 6

7. Start up and program all equipment and place into service. 8. Install to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings.

3.04 PROTECTION AND STORAGE

A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that the fuel equipment will be without damage at time of acceptance.

B. Store components only on a tarp or moisture barrier on the ground. Do not set in vegetation.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY VEHICLE SERVICE PIT EQUIPMENT HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 11 16 20 _______________________________________________________________________________

11 16 20 - 1

SECTION 11 16 20 VEHICLE SERVICE PIT EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY


1.Angle plate embedded in concrete full perimeter of service pit, painted safety yellow. As detailed on the drawings. 2.Fall Prevention System. 3.Pit Safety Grate Cover. 4.Rolling Drain Pan.


1. Reference Drawing A4.02 for details. 2. Section 05 51 33 Metal Ladders. 1.03 SUBMITTALS


1.Product data for each type of equipment. Include rough-in

dimensions, details showing mounting methods and materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. Warranty: Warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable manufacturer: The design standard shall be Unilube Systems or as approved under Section 01 63 10 Products and Substitutions. 2.02 EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS

CHEATHAM COUNTY VEHICLE SERVICE PIT EQUIPMENT HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 11 16 20 _______________________________________________________________________________

11 16 20 - 2

A. CT-96 Flange Combination Track with toe kick and 4” Drain Pan Track.

Factory primed finish. B. TGL Tire Guide Leader. Factory primed finish. C. Loves Pit Guard rolling Safety Pit Cover grating.

1. Shall withstand up to 2,000 lbs. 2. Meets OSHA requirements for open pits. 3. Powder coated safety yellow finish.

D. RDP-M Metal Rolling Drain Pan. 1. 14-gauge steel. 2. 34 gallon capacity. 3. Grill minimizes splash. 4. Wheels adjust to three height levels. 5. Utility tool shelf. 6. Interior baffle limits splashing. 7. Front and rear drain connections. 8. Adjusts to fit pits 32” to 48” wide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Review the site conditions to confirm that all work proceeding the

installation of equipment has been completed, including concrete, rough-ins, supports, etc. Do not proceed until unfinished work is completed or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install all equipment listed above. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Install to comply with applicable regulations of governing

authorities. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 13 01 20 ____________________________________________________________________________________

13 01 20 - 1

SECTION 13 01 20 – PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING Part 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Design, fabricate and erect the metal building, including

1. Structural steel main building frames a. Metal building manufacturer to be responsible for supporting all loads generated.

2. Secondary framing including purlins and girts. 3. Roof and wall panels and trims. 4. Gutters and downspouts. 5. Insulation in exterior metal building walls and roofs. 6. Joint sealants in metal building construction.

1.02 REFERENCES A. AISI – North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members - 2007 Edition B. ANSI/AISC 360-05 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ASD 2005, 13th Edition, and Steel Design Guide Series 3 - Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise Building – second edition 2003 C. ASTM A36 - Specification for Carbon Structural Steel D. ASTM A325 - Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated E. ASTM A475 - Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand F. ASTM A529 - Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality G. ASTM A572 - Specification for High Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel H. ASTM A1011 SS or ASTM A1011HSLAS - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability I. ASTM A792 - Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot Dip Process J. ASTM A992 - Specification for Structural Steel Shapes K. ASTM D1494 - Test Method for Diffuse Light Transmission Factor of Reinforced Plastic Panels L. ASTM D2244 - Practice for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates M. ASTM D4214 - Test Method for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films N. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials O. ASTM E283 - Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen P. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference Q. ASTM E1592 - Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference R. ASTM E1646 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference S. ASTM E1680 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems T. AWS A2.4 - Standard Welding Symbols U. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel V. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel


13 01 20 - 2

W. FM4471 – Factory Mutual Research Corporation Standard 4471 Class 1 X. IAS - International Accreditation Service, Inc. Y. MBMA Metal Building Systems Manual - 2006 Edition Z. NAIMA 202 - Standard for Flexible Fiberglass Insulation Systems in Metal Buildings AA. UL 580 - Underwriters Laboratory -Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies BB. UL 790 – Underwriters Laboratory – Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings CC. UL 2218 Underwriters Laboratory – Impact Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering Material DD. SSPC-SP2 - Steel Structures Painting Council, Surface Preparation Specification No. 2, Hand Tool Cleaning 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.The building shall include all primary and secondary structural framing members, connection bolts, roof and wall covering, trim, fasteners, closures, sealer, roof extensions, insulation, thermal blocking, gutters, downspouts and other miscellaneous items as stated in the specifications and/or shown or called for on the drawings. B. Primary framing shall consist of transverse rigid frames of rafters and columns with solid webs. The rigid frame shall be fabricated of shop-welded steel plate and designed for erection by field bolting. Frames shall be:

1. clear span and modular with intermediate columns 2. gabled and single sloped 3. both straight and tapered interior and exterior columns as required. 4. Straight, not tapered, at Building 1.

C. Secondary framing shall consist of purlins, girts, eave struts, flange braces and sag angles as required by design. D. Horizontal loads not resisted by main frame action shall be resisted by

1. standard cable or rod x-bracing in the roof 2. rigid portal frames in the sidewalls 3. panel diaphragm, standard cable or rod x-bracing and rigid portal frames in the walls.

E. Roof and Wall System consists of preformed steel panels, trim, and accessories as required for a complete installation. F. Building overall dimensions, bay spacing, post spacing, eave height, clear dimensions and roof pitch shall be as indicated on the drawings and as defined here.

1. The building “Width” shall be the measurement from outside face to outside face of the sidewall girts. 2. The building “Length” shall be the measurement from outside face to outside face of the endwall girts. 3. “Eave” to be determined as the line along the sidewall formed by the intersection of the planes of the roof and sidewall. 4. “Eave Height" is defined as the vertical dimensions as measured from the finished floor to the top of the eave strut. 5. The “Bay Spacing” shall be the distance between the centerlines of frames for interior bays and the distance from the outside face of endwall girt to the centerline of the adjacent interior frame for end bays. 6. The “Module Spacing” shall be measured between the centerlines of interior columns for interior modules and the distance from the outside face of sidewall girts to the centerline of the adjacent interior column


13 01 20 - 3

7. "Roof Pitch" shall be the inches of vertical rise per inches of horizontal run, expressed as inches of rise per 12 inches of run.

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design primary and secondary structural members and exterior covering materials for applicable load and combinations of loads in accordance with the building code requested. Design loads shall be combined to produce maximum stresses within the structure in accordance with AISC and/or AISI as they apply. B. The design loads plus Dead Load shall be used in the structure design.

1. Roof Live Load shall be applied on the horizontal projection of the roof. Live Load reduction shall be applied according to the code specified above. 2. Wind Load shall be applied as pressure and suction in accordance with standard design criteria. 3. The Roof Snow Load shall be applied on the horizontal projection of the roof. 4. The Ground Snow Load shall be used with the exposure factor, thermal factor, slope factor and importance factor to determine the Roof Snow Load. 5. The metal building system shall be designed for snowdrift conditions if required based on location of the facility. 6. Collateral loads shall be those other than the basic design loads for which the building must be adequately designed. Loads of this type include, but shall not be limited to, suspended ceilings, sprinkler, electrical or mechanical systems, or any suspended or roof mounted HVAC units.

C. The building components shall be designed to the following minimum deflection requirements, unless a specific deflection is required by the building code. Deflection based on wind shall be based on a 10 year map, or 75% or the design pressure for a 50 year map.

1. Frame rafters – L/180 2. Frame sidesway – H/200 at Building 1 3. Frame sidesway – H/120 at Building 3 3. Purlins – L/240 4. Girts – L/180 5. Endwall posts – L/120 6. Roof panel – L/150 7. Wall panel – L/120

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Erection Drawings including:

1. Anchor bolt setting plan, base plate details and column reactions 2. Roof framing plan 3. Wall framing elevations 4. Transverse cross sections 5. Panel layout 6. Exact location of factory located openings 7. Approximate location of field located openings 8. Framing details 9. Flashing details 10. Accessory details

B. Design calculations, stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the state where building will be erected, including:


13 01 20 - 4

1. Stress analysis 2. Deflection analysis 3. Foundation loads for each loading case

C. Letter of Certification, prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, verifying that building design meets indicated loading requirements and building code as requested. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. The company manufacturing the products specified in this Section shall:

1. be a member of MBMA 2. be accredited under the International Accreditation Service, “Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems (AC472) 3. have a minimum of 20 years experience in the manufacture of steel building systems

B. Acceptable Manufacturers Standard

1. Inland Buildings.(IBS) C. Erector's Qualifications

1. Minimum of 5 years experience in this or similar trade 2. Five similar installation references in past 3 years

1.07 WARRANTY A. The metal building manufacturer shall warrant for 5 years that components were free from defects in composition of material and workmanship and in accordance with industry standard for such components. B. Exterior panels shall be warranted by the metal building manufacturer for 20 years against rupture, perforation, or structural failure as a result of corrosion caused by exposure to normal atmospheric conditions. C. The exterior color finish of factory coated roof panels shall be warranted by the metal building manufacturer for 20 years against peeling, cracking, checking, and flaking. D. Provide the Owner with a copy of all warranties. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS – STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. General

1. Structural steel members shall be sheared, plasma cut, formed, punched, welded and painted in the plant of the manufacturer. All shop connections shall be welded in accordance with the AWS "Standard Code for Welding in Building Construction". 2. All structural framing members shall be prepared according to SSPC-SP2 and given one shop coat of standard red oxide primer. 3. All framing members shall carry an easily visible identifying mark to aid the erector in the erection of the building. 4. Field connections shall be bolted with high strength bolts and nuts.


13 01 20 - 5

B. Primary Structural Members 1. The primary structural members shall be rigid framing manufactured of solid web members having tapered or uniform depth rafters rigidly connected to tapered or uniform depth columns. 2. Steel used to fabricate built up framing members shall be 55,000 PSI minimum yield point material and shall conform to the physical characteristics of ASTM A1011, ASTM A572 or ASTM A529, Grade 55. 3. Steel used for interior pipe columns, if required, shall be 35,000 PSI minimum yield point material. 4. The building manufacturer shall have on file certified mill test reports that verify that these requirements have been met.

C. Secondary Structural Members

1. Secondary structural framing shall distribute the loads to the primary structural system and shall include endwall columns and rafters, purlins, girts, eave struts, base support, headers, jambs, flange bracing, clips, and other miscellaneous structural framing. 2. Steel used for cold-formed members shall be 55,000 PSI minimum yield point material and shall conform to the physical characteristics of ASTM A1011 Grade 55. 3. Light gauge cold-formed sections shall be manufactured by precision roll or brake forming. All dimensions shall be true, and the formed member shall be free of fluting, buckling or waviness. 4. Endwall rafters shall be manufactured from roll formed or built-up sections of adequate size and thickness as determined by the design criteria. 5. Endwall columns shall consist of roll formed or built-up sections of adequate size and thickness as determined by the design criteria. 6. Purlins and girts shall be precision roll-formed 8" or 10" deep "Z" sections of adequate size and thickness as determined by the design criteria, minimum 16 gauge. Purlins and girts shall be either simple span or continuous span members. 7. Eave struts shall be precision roll-formed and/or press brake formed "C" sections, minimum 14 gauge. The upper flange shall slope with the normal roof slope, and the web shall be vertical and free to receive the sidewall covering. 8. Base support shall consist of a continuous base angle, base "C", or an 18 gauge one piece base member to which the base of the wall covering shall be attached. The base support shall be securely fastened into the concrete by the erector. 9. Headers and jambs shall be precision roll-formed "C" sections of the same depth as the girts. 10. Flange bracing shall consist of angle members connected to the web of the purlin or girt and to the compression flange of the primary structural member. 11. Clips shall be fabricated from 55,000 PSI minimum yield point material and be factory punched for field bolted connections.

D. Bracing

1. Horizontal load resisting bracing shall be accomplished by diagonal cable bracing, rod bracing, portal frames, and/or diaphragm action of the roof and wall covering. 2. All cables for diagonal bracing shall be fabricated from extra high strength Grade-7 wire Class A coating, left hand lay, galvanized steel strand, conforming to the provisions of ASTM A475. Adjustment shall be provided by an eyebolt assemble. 3. Rod bracing shall be fabricated from minimum 5/8" diameter steel rod conforming to the provisions of ASTM A36.


13 01 20 - 6

4. Portal frames shall be fabricated of built-up sections and conform to the same specifications as primary framing.

2.02 MATERIALS – ROOF SYSTEM A. ROOF PANELS shall be of the following types 1 and 2.

1. Standing seam roof system Type R1 at Office Building 1: a. Rollformed profile shall be IBS VS-216 Standing Seam as manufactured by Inland Buildings. Panels shall have an interlocking seam 2" deep spaced at 16" on center, with minor ribs between major ribs. Each panel shall provide a net coverage width of 16". b. Ribs shall have factory applied non-skinning, non-shrinking mastic in female rib. Panels shall require field machine seaming. c. Panels shall be manufactured from 24 gauge, 50,000 PSI material. d. Sheets shall be coated with a fluoropolymer topcoat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidine fluoride (PVDF) over primer with total DFT of 0.8 – 1.0. The interior side shall be coated with pigmented polyester.

2. Standing seam roof system Type R2 at Building 3:

a. Roll-formed profile shall be IBS TS-324 Standing Seam as manufactured by Inland Buildings. Panels shall have an interlocking seam 3" deep spaced at 24" on center, with minor ribs between major ribs. Each panel shall provide a net coverage width of 24". b. Ribs shall have factory applied non-skinning, non-shrinking mastic in female rib. Panels shall require field machine seaming. c. Panels shall be manufactured from 24 gauge, 50,000 PSI material. d. Sheets shall be coated with a fluoropolymer topcoat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidine fluoride (PVDF) over primer with total DFT of 0.8 – 1.0. The interior side shall be coated with pigmented polyester.

2.03 MATERIALS – WALL SYSTEMS A. EXTERIOR WALL PANEL TYPE W1: At Building 1 only:

1. Roll-formed profile shall be PBA (A Panel) as manufactured by Inland Buildings. Panels shall have 1 1/8" deep major ribs spaced at 12" on center, with minor ribs between major ribs. Each panel shall provide a net coverage width of 36". 2. Manufactured from 24 gauge, 50,000 PSI material. 3. Sheets shall be coated with a fluoropolymer topcoat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidine fluoride (PVDF) over primer with total DFT of 0.8 – 1.0. The interior side shall be coated with pigmented polyester. 4. Panels shall be one piece from base to eave. No endlaps.

B. EXTERIOR WALL PANEL TYPE W2: At Building 3: 1. Roll-formed profile shall be PBR Panel as manufactured by Inland Buildings. Panels shall have 1 1/4" deep major ribs spaced at 12" on center, with minor ribs between major ribs. Each panel shall provide a net coverage width of 36". 2. Manufactured from 24 gauge, 50,000 PSI material. 3. Sheets shall be coated with a fluoropolymer topcoat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidine fluoride (PVDF) over primer with total DFT of 0.8 – 1.0. The interior side shall be coated with pigmented polyester. 4. Panels shall be one piece from base to eave. No endlaps.


13 01 20 - 7

B. INTERIOR LINER WALL PANEL TYPE W3, 10’ height panels: At Building 3.

1. Roll-formed profile shall be PBR Panel as manufactured by Inland Buildings. Panels shall have 1 1/4" deep major ribs spaced at 12" on center, with minor ribs between major ribs. Each panel shall provide a net coverage width of 36". 2. Manufactured from 24 gauge, 50,000 PSI material. 3. Sheets shall be coated with a fluoropolymer topcoat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidine fluoride (PVDF) over primer with total DFT of 0.8 – 1.0. The interior side shall be coated with pigmented polyester. 4. Panels shall be one piece from base to top of panel. No endlaps.

2.04 MATERIALS – TRIM A. Trim shall be 26 gauge with a fluoropolymer topcoat containing not less than 70% polyvinylidine fluoride (PVDF) typical to wall panels.. B. Provide trim at all corners of the building and for all sides of framed openings. Provide trim for base of building wall panels. Provide trim around penetrations through the wall panels. C. Downspouts shall be 26 gauge with a fluoropolymer finish and shall have a minimum cross sectional area of 36 square inches. Downspouts shall terminate with an elbow at approximately 75° or transition to an underground drainage system. Same color as trim. 2.05 INSULATION A. Roof and wall insulation shall be polypropylene fiberglass and polyester scrim, 11# natural kraft, Lamtec WMP-VR, thickness as indicated on the drawings, with a flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. Insulation color shall be White. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners to be manufacturer’s standard long life fasteners. Exposed fastener heads to be factory painted to match the panel color. Self-drilling fasteners shall be used for panel to structural connections. Lapteks shall be used for panel to panel connections. Pop rivets shall be used at endlaps of eave and gable trims. B. Closed cell foam closure strips, die cut to match CS, AP, or LTC panel configuration. Metal closures shall be used with STC or MSC panel. C. Mastic for roof sidelaps, endlaps, and flashings to be a non-hardening butyl tape, non-corrosive to the substrate, of 100% solids. Tape size to be minimum 3/32" x 3/4", supplied in rolls. D. Caulk shall be manufacturer’s standard product as appropriate for the application. E. Thermal blocks of expanded polystyrene shall be supplied with the standing seam roof systems. The thickness of the thermal block shall be compatible with the clip height and insulation thickness.


13 01 20 - 8

F. Roof Jacks shall be used at all 13" diameter and less pipes that penetrate the roof. Roof jacks shall be black color EPDM with a flexible aluminum base to form a weathertight seal at the roof panel. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate built-up members in accordance with MBMA Low Rise Building Systems Manual, Common Industry Practices. B. Fabricate hot rolled members in accordance with AISC Specification for pipe, tube, and rolled structural shapes. C. Fabricate cold formed members in accordance with MBMA Low Rise Building Systems Manual, Common Industry Practices. D. Provide factory drilled or punched framing members for field bolted connections. E. All framing members shall be prepared according to SSPC-SP2 and given one shop coat of standard red oxide primer. F. Clearly and legibly mark each piece to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings. 2.8 PANEL COLORS A.Roof: Almond. B.Wall: Slate Gray. C.Trim: Gutters, downspouts, fascias, wall panel corners, around doors and windows: Submit sample of Medium Bronze and Midnight Bronze for Architect selection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION – FRAMING A. Erect framing in accordance with MBMA Low Rise Building Systems Manual, Common Industry Practices. B. The erector shall furnish temporary guys and bracing where needed for squaring, plumbing, and securing the structural framing against loads, such as wind loads acting on the exposed framing and seismic forces, as well as loads due to erection equipment and erection operation, but not including loads resulting from the performance of work by others. Bracing furnished by the manufacturer for the metal building system cannot be assumed to be adequate during erection. The temporary guys, braces, falseworks and cribbing are the property of the erector, and the erector shall remove them immediately upon completion of erection. C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of the metal building manufacturer. D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed. 3.02 ERECTION – WALL AND ROOFING SYSTEM A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Exercise care when cutting prefinished material to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surface.


13 01 20 - 9

C. Fasten cladding system to structural supports, aligned level and plumb. 3.03 ERECTION – GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Install gutters and downspouts in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Connect downspouts to storm sewer system. 3.04 INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Seal wall and roof accessories weathertight. 3.05 CLEANUP A. Keep site free of excess cut material, daily. B. Leave the site clean and free of excess material at completion. C. Wash the buildings and check for any leakage to the interior at completion. END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY QUONSET HUT HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 13 34 10 _______________________________________________________________________________

13 34 10 - 1

SECTION 13 34 10 Quonset Hut PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This specification covers the design, material, manufacture, as well as shipping and handling of clear span arch type steel structure.

Depending upon specific model, each arch section will be 24.5” center to center of fastening holes once constructed. The interior of the structure below the steel arch shall be clear and free of any structural members and shall provide unobstructed floor space. The structure shall also include all accessories and items required and necessary for the scope and stated use and as herein specified.

B. See the drawings for exterior building dimensions. C. Concrete foundation and supporting walls are by others.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data for each type of equipment. Include rough-in

dimensions, details showing mounting methods and materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. The structure shall be designed to provide a minimum 30-year operational use period in normal conditions. The structure shall be capable of being assembled, operated and dismantled in all ambient temperatures between –20 F and 120 F.


13 34 10 - 2

C. All materials used shall be new, without defects, and free of

repairs. The quality used in the structure shall be such that the structure is in conformance to the performance requirements specified herein.

D. The manufacturer shall have an acrylic coating applied to the

Galvalume Plus steel by the mill for temporary protection during delivery and storage. Steel shall not be stored for an extended period of time and indoor storage is recommended. See Part 3 Execution.

E. Warranty:

1. 30 Year limited warranty on perforations caused by oxidation of any AZM180 Galvalume Plus steel.

2. 30 Year warranty on damage caused by snow or wind. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable manufacturer: SteelMaster Building Systems or as approved under Section 01 63 10 Products and Substitutions. 2.02 Metals:

A. All metal components of the structure including, but not limited to, the arch panels, end wall panels, specialty foundation base connectors, and other framing materials are fabricated from Heavy Commercial AZ 180 g/m2 minimum triple spot Galvalume Plus coating, in accordance with ASTM A 792 & A792M Grade 50 minimum with a 50 ksi minimum yield, and 65 ksi minimum tensile strength.

2.03 Coating:

A. Galvalume Plus has a clear, organic resin coating, which is applied to both sides. Once applied the coating is then thermally cured. Galvalume Plus provides a bright, attractive appearance with a fine spangle and gentle sheen. Galvalume Plus steel will be used for gauges 22-14 and G90 Galvanized steel will be used if and where 12 gauge is specified.

1.Incorporates superior corrosion resistance than that of standard Galvalume and galvanized. 2.Galvalume Plus coating, applied by the continuous hot-dip process, is an alloy consisting of approximately 55% aluminum, 43.4% zinc and 1.6% silicon by weight.


13 34 10 - 3

2.04 Arch and End Wall Panels:

A. Precision cold formed and shall be within manufacturing and design tolerances. Each arch panel has a 7.5” or 9.75” depth corrugation based upon manufacturer’s design to achieve the span. All panels are pre-cut, die-punched and designed to overlap and align with each adjacent panel. Bolt holes are punched 6 ⅞” apart down each seam with a double row of holes at 9” overlap at every connection. The cross corrugations are alleviated at the overlap to create a weather tight seal. The triple flat seam overlap arch section to arch section has a 1” overlap on each of the three faces.

B. All end wall are 18” or 24” wide (center-to-center on the bolt holes) in, at a minimum, 22 gauge steel (gauge required to make span as determined by the manufacturer). Every panel is pre-cut and die-punched for ease of assembly. All end walls are corrugated to 3 ½” or 7 ½” as determined by the manufacturer. All steel end walls include inner and outer curved flashing angles to connect end panels to the arch system.

2.05 Hardware:

A. All arch and end wall panel fasteners are 5/16” – 18 threads/inch Grade 8 minimum SAE corrosive resisting machine bolts and locking nuts, with polyethylene pre-assembled sealing washers tested to ASTM D638 tensile strength specifications. The fasteners to attach the building to the base connection are 3/8” diameter with Grade 8A minimum SAE corrosive resisting machine bolts and locking nuts, with polyethylene pre-assembled sealing washers tested to ASTM D638 tensile strength specifications.

B. Provide Durrel Tech’s 1500 hour corrosion protection providing a minimum .003” plating which will give in excess of 1500 hours salt spray. Other non-structural fasteners, such as tek screws, shall be of standard commercial quality as required.

2.06 Flashing Angle and Foam Gasket:

A. Specially fabricated curved flashing angles are utilized at all end wall to roof transitions to provide a finished edge on the last arch panel and seal the end wall to the arches. These curved angles are custom made to the radius of the building and provide connection for standard or custom end walls.

B. Assembly shall include a polyurethane open cell foam weather-strip gasket to cushion the end wall inside the curved angles. The foam compresses to create a cushioned seal at each arch panel.


13 34 10 - 4


A. Review the site conditions to confirm that all work proceeding the installation of Quonset Hut has been completed, including concrete, rough-ins, supports, etc. Do not proceed until unfinished work is completed or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Confirm that the supporting concrete walls are level, square and

constructed to the correct dimensions.

3.02 PROTECTION AND STORAGE

A. Store the components indoors in a dry, well-ventilated area. B. Cut the banding on all bundles and pallets to allow air to circulate

freely around each component and to reduce the load on the panels. C. Never allow moisture on or between any steel components prior to

construction. D. If temporary outdoor storage can not be avoided comply with the

following. 1. Lay a tarp or moisture barrier on the ground. 2. Do not set in vegetation, as doing so will result in the

deterioration of the protective coating on the steel. 3. Cut the banding and separate all components with dry pieces of

wood so that no two pieces of steel are in contact. 4. Ensure that water or moisture does not accumulate on or in any of

the steel components. 5. Do not simply cover the bundles and pallets with tarps. Doing so

will not prevent moisture damage that can occur as a result of condensation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Each arch should be assembled on the ground, raised and set into

place on the foundation, wall, on the base connectors, and then fastened to an adjacent arch. Check the arches on a continual basis to make certain they are plumb, square and the correct width, height and length.

C. Provide temporary bracing/shoring to maintain shape of the arch as

work progresses. The bracing can be fabricated from suitably sizes


13 34 10 - 5

lumber. Braces to set in ten foot intervals along the entire length of the building.

D. Installation to comply with applicable regulations of governing

authorities.

3.04 CLEANUP

A. Keep site free of excess cut material, daily. B. Leave the site clean and free of excess material at completion. C. Wash the buildings and check for any leakage to the interior at completion.

END OF SECTION

CHEATHAM COUNTY EARTHWORK HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 31 00 00

31 00 00 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Excavating and rough-grading the site as indicated on the plans.

B. Installing drainage piping and appurtenances, and aggregate backfill.

C. Finish-grading. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

A. ASTM D 698 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort.

B. ASTM D 1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort. 1.3 EXISTING UTILITIES

Contractor shall field verify location and depth of underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations.

A. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair utilities to satisfaction of utility company.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shut-off of service if lines are active.

1.4 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

Barricade open excavation occurring as part of this Work and post warning lights. A. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused

by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

1.5 ADDITIONAL UNDERCUTTING AND ENGINEERED FILL Construction lines and cross section depths are shown on drawings. Any additional (remedial)

undercutting and/or engineered fill required to provide proper sub grade shall be at the direct cost of the CONTRACTOR.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 EXCAVATION MATERIAL

A. All excavation performed under this Section shall be considered unclassified excavation regardless of the nature of the material excavated.

B. All suitable material removed from excavation areas shall be used in the construction of

embankments and in other such places as directed by the Engineer.


31 00 00 - 2

2.2 BORROW MATERIAL

Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. If borrow materials are required then borrow shall be approved by a Geotechnical Engineer.

2.3 STRIPPING

Stripping shall consist of removing and stockpiling of topsoil material from the entire developed area of the site. Topsoil shall be stripped from areas to be graded or disturbed as necessary to remove it entirely. A minimum of 10” shall be removed from areas below the proposed structure, parking/driving pads, sidewalks, and all related improvements. In some areas, greater stripping depts may be required.

2.4 UNDERCUTTING

Undercutting shall consist of removing and disposing of unsatisfactory materials below grade in cut sections, from areas upon which fill is be placed, and may also include material excavated below the foundation elevation for pipe, Undercutting does not include the stripping, stockpiling and placing of topsoil.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, freezing temperatures or frost, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge

of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding areas.

D. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water

accumulation. 3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation to subgrade depths and bearing elevation indicated on drawings shall be unclassified.

B. Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface

conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil

materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

C. Excavate for structures, pavements, and walks to indicated elevations and dimensions. Extend excavations for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water,

or construction activities.


31 00 00 - 3

E. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom

elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by the Designer.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by

the Designer.

G. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory soil materials, without intermixing, in shaped, graded, drained, and covered stockpiles. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations.

3.3 BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Fill: Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations.

B. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 3 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

C. Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth

for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. Proof rolling and compaction testing shall be in conformance with Specification 312313 sections 3.06 and 3.12, respectively. Compact soil to not less than the following percentage of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and re-compact top 6 inches below subgrade

and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent. 2. Under paved or improved areas, scarify and re-compact top 8 inches below

subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. D. Grading: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes.

Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

E. Subbase and Base Courses: Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on

prepared subgrade. Place base course material over subbase. Compact to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

F. Under slabs-on grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade: Compact to required

cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

G. Sinkhole repair: Contractor’s geotechnical engineer shall provide recommendations and

construction procedure for sinkhole closures. All sinkhole closures shall be in accordance with State of Tennessee standard sinkhole repair procedures.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: The Contractor shall engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections as required and to prepare test reports. Contractor shall coordinate all work and schedule with geotechnical engineer.


31 00 00 - 4

B Allow testing agency to test and inspect subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of

compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace material to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.5 PROTECTION AND DISPOSAL

A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially

completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

D. Disposal: remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,

trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. 3.6 TOPSOIL SPREADING

A. Place topsoil in 6-inch lifts in areas indicated to receive plant beds or seed and 4-inch in sod areas.

B. "Box" and rake to remove rocks and debris greater than 1” diameter, roll and fine grade, ready for planting. Rough grading sub-contractor shall coordinate with the Prime Contractor and Finishing grading sub-contractor if work is separated so that topsoil is properly prepared prior to seeding operations. See Seeding and Sodding specification for additional requirements on topsoil preparation. A Harley Rake, Landscape Rake, or other measures that are pre-approved by the Owner are to be use for finish grading operations to prepare the topsoil for seeding operations.

C. Topsoil should not be spread more than 7 days prior to the time that finish grading is to take

place, followed immediately by seeding and stabilization measures. Any topsoil that is spread and not immediately addressed with stabilization measures shall be the responsibility of the sub-contractor that originally spread the topsoil to regrade as needed for finish grading operation, seed and stabilization measures.

END OF SECTION 31 00 00 - EARTHWORK

CHEATHAM COUNTY SITE CLEARING HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT SECTION 31 10 00

31 10 00 - 1

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

Provide all labor, material, and equipment to perform all clearing, grubbing, removal and disposal of vegetation, rocks, fences, structures, and debris within the limits of right-of-way and easement areas except objects and structures specified to remain as per instructions on the plans or Contract Documents. This work shall also include the preservation from injury or defacement of all vegetation and objects designated to remain.

1.2 RELATED SECTION

Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork 1.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect trees not marked for removal or located outside the limits of construction by approved means. If tree trunk or branch is cut or scarred then effected area shall be treated with a wound paint to prevent disease.

B. Protect location of benchmark and property corners to avoid damage by vehicular or

equipment traffic.

C. Provide approved means of protection to existing structures including drainage inlets, culverts, road surfaces, sidewalks, curbing, and other structures from damage resulting from vehicular or equipment traffic during construction of this project.

D. Contractor shall conform to the requirements and standards for local, state and federal air

pollution guidelines.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CLEARING

Clear within the construction limits of public right-of-way construction easements through private properties, borrow pits, and stockpile areas as designated on the plans or Contract Documents. Any individual tree or group of trees that are to remain and are located within the limits of clearing shall be left undisturbed and protected by approved means.

3.2 GRUBBING

The area within the limits of grading shall be grubbed to a minimum depth of ten (10) inches below existing ground line elevations to remove grass, roots, and other organic materials. All topsoil shall be stockpiled according to the requirements of Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork. At locations of proposed structures remove stumps and roots to a depth of twenty-four (24) inches below subgrade. Depressions created from grubbing shall be backfilled with suitable materials and compacted to required specifications.

3.3 TRIMMING OF TREES

A. Trees shall be trimmed or pruned to remove branches or roots that interfere with the construction procedure. Cut branches cleanly and leave as small an exposed section as possible. Coat cut sections of branches or roots over two (2) inch diameter with wound paint. All trimming and pruning shall conform to established specifications and standards.


31 10 00 - 2

B. Do not unnecessarily cut tree roots extending into areas of grading limits. Backfilling to

cover disturbed tree root systems shall occur immediately after completion of construction activity.

C. Trees, shrubs, and other forms of landscaping treatment that are located outside of public

right-of-way or construction easements through private property shall remain undisturbed. The contractor shall remove tree branches, limb brush, etc., that could create a construction hazard.

3.4 DISPOSAL

A. Dispose of trees, shrubs, and other waste materials at a site that is selected and properly permitted by the contractor. Failure to comply with this regulation shall result in the Contractor removing the illegally placed material at his own expense.

B. Burning of combustible material is restricted and shall not be allowed except as permitted by

local approval agencies. 3.5 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS

A. The Contractor shall raze, remove and dispose of all buildings and foundations, structures, fences, and other obstructions any portions of which are on the right-of-way except utilities and those for which other provisions have been made for removal. All material from such Work designated to become the property of the Owner shall be removed without unnecessary damage in sections or in pieces which shall be readily transported and shall be stored and protected by the Contractor at specified places within the Project limits and all material not so designated shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of outside the limits of view of the Project. If the material is disposed of on private property, the Contractor shall secure written permission from the property owner.

B. The Owner reserves the right to dispose of buildings on any tract prior to their being torn

down or removed by the Contractor.

C. Buildings and other structures which are designated on the plans or Contract Documents to be removed or disposed of by other agencies shall no be held as a charge or responsibility of the Contractor except that the Contractor waives any and all claims for interference, delay, or damage due to their removal or non-removal.

D. Foundations of buildings and structures shall be removed to a depth of not less than one (1)

foot below natural ground except that within construction limits removal shall be to a depth of not less the two (2) feet below subgrade elevation. Basement floors shall be broken up to prevent holding of water. Basements or cavities left by structure removal shall be filled to the level of the surrounding ground and within the prism of construction and below subgrade elevation shall be compacted according to the requirements of Section 310000 – Earthwork.

3.6 REMOVAL OF CULVERTS, AND OTHER DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

Culverts and other drainage structures in use by traffic shall not be removed until satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic.

3.7 REMOVAL OF PIPE

Pipe designated to become the property of the Owner shall be carefully removed and every precaution taken to avoid breaking or damaging the pipe. Pipes shall be removed and stored when necessary so that there shall be no loss or damage. The Contractor shall be required to replace sections damaged by negligence or by use of improper methods.


31 10 00 - 3

3.8 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, ETC., CONSTRUCTED OF PORTLAND

CEMENT CONCRETE

A. All pavement, base course, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, etc., constructed of Portland cement concrete designated for removal shall be disposed of as directed.

B. Concrete pavement, parking strip, and base all with or without bituminous overlay, concrete

curb and gutter, sidewalk, driveways, etc., shall be removed and disposed of as follows:

1. If the items are below subgrade elevation, but no more than two (2) feet, they shall be removed and disposed of.

2. If the items are more than two (2) feet below subgrade elevation they shall be broken into sizes not to exceed two (2) feet maximum dimension and remain in place unless it interferes with succeeding items of construction.

END OF SECTION 31 10 00 – SITE CLEARING

CHEATHAM COUNTY SUBGRADE PREPARATION HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 31 23 13

31 23 13 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. This Section includes preparing subgrade for construction activities complete with excavation, proof rolling, subgrade undercut and backfill, subgrade stabilization fabric, field quality control and appurtenances.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 31 00 00: Earthwork B. Section 31 10 00: Site Clearing C. Section 31 23 19: Dewatering D. Section 31 25 00: Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Unless Otherwise specified, the work for this Section shall conform to the applicable portions of the following Standard Specifications:

1. ASTM – ASTM International

2. AASHTO – American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials

3. TDOT – Tennessee Department of Transportation 2015 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction

1.04 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. The finish subgrade shall be shaped to conform to plan grade and cross section within a

tolerance of two (2) inches of the Finished grade shown on the Plans in lawn areas or areas not under buildings or pavement. All areas under buildings or pavement shall conform to plan grade and cross section within a tolerance of one (1) inch of the Finished grade shown on the Plans.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Reports

1. The testing lab shall provide the ENGINEER with two (2) certified copies of the sieve analysis for the backfill material. The testing of the material and the certification of the test results shall be performed by a testing laboratory approved by the ENGINEER.

2. The testing lab shall provide the ENGINEER with two (2) certified copies of the compaction and moisture tests of the backfill and subgrade materials. The testing of the materials and the certification of the test results shall be performed by a testing laboratory approved by the ENGINEER.


31 23 13 - 2

B. Samples

1. Submit sample of the proposed subgrade stabilization fabric measuring not less than 1 yd2 in area, and the manufacturer’s certification that the proposed fabric meets or exceeds all requirements listed in Article 2.02 of this Section.

2. All Submissions shall be made not later than 10 working days prior to any installation.

1.06 PRODUCT STORAGE DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Geotextile fabric shall be furnished and stored in a wrap that will protect the geotextile

from ultraviolet radiation and abrasion. The geotextile shall be covered with the aggregate base as per plan within two (2) weeks of its placement.

1.07 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. The CONTRACTOR, at his expense, shall provide, maintain and remove such temporary and/or permanent soil erosion and sedimentation control measures as specified on the Plans or as determined by the ENGINEER.

B. The measures shall prevent surface runoff from carrying excavated materials into the waterways, to reduce erosion of the slopes, and to prevent silting in of waterways downstream of the Work.

C. The measures should include provisions to reduce erosions by the wind of all areas stripped of vegetation, including material stockpiles.

D. Comply with requirements of Section 31 25 00, Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE MATERIALS

A. Aggregate materials, used for temporary gravel roadways and surface treatments, as shown on the Plans, shall be crushed limestone, natural aggregate, blast furnace slag or crushed concrete, meeting the requirements of Type A, Grading D or Type B, Grading D as specified in TDOT Section 903.05. Crushed concrete shall be free of all steel and other deleterious materials.

2.02 SUBGRADE STABILIZATION FABRIC

A. Subgrade stabilization fabric shall be composed of synthetic fibers formed into a woven fabric. The fibers shall be composed of 85% propylene or ester polymers. The geotextile shall conform to the following requirements listed below.

PROPERTY TEST PROCEDURE TEST RESULT Grab Tensile ASTM D4632 270 lbs. (min) Elongation ASTM D4632 15% (min) Trapezoidal Tear ASTM D4533 100 lbs. (min) Puncture Strength ASTM D4833 100 lbs. (min) Apparent Opening Size ASTM D4751 40-70U.S. Sieve Permittivity ASTM D4491 0.05per sec(min) Mullen Burst ASTM D3786 400 psi (min)


31 23 13 - 3

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVING STRUCTURES

A. Structures and sewers to be removed shall be called for on the Plans or as determined by the ENGINEER. Removal or abandonment of structures shall be in accordance with Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing.

3.02 HOLES

A. Earth removed during any phase of the excavation or removal operations, resulting in a hole or void, shall be replaced by backfilling to the proposed subgrade with suitable structural soil fill, which is defined as defined as inorganic, natural soil with maximum particle sizes of 4 inches, maximum gravel content of 15 percent, and maximum plasticity index (PI) of 35 as determined by ASTM D4318 and/or approved by the ENGINEER. Place the structural soil fill in loose lifts no greater than 8 inches. The materials shall be compacted to 95% of its maximum dry unit weight determined by ASTM D698. The moisture content of the fill materials should be controlled to within 3 percentage of the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM Standard D698.

B. The furnishing, placing and compacting of the backfill material shall be at the

CONTRACTOR’S expense.

3.03 SALVAGING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil shall be removed to the depth specified on the Plans. Topsoil salvaged in excess of that required for restoration, as shown on the Plans, will be permanently stockpiled by the CONTRACTOR at the location shown on the Plans.

B. Removing and salvaging topsoil shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00, Earthwork.

3.04 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. All topsoil, muck peat and other unsuitable material within the construction area shall be removed, as shown on the Plans or as directed by the ENGINEER. All ice and snow shall be removed from the surface of the ground before any embankment fill is placed.

B. All topsoil, muck peat, and other unsuitable material shall be permanently stockpiled by

the CONTRACTOR at the locations shown on the Plans. C. Prior to receiving fill, all subgrade areas shell be compacted by rolling with a roller

weighing not less than ten (10) tons. D. The subgrade preparation work shall be completed ahead of placing embankment fill.

Prior to placing fill material, the subgrade shall be shaped and compacted to the Plan cross section grade by approved mechanical means.

3.05 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation shall consist of all Work required to construct the earth grade and its appurtenances true to the lines, grades, and/or cross sections called for on the Plans and in accordance with these Specifications.


31 23 13 - 4

B. Excavation shall consist of the following items, any of which or all of which may be included or incidental to it:

1. Removing trees, stumps, hedges, roots, culverts, sewers, and miscellaneous structures.

2. Removing of all asphalt or concrete pavements, curbs, curb and gutters, sidewalks,

and end headers.

3. Removing aggregate surfaces, salvaging and stockpiling topsoil, subgrade undercut, excavation for structures, trimming and finishing earth grade, rough grading, ditching, and restoration.

4. Transporting and the disposal of all unsuitable material.

C. All Large stones, trees, stumps, brush, shrubs, logs, matted roots, other vegetation and

debris occurring between lines three (3) feet outside the grading limits or as otherwise shown on the Plans shall be completely removed and properly disposed of as specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing.

D. All earth and other existing materials shall be excavated for the full depth and width of the

cross section as shown on the Plans. E. Excess excavated material shall be removed from the project by the CONTRACTOR

along approved routes to stockpile sites approved by the OWNER. Transportation of excess excavation and maintenance of the stockpiling sites shall be considered incidental to the price paid for excavation.

F. Construction, maintenance, removal and restoration of temporary haul roads to stockpile

sites shall be considered incidental to the price paid for Rough Grading. G. During the excavation operation, including the placing of the subbase, the Work area

shall be kept free of water. A dewatering system shall be provided and maintained by the CONTRACTOR at his expense. The dewatering system shall remain in operation until the earthwork is completed.

3.06 PROOF ROLLING

A. After removal of topsoil or other overburden and prior to the construction of embankments, proof roll the existing subgrade with a minimum of 2 passes in each direction with a minimum of 10-ton, tandem axle dump truck.

B. Operate the equipment in a systematic manner to assure the number of passes over all areas, and at speeds between 2.5 and 3.5 miles per hour.

C. Proof rolling shall be done in the presence of the contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer.

Rutting or pumping shall indicate unsatisfactory material and that material shall be undercut as determined by the GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER, and replaced with suitable engineered fill material.

D. Perform proof rolling only when weather conditions permit. Do not proof roll frozen, wet,

or saturated subgrades.


31 23 13 - 5

E. Materials degraded by proof rolling a wet or saturated subgrade shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR as determined by the GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER at no cost to the OWNER.

F. Notify the ENGINEER 48 hours prior to proof rolling.

3.07 SUBGRADE UNDERCUT EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Unsuitable subgrade excavation shall be the operation of:

1. Removing unsuitable soils as determined by the GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER, below the level of the ground after topsoil has been stripped in fill areas.

2. The removal of unsuitable soils below the subgrade elevations, as determined by the

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER in cut areas after the planned finished subgrade has been established.

B. In fill areas, after topsoil has been stripped in accordance with Article 3.06 of this Section,

the GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER will inspect the embankment area to certify the adequacy of the native soils and to determine the extent of any additional excavation of unsuitable soils prior to placing the first lift of the embankment.

C. In cut areas after the planned finished subgrade elevation has been established by the

mass grading operation and proof rolled in accordance with Article 3.06 of this Section the GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER will inspect the subgrade to determine the extent of any additional excavation of unsuitable soils.

D. The areas excavated of unsuitable material, unless otherwise specified in the Contract

Documents, shall be backfilled with non-frost heaving structural soil fill, as defined above, and similar to the adjacent soil. The backfill shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the specified maximum dry unit weight, unless otherwise specified.

E. Subgrade undercut excavation and backfilling, as described in this Article, shall be

considered incidental to the price paid for Rough Grading. 3.08 SUBGRADE STABILIZATION FABRIC

A. Place Subgrade Stabilization Fabric on prepared subgrade or subbase in the manner and at the location as called for on the Plans or as directed by the ENGINEER.

B. The fabric shall be laid smooth and free of tension stress, wrinkles or creases. Fabric

strips shall be placed to provide a minimum overlap of 24 inches for each joint. Fabric shall be placed so that the upper strip will overlap the next lower strip.

C. Should the geotextile be damaged during construction, the torn or punctured section shall

be repaired at CONTRACTOR’S expense by placing a piece of fabric that is sufficiently large to cover the damaged area plus two feet to adjacent undamaged geotextile in all directions.

D. The cost for Subgrade Stabilization Fabric, as described in this Article, shall be

considered incidental to the price paid for Rough Grading.


31 23 13 - 6

3.09 TRIMMING AND FINISHING EARTH GRADE

A. After the earth grade has been constructed to the required grade, all stones and rocks more than three (3) inches in diameter, appearing on the surface of the subgrade shall be removed.

B. The finished earth grade shall be trimmed, all irregularities made smooth and the entire

site completed to within 2 inches of the required lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans.

C. The finished earth grade shall be prepared to drain freely and not allow ponding of water

on the surface.

3.10 DITCHING

A. Ditching shall be constructed at the locations called for on the Plans or as determined by the ENGINEER. Ditches may be shaped by “Machine Grading” or another method approved by the ENGINEER to achieve the cross section, line and grade shown on the Plans.

B. The excess material from the ditch construction shall be stockpiled by the

CONTRACTOR at the locations directed at no additional expense.

C. The ditch sections shall be graded to receive either topsoil and seed or surface gravel. The topsoil, seed, and mulch shall conform to the requirements specified on the Plans and in Section 32 92 19, Seeding. Surface gravel shall conform to the requirements specified on the Plans and in Section 32 15 00, Aggregate Surfacing.

3.11 ROADWAY AND SURFACE AGGREGATE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install either Type A Aggregate- Grading D meeting the requirements of TDOT Section 903.05 and AASHTO M43 #67 as stabilization for permanent roadways and site restoration, as noted on the Plans or as directed by the ENGINEER.

3.12 TESTING

A. During the course of the Work, the ENGINEER may require testing for compaction, sieve analysis and moisture content of the backfill and subgrade materials. The taking of samples and the testing required shall be performed by a testing laboratory suitable to the OWNER and approved by the ENGINEER.

B. The ENGINEER shall determine the location and number of samples to be made. The

testing laboratory shall furnish the ENGINEER with two (2) certified copies of the results of all tests. Testing procedures shall conform to current TDOT 2015 Standards Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. The cost for testing and sampling shall be at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.

C. The Maximum unit weight when used as a measure of compaction or density of soils

shall be understood to mean the maximum dry unit weight per cubic foot as determined by ASTM D698, modified to include all the material passing the 1 inch sieve.

D. Perform one-in-place density test every 5,000 sq ft. for each 8 inch thick, loose lift of fill

material. Perform one-in-place density test per 200 ft. of trench length and a minimum of one per drainage structure for each 8 inch thick, loose lift of fill material.


31 23 13 - 7

E. Upon completion of fill embankments under structures and pavement, the completed

subgrade shall be proof rolled in accordance with section 3.06 of this specification prior to the placement of base stone.

3.13 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Any portions of the backfill, subbase or subgrade which is deficient in the specified density shall be corrected by methods meeting the approval of the ENGINEER.

B. Any extra testing of sampling required by the ENGINEER, because of deficiencies, shall

be at the CONTRACTOR’S expense.

END OF SECTION 31 23 13 – SUBGRADE PREPARATION

CHEATHAM COUNTY DEWATERING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 31 23 19

31 23 19 - 1


A. This section includes all dewatering work complete with design of dewatering systems, construction and operation of dewatering systems, abandonment of dewatering systems, protection of personnel and structures, environmental protection and restoration.


A. Section 31 00 00: Earthwork B. Section 31 23 33: Trenching and Backfilling C. Section 31 25 00: Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control

1.03 DESIGN OF DEWATERING CONSTRUCTION

A. Any Geotechnical Investigations made in relation to this project are provided as reference documents. Interpretations of all data and reports, performing any additional investigations, and obtaining any additional data for construction purposes is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the complete design of all structures and

methods proposed for dewatering the project site, including the implementation of all materials, tools and equipment proposed for use in the Work. Temporary wiring associated with the dewatering shall comply with the applicable portions of the National Electrical Code.


A. All dewatering systems design and construction shall conform to the provisions of Section 31 25 00, Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. Where applicable, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all permits and inspections for dewatering construction in accordance with the provisions of and all local government agencies having jurisdiction. No additional claim for compensation shall be allowed because of the CONTRACTOR’S failure to obtain or pay for such permits and inspections.

B. The CONTRACTOR, at his expense, shall provide, maintain and remove such temporary

and/or permanent soil erosion and sedimentation control measures as specified on the Plans or as determined by the ENGINEER. The measures shall prevent surface runoff from carrying excavated materials into the waterways, to reduce erosion of the slopes, and to prevent silting in of waterways downstream of the Work. Also, the measures should include provisions to reduce erosion by the wind of all areas stripped of vegetation, including material stockpiles.

1.05 FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL REGULATIONS

A. Dewatering operations shall conform to the requirements of all federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction. Dewatering water discharged to streams, drains or sewers may require permits from federal, state or local agencies having jurisdiction.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all water quality requirements prior to discharging

dewatering water. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all testing and treatment required to meet water quality requirements prior to discharge. No discharges to sanitary sewers will be allowed without prior approval of local agencies with jurisdiction for the sanitary sewers.


31 23 19 - 2

1.06 PROTECTION

A. Take all steps necessary, during the Work of this Section, to protect surrounding property and adjacent buildings, private water supplies, roads, drains, sewers, structures and appurtenances. Adequate measures shall be taken to protect such property and construction from the effects of the dewatering operations.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit detailed plans indicating proposed type and location of dewatering wells, type and location of collection/conveyance piping, and point of disposal of pumped water. Do not begin any dewatering work until submittals and supporting data have been reviewed by ENGINEER.

B. Dewatering system shall be designed by a professional with a minimum of seven years

documented experience in the installation and design of dewatering systems. Submittal shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer, stating that the proposed dewatering method is adequate to perform the required tasks.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT INCLUDED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Provide electrical power from local utility. Provide stand-by power and any other required auxiliary dewatering equipment to assure continuous dewatering capability. Dewatering, where required, shall be continuous. Dewatering will not be stopped during work stoppage without approval of the ENGINEER. Coordinate construction operations to minimize duration and extent of dewatering required. Dewatering wells are to use properly designed filters to prevent the migration of soil fines into the well.

3.02 MONITORING AND CONTROL

A. During dewatering operations, monitor ground water level with piezometers to ensure the design of specified groundwater elevation is maintained. Install monitoring wells with screens below the excavation level as required. Install wells at minimum 200-foot intervals located between dewatering wells. Provide access to monitoring wells by ENGINEER.

B. Modify dewatering operation if geotechnical instrumentation or survey measurements

indicate movement of structures, sheeting or embankments, or inability to lower groundwater as specified.

C. Inspect wells and lines on a daily basis to ensure integrity and water tightness. Keep

fittings and connections watertight to ensure release of sulfide to atmosphere from groundwater does not occur.

3.03 EXISTING DRAINAGE CONDITIONS

A. Prior to beginning any work, verify in the field, the location, type and capacity of all existing drainage facilities and conditions which will affect the Work of this Section. No


31 23 19 - 3

allowances shall be made for conditions found during the progress of the dewatering operations because of the CONTRACTOR’S failure to verify such conditions.

3.04 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall make field verification of all existing structures and utilities at the site of the Work which are scheduled to remain and which may be affected by the Work of this Section. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to existing structures and/or utilities caused because of his Work and shall repair such damage at his expense to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER or utility owner.

3.05 DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATIONS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain all finished excavation work free of water during the preparation of the subgrade and until the completion of the Work. No ground or surface water shall be discharged into any existing sanitary sewer. No unit of Work shall be constructed underwater except as otherwise determined by the ENGINEER. Provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of all surface or groundwater entering excavation, trenches or other parts of the Work. Each excavation shall be kept dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the construction is complete.

B. All excavations which extend down to or below the static groundwater elevations shall be

dewatered by lowering and maintain the groundwater level beneath such excavations a distance of not less than 12 inches below the bottom of the excavation. Drainage system methods shall not cause any damage to wells or adjacent property. All outlet drainage piping and conduit shall be kept clean and free from sediment. The CONTRACTOR shall be held responsible for the condition of all existing pipes, conduits and structures which he may use for drainage.

3.06 DEWATERING SUMPS AND PUMP WELLS

A. Sumps and pump wells used as a part of the dewatering system shall be strongly sheathed and braced to protect the construction while in use. Tops of well casings must be covered to prevent animals and debris from entering and shall be 2 to 3 feet above ground. Sumps and wells, when abandoned, shall be backfilled and compacted to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.

3.07 DRILLING

A. Methods used in drilling wells associated with dewatering systems shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER. Drilling methods shall insure proper placement of well materials and shall not involve displacement of earth formations. Drilling shall be done with first class equipment of proper type and in good condition, acceptable to the ENGINEER.

3.08 PUMPING

A. Equipment for pumping and pumping methods associated with dewatering systems shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall construct or furnish adequate discharge piping to conduct and dispose of the water so as to prevent damage to existing structures or property. Pumping equipment shall be first class, acceptable to the ENGINEER, of proper type and size for


31 23 19 - 4

the Work and in good condition. Provide all anchors and supports for pumping equipment.

3.09 FILLING AND GRADING

A. Upon completion of dewatering Work for the Project, abandon and/or fill all holes, trenches, ditches, and other earth excavations created by the Work of this Section and not scheduled to remain. Do all filling, back filling and grading to restore excavations and earth banks to the lines and levels indicated on the Plans and as determined by the ENGINEER. All earth fills shall be compacted to a density equal to that of the surrounding undisturbed earth.

END OF SECTION 31 23 19 – DEWATERING

CHEATHAM COUNTY TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 31 23 33

31 23 33 - 1


A. This Section includes open trench construction for utility installation, complete with trenching, sheeting, bracing, bedding, bedding materials, backfilling, backfill materials, and compaction.


A. Section 31 00 00: Earthwork B. Section 31 10 00: Site Clearing C. Section 31 23 19: Dewatering D. Section 31 25 00: Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control E. Section 33 40 00: Storm Utility Drainage Piping

1.03 EMERGENCY ACCESS

A. Unless otherwise specified, the Work for this Section shall conform to the applicable portions of the following Standard Specifications:

1. ASTM – ASTM International 2. AASHTO – American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials

3. TDOT – Tennessee 2015 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction

1.04 TEST REPORTS

A. The testing laboratory shall provide the ENGINEER with two (2) certified copies of the test results of the compaction of the backfill.

B. The testing for compaction and the certification of the test results shall be performed by a testing laboratory approved by the ENGINEER.

1.05 MIX DESIGN

A. Submit mix designs for any concrete or flowable fill mixtures to be used on the Project. Include certified test results for seven day and 28-day strengths, together with any technical information for admixtures.


A. The CONTRACTOR, at his expense, shall provide, maintain and remove such temporary and/or permanent soil erosion and sedimentation control measures as specified on the Plans of as determined by the ENGINEER.

B. The measures shall prevent surface runoff from carrying excavated materials into waterways, to reduce erosion of the slopes, and to prevent silting in of drainage ways downstream of the Work.

C. The measures should include provisions to reduce erosions by the wind of all areas

stripped of vegetation, including material stockpiles. D. Comply with requirements of Section 31 25 00, Temporary Erosion Sediment Control.


31 23 33 - 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GRANULAR MATERIALS

A. Granular material gradation shall conform to the grading indicated within the plans and details. The granular material shall be reasonably free from organic and otherwise deleterious materials, and it shall be approved by the ENGINEER prior to use.

2.02 CRUSHED STONE BEDDING

A. Crushed, angular, natural stone material, meeting the requirements of AASHTO M43 #67.

2.03 CONCRETE

A. In accordance with TDOT Section 604, use Class A, 3,000 psi strength, Type I cement,

3” maximum slope; 6.5% air content +/-1.0%; no admixtures without the ENGINEER’s approval.

2.04 Flowable Fill for Backfilling

A. Materials: 1. Fly Ash: Fly Ash shall have a maximum loss on ignition of 12% and meet the

other requirements of ASTM C618 (Class F). 2. Water: Water shall meet the requirements of ASTM C94. 3. Cement: ASTM C150 or C595, Type I or IA.

B. Mixture (Strength 100-120 psi):

1. Fly Ash: 2000 lbs/c.y. min 2. Cement: 70 lbs/c.y. min 3. Water: Sufficient water to produce desired flowability, 700 lbs/c.y. ±

C. The temperature of the flowable fill mix as manufactured and delivered shall be at least

50°F. The flowable fill can be mixed by pugmill, central concrete mixer, ready mix truck, turbine mixer, or other acceptable equipment or method.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DEWATERING

A. Open cut trench excavation shall include the site clearing and grubbing, the excavating of all materials encountered, the supporting and protecting of all structures and/or utilities encountered above and below the ground surface, and the removal of water from the construction site.

B. The trenching operation shall commence at the downstream or outlet end of the new Work and proceed upstream, unless otherwise specified on the Plans of directed by the ENGINEER.

C. The trench shall be excavated in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades

specified on the Plans or as established by the ENGINEER. D. The excavated materials shall be temporarily stored along the trench in a manner that will

not cause damage to trees, shrubs, fences, improvements, utilities, private property,


31 23 33 - 3

public property or traffic. The excavated materials shall not be placed at such locations that will endanger the trench banks by imposing loads thereon.

E. The trench shall be sufficient width to provide adequate working space to permit

installation of the pipe and the compaction of the bedding material under and around the pipe. However, for rigid pipe, the width of the trench from below the pipe bedding to 12 inches above the top of the pipe shall not exceed the following dimensions:

6-inch thru 12-inch pipe 30 inches wide 15-inch thru 36-inch pipe Outside diameter plus 16 inches 42-inch thru 60-inch pipe Outside diameter plus 20 inches

Over 60-inch pipe Outside diameter plus 24 inches

F. To support the additional load of the backfill when the maximum trench width as specified

for rigid pipe is exceeded, the CONTRACTOR shall install, at his expense, concrete encasement which shall completely surround the pipe and shall have a minimum thickness at any point of ¼ of the outside diameter of the pipe or four (4) inches, whichever is greater, or at his expense, install another type bedding, approved by the ENGINEER. The concrete encasement shall consist of 3,000 psi strength concrete.

G. For flexible pipe, the minimum width shall be not less than the greater of either the pipe outside diameter plus 16 inches or the pipe outside diameter times 1.25, plus 12 inches. The maximum trench width for flexible pipe shall not exceed the minimum width by more than 6-inches.

H. To support the additional load of the backfill when the maximum trench width as specified

for flexible or semi-rigid pipe is exceeded, the CONTRACTOR shall install, at his expense, crushed stone pipe bedding to the full width between undisturbed trench walls or at least 2.5 pipe diameters on each side of the pipe.

I. When, through the CONTRACTOR’s constructions procedure or because of unsuitable

existing ground conditions, it becomes impossible to maintain alignment and grade properly, the CONTRACTOR, at his expense, shall excavate below the normal trench bottom grade and shall fill the void with a large size aggregate or 3,000 psi concrete as approved by the ENGINEER to insure that the pipe when laid in the proper bedding will maintain correct alignment and proper grade.

J. All trench excavations, including those for shafts and structures, shall be adequately

braces and/or sheeted where necessary to prevent caving or squeezing of the soil. 3.03 SHEETING, SHORING, and BRACING

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, place and maintain at all times such sheeting, shoring, and bracing of the trench and/or shaft as may be required for safety of the workmen and for protection of the new Work or adjacent structures, including pavement, curbs, sidewalks, pipe lines, conduits next to or crossing the trench, and the protection and safety of pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the complete design of all sheeting, shoring and bracing Work. The design shall be appropriate for the soil conditions, shall be of such strength, quality, dimensions and spacing as to prevent caving or loss of ground of squeezing within the neat lines of the excavation, and shall effectively restrain movement of the adjacent soil. Prior to installing the sheeting, shoring or bracing, the


31 23 33 - 4

CONTRACTOR shall submit Plans for this Work to the ENGINEER for informational purposes only.

C. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, and excavation shall conform to the current federal or state

regulations for safety. D. Where indicated on the Plans and where necessary in the Work, install and leave

sheeting, shoring, and bracing in place. No extra compensation shall be paid to CONTRACTOR for sheeting, shoring or bracing left in place.

E. Supports for pipes, conduits, etc., crossing the trench shall conform to the requirements

of the owners of such facilities, and if necessary, shall be left in place. F. The furnishing, placing, bracing, maintaining, and removing of sheeting, shoring, and

trenching materials shall be at the CONTRACTOR’s expense. The CONTRACTOR shall not remove the trench sheeting, shoring and bracing unless the pipe has been properly bedded, and the trench backfilled to sufficiently support the external loads. Also that sheeting, shoring, and bracing material shall not come in contact with the pipe, but shall be installed so that no concentrated loads or horizontal thrusts are transmitted to the Pipe.

3.04 PIPE BEDDING

A. Install and compact in six-inch layers. Particular care shall be taken to assure filling and tamping all spaces under, around, and above the top of the pope. Work in and around pipe by hand to provide uniform support.

B. Rigid Pipe Bedding: Per Plans C. Flexible Pipe Bedding: Per Plans

3.05 BACKFILLING TRENCHES

A. Backfill material shall be placed on section of bedded pipes only after such pipe bedding and backfill materials have been approved by the ENGINEER.

B. The trench backfilling shall follow the pipe laying as closely as possible. However, at no time shall the pipe laying in any trench precede backfilling of that trench by more than 100 feet, unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER.

C. Backfilling shall not be done in freezing weather except by permission of the ENGINEER.

Frozen materials shall not be used in trench backfilling. D. The following trench backfill specification are for use in that portion of the trench beyond

the scope of the pipe bedding requirements which normally stops at a point 12 inches above the top of pipe.

1. Backfill material to be placed above pipe bedding shall be free of cinders, ashes,

refuse, boulders, roots, stumps, trees, timbers, brush, debris, or other extraneous materials which in the opinion of the ENGINEER, are unsuitable.

2. Rocks or stones having a dimension larger than six (6) inches shall not be placed within three (3) feet of the top of the pipe.


31 23 33 - 5

3. Large stones may be placed in the remainder of the trench backfill only if well separated and arranged so that no interference with backfill settlement will result.

E. Backfill trench with structural soil fill materials or gravel as identified within the plans and

details., Backfill shall be compacted in accordance with Section 31 00 00 Earthwork and the geotechnical report.

F. Unless otherwise specified on the Plans or as directed by the ENGINEER, the trench backfill shall be carried to the adjacent existing ground.

G. Compaction of the backfill will not be paid for separately, but shall be considered

incidental to the Work of backfilling and shall include all the Work of manipulating the soil, to obtain the specified densities. No additional compensation will be allowed for any delay required to obtain the specified moisture content or the specified density.

H. Where backfill or bedding as shown on the plans or specified is to be flowable fill, care

shall be used to avoid displacing any pipes or structures due to fluid pressure. Pipes in backfill areas may need to be secured to avoid the buoyancy effect.

3.06 CLEANUP

A. Immediately following the placing and compacting of the backfill, the excess material shall be removed and disposed of by the CONTRACTOR, at his expense. The construction area shall be leveled and left in a neat workmanlike condition.

B. At a seasonally correct time, approved by the ENGINEER, the disturbed areas shall be raked, having topsoil placed thereon, fertilized and seeded per the requirements of Section 32 92 19, Seeding, or the area shall be stabilized with surface gravel, as noted on the Plans, immediately following completion of trench backfilling.

3.07 Field Testing

A. During the course of the Work, the ENGINEER may require testing for compaction or density of the backfill. The taking of samples and the testing required shall be performed by a testing laboratory suitable to the OWNER and approved by the ENGINEER. The cost for testing and sampling shall be at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.

B. The maximum unit weight, when used as a measure of compaction or density of soils, shall be understood to mean the maximum dry unit weight per cubic foot as determined by ASTM D698.

C. Perform one-in-place density test per 200 feet of trench length and a minimum of one per

drainage structure for each 8-inch thick loose lift of fill material. 3.08 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Any portion of the trench backfill which is deficient in the specified density shall be corrected by methods meeting the approval of the ENGINEER.

B. Any extra testing or sampling required because of deficiencies shall be at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.

END OF SECTION 31 23 33 – TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

CHEATHAM COUNTY TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS HIGHWAY GAREA SECTION 31 25 00

31 25 00-1

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This WORK shall consist of temporary measures needed to control erosion and water pollution. These temporary measures shall include, but not be limited to, berms, dikes, dams, sediment basins, fiber mats, netting, gravel, mulches, grasses, slope drains, straw bales, turbidity barriers, temporary gravel construction entrance/exits, inlet filters, ditch sediment traps and other erosion control devices or methods. These temporary measures shall be installed at the locations where needed to control erosion and water pollution during the construction of the PROJECT, and as directed by ENGINEER, and as shown on the DRAWINGS.

B. The Erosion Control Plan presented in the DRAWINGS serves as a minimum for the

requirements of erosion control during construction. CONTRACTOR has the ultimate responsibility for providing adequate erosion control and water quality throughout the duration of the PROJECT. Therefore, if the provided plan is not working sufficiently to protect the PROJECT areas, then CONTRACTOR shall provide additional measures as required to obtain the required protection. CONTRACTOR shall include in the BID price for erosion control a minimum of all items shown on the Erosion Control Plan and any additional items that may be needed to control erosion and water pollution.


A. The following is a list of SPECIFICATIONS which may be related to this section:

1. Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork 2. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing 3. Section 31 23 13 – Subgrade Preparation 4. Section 31 23 19 – Dewatering 5. Section 31 23 33 – Trenching and Backfilling 6. Section 32 15 00 – Aggregate Surfacing 7. Section 32 92 19 - Seeding 8. Section 33 40 00 – Storm Drainage Systems

1.03 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:

1. Tennessee Erosion & Sediment Control Handbook, Fourth Edition, August 2012. 2. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. The CONTRACTOR, at his expense, shall secure all permits, and post all bonds or

deposits to comply with all state and local “Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control,” requirements being Tennessee Water Quality Act TCA 69-13-108 and 40 CFR 122 and 124 and Section 402 – Federal Clean Water Act, as amended and the National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Rules for storm water discharges from construction activity.

B. Comply with all requirements of the agency having jurisdiction. Owner may withhold

payment to CONTRACTOR equivalent to any fines resulting from non-compliance with applicable regulations.


31 25 00-2

1.05 PERFROMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Employ Best Management Practices as Defined by the standard EPA 832-R-92-005.

B. Put preventative measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface

cover before precipitation occurs.

C. Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to construction activities for this Project.

D. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term 24-hour rainfall event that might occur within 10 years.

E. Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction

activities for this Project. F. Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by water

leaving the Project site due to construction activities for this Project. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site. Comply with fugitive dust ordinances of agencies having jurisdiction. Prevent tracking or flowing of mud and sediment onto public or private roads, sidewalks or pavements outside of the Project site.

G. Prevent sedimentation of waterways on or off the project site, including rivers, streams,

lakes, ponds, open drainage ditches, storm sewers and sanitary sewers. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventative measures immediately at no cost to the OWNER. Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction.

H. Maintain temporary preventative measures until permanent measures have been

established. Remove temporary measures when permanent measures have been established.

I. If erosion or sedimentation occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements,

remove deposited sediment or restore eroded areas at no cost to the OWNER. 1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information:

1. Erosion Control Plan.

2. Construction schedule for Erosion Control Scheduling.

3. Sequencing Plan.

4. Plan for disposal of waste material.

5.Product data for materials proposed for use. 6.All applicable permits for Erosion Control.


31 25 00-3

1.05 SCHEDULING A. Sequencing Plan:

1. CONTRACTOR shall submit a sequencing plan for approval for erosion control in

conformance with CONTRACTOR’s overall Construction Plan for approval by ENGINEER.

2. Changes to the Erosion Control Sequencing Plan may be considered by ENGINEER

only if presented in writing by the CONTRACTOR.

B. Temporary Erosion Control:

1. When so indicated in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, or when directed by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall prepare construction schedules for accomplishing temporary erosion control WORK including all maintenance procedures.

2. These schedules shall be applicable to clearing and grubbing, grading, structural

WORK, construction, etc.

C. CONTRACTOR shall submit for acceptance the proposed method of erosion control on haul roads and borrow pits and a plan for disposal of waste material.

D. CONTRACTOR shall be required to incorporate all permanent erosion control features

into the PROJECT at the earliest practicable time as outlined in the accepted schedule. Temporary erosion control measures shall then be used to correct conditions that develop during construction.

E. WORK shall not be started until the erosion control schedules and methods of

operations have been accepted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be submitted for approval prior to installation.

B. Materials may include hay bales, straw, fiber mats, fiber netting, wood cellulose, fiber fabric, gravel, and other suitable materials, and shall be reasonably clean, free of deleterious materials, and certified weed free.

2.02 GRASS SEED:

A. Temporary grass cover (if required) shall be a quick growing species, suitable to the area, in accordance with local criteria and permit requirements, which will provide temporary cover, and not compete with the grasses sown for permanent cover.


31 25 00-4

B. All grass seed shall be approved by ENGINEER and in accordance with local regulations prior to installation per TDEC Region II Requirements below.

Region II

Zone Best Marginal Mix (lb/ac PLS)

Slopes and

Poor/Shallow Soils

Aug 25- Sept 15 Feb 15 –Mar 21

Aug 20-Oct 25 Feb 1-Apr 15

Pensacola bahiagrass (100) (Bermudagrass hulled) (40) Korean lespedeza (30) Kobe lespedeza (10)

Moderate slopes soil >6 in depth

Aug 25 – Sept 15 Feb 15 – Mar 21

Aug 25 – Oct 25 Feb 1 – Apr 15

Pensacola bahiagrass (80) (Bermudagrass hulled) (30) Korean lespedeza (20) Kobe lespedeza (10)

Roadside Channels and

Ditches

Aug 15 – Oct 15 Feb 15 – Apr 15 KY 31 Fescue (150) Bermudagrass (hulled) (20)

Temporary Seeding

May 1 – Sept 15

April 15 – Oct 1

German millet (30) Sudangrass (40)

Temporary Seeding

Wint

Oct 31 – Feb 15

Oct 15 – Mar 1

Annual Ryegrass (40) Foxtail millet (30)

C. Fertilizer and soil conditioners shall be approved by ENGINEER and in accordance

with local regulations prior to installation.

2.03 STRAW BALES

A. Rectangular straw bales, 14 by 18-inch minimum, bound with wire or string along the long dimension. Secure with wood stakes minimum 2 by 2-inch in cross section and length as required to securely fix position of bale.

2.04 SILT FENCE

A. Polypropylene geotextile fabric, resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; meeting the following requirements: 1. Average opening size: 30U.S. Std. Sieve 600 µm) maximum: ASTM D4751.

2. Permissivity: 0.05sec-1, minimum; ASTM D4491.

3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength; ASTM

D4355 after 500 hrs exposure.

4. Tensile Strength: 100lb –f (445 N) minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 lb-f (551 N) minimum in machine direction; ASTM D4632

5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent; ASTM D4632

6. Tear Strength: 55lb-f (244 N) minimum; ASTM D4533

B. Posts shall be 2 by 2-inch cross section hardwood stakes, minimum 3 feet long.


31 25 00-5

2.05 TURBIDITY BARRIER

A. Geotextile fabric curtain suspended from floatation devices at the water surface and held in a vertical position by a ballast chain in the lower hem. Turbidity barrier curtain shall meet the following minimum requirements unless otherwise specified on the plans. 1. Consist of vinyl laminate on 1000 denier polyester fabric weighing 18 ounce per

square yard minimum. 2. Tensile strength of fabric shall be 220 lbs minimum. 3. Edges of fabric to be reinforced with minimum 5/8-inch diameter polypropylene rope. 4. Ballast chain minimum 5/16-inch steel. 5. Buoyancy blocks providing buoyancy of 18 lbs/l.f. 6. Length of curtain (water depth)5-feet.

2.06 DEWATERING DISCHARGE FILTER BAG

A. UV-stabilized, non-woven geotextile bag to filter sediment from water prior to discharging. Geotextile fabric shall meet the following minimum average roll requirements: 1. Tensile Strength: 180 lb-f minimum; ASTM D4632 2. Puncture Strength: 105 lb-f minimum; ASTM D4833 3. Mullen Burst: 350 psi minimum; ASTM D3786-87 4. Trapezoidal Tear: 70lb-f minimum; ASTM D4533 5. Flow Rate: 80gal/min/sf. Minimum; ASTM D4491 6. Permittivity: 1.4 sec minimum; ASTM D4491 7. Apparent Opening Size: 100 U.S. Std. Sieve (150um) maximum; ASTM D4751 8. UV-Stability: 70% retained strength; ASTM D4355 after 500 hours.

2.07 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS

A. Machine produced blanket with a consistent thickness of evenly distributed straw or coconut fiber as specified. Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, the erosion control blanket shall have the following minimum properties: 1. Double net 100% straw blanket. 2. Top and bottom photodegradable polypropylene netting, 1.64 lbs/1,000 sft.

Approximate weight. 3. 100% agricultural straw 0.5 lbs/sy 4. Stitch spacing: 1.5 inches on centers

B. Pegs shall be 6-inch long. Hardwood pegs.

2.08 BONDED FIBER MATRIX

A. Bonded fiber matrix (FFM) shall consist of long strand, residual, softwood fibers joined together by a high-strength, nontoxic adhesive. The BFM shall be 100% biodegradable, and be nontoxic to fish, wildlife, and humans. Upon drying the matrix shall form a high strength, porous and erosion resistant mat that shall not inhibit the germination and growth of plants. The BFM shall retain its form despite re-wetting.

B. Bonded fiber matrix shall consist of:

1. Seed and Fertilizer per Section 32 9219, Seeding. 2. Wood Fiber Mulch: Thermo-mechanically defibrated long, softwood fibers

manufactured from select northern softwood wood chips. 3. Polyacrylamide Binder: Site specific, fully biodegradable, polyacrylamides (PAM’s)

binders, with cross linking long organic jute fibers.


31 25 00-6

C. Materials shall be mixed at the rate of 80lbs/acre of PAM binder and 2500 lbs/acre of

wood fiber mulch. 2.09 INLET FILTER FABRIC

A. The filter fabric shall be constructed of 100% continuous polyester needle-punched non-woven engineering fabric and follow the guidelines in the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D1117-99; Standard Guide for Evaluating Nonwoven Fabrics. The filter fabric shall be fabricated to provide a direct fit with the drainage structure cover. The filter fabric shall have the following minimum physical properties: 1. Tensile Strength: 80lb-f minimum; ASTM D4632 2. Elongation: 50percent minimum; ASTM D 4632 3. Puncture Strength: 45 lb-f minimum; ASTM D4833 4. Mullen Burst: 350 psi minimum; ASTM D3786-87 5. Trapezoidal Tear: 70 lb-f minimum; ASTM D 4533 6. Flow Rate: 80 gal/min/sf. Minimum; ASTM D 4491 7. Permittivity: 1.4 sec minimum; ASTM D 4491 8. Apparent Opening Size: 100 U.S. Std. Sieve (150 ), ASTM D4750 9. UV-Stability: 70% retained strength; ASTM D 4355 after 500 hours.

2.10 ACCEPTABLE MANFUFACTURES

A. Acceptable manufacturers include the following: 1. Turbidity Barrier: Tough Guy Type II by AER-flo Canvas Products, Inc. or equal. 2. Wood fiber mulch: EcoFibre by Canfor Corporation, or equal. 3. Polyacrylamide Binder: HydroTurboNet by Straw Net, Inc., or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to the greatest extent possible.

B. Except in areas to be cleared, do not remove, cut, deface, injure or destroy trees or shrubs without the ENGINEER’S approval. Protect existing trees or shrubs that are to remain and which may be injured, bruised, defaced, or otherwise damaged by construction operations, with suitable fences or other means as approved by the ENGINEER.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Schedule work so that the soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time. Place permanent soil and sedimentation control measures as soon as practical.

3.03 GENERAL

A. Do not discharge excavation ground water to the sanitary sewer, storm sewer, or to rivers, streams, etc. without authorization from entering any storm drain, river, stream, etc. directly by the use of silt fences or other suitable methods.


31 25 00-7

B. Sedimentation control devices shall be installed prior to CONTRACTOR beginning Work. All soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Devices shall be maintained in an effective functioning condition at all times during the course of the Work.

C. Immediately bring earthwork to final grade and protect sideslopes and backslopes from

erosion. Plan and conduct earthwork to minimize duration of exposure of unprotected soils.

D. All temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control practices shall be maintained

and repaired as needed to ensure continued performance of their intended function. E. OWNER will monitor CONTRACTOR’s erosion control and WORK methods.

1. If the overall function and intent of erosion control is not being met, OWNER will require CONTRACTOR to provide additional measures as required to obtain the desired results.

2. Costs for any additional erosion control measures shall be paid for at contract unit prices.

F. The erosion control features installed by CONTRACTOR shall be adequately

maintained by CONTRACTOR until the PROJECT is accepted.

G. Working In or Crossing Watercourses and Wetlands:

1. Construction vehicles shall be kept out of watercourses to the extent possible. 2. Where in-channel WORK is necessary, precautions shall be taken to stabilize the

WORK area during construction to minimize erosion.

a. The channel (including bed and banks) shall always be restabilized immediately after in-channel WORK is completed.

3. Where a live (wet) watercourse must be crossed by construction vehicles during

construction, a Temporary Stream Crossing shall be provided for this purpose.

3.04 DUST CONTROL

A. Keep dust down at all times, including during non-working periods. Sprinkle or treat, with dust suppressants, the soil at the site, haul roads, and other areas disturbed by operations. Dry power brooming is not permitted.

3.05 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install silt fences, ditch sediment traps, check dams, inlet filters, temporary gravel construction entrance/exits, turbidity barriers, erosion control blankets and other soil erosion control devices detailed on the plans. Maintain devices until permanent control measures are completed and effectively established. Remove temporary control devices after permanent measures are established. Remove and replace temporary control devices if they become ineffective at no additional cost to the OWNER.

B. Install temporary erosion and sedimentation control devices per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Advise ENGINEER of any discrepancies between the manufacturer’s recommendations and the details on the plans and install per ENGINEER’S resolution of discrepancy.


31 25 00-8

3.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Inspect preventative measures a minimum of once per week and within a minimum of 24 hours after every rainfall. Any soil erosion control measures damaged or rendered ineffective shall be immediately repaired or removed and replaced at no additional cost.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS

A. Erosion control blankets shall be pegged at the pattern and rate as recommended by the manufacturer, however, at a minimum, blankets shall be pegged at the rate of 2 pegs per square yard of blanket, unless otherwise indicated on the plans.

3.08 APPLICATION OF BONDED FIBER MATRIX

A. The slop shall be prepared and graded prior to application of bonded fiver matrix (BFM). Mixture of wood fiber mulch and polyacrylamide binder shall be blended, with the appropriate amount of seed and fertilizer per Section 32 92 19, Seeding, according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. The BFM shall be hydraulically applied to the soil as a viscous mixture, creating a

continuous, three-dimensional blanket that adheres to the soil surface. The BFM shall be mixed and applied at the rate as specified in Article 2.06 unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. The resulting coverage must be at least 1/8 inch thick over the entire surface area. The BFM shall be applied in two applications from alternate directions to eliminate shadowing, and shall be applied when no rain is expected for 12 hours.

3.09 DEWATERING DISCHARGE

A. Should it be necessary for the CONTRACTOR to do any dewatering during the course of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall filter all discharge through a discharge filter bag or other sediment control device that will filter all discharge water. No dewatering discharge shall be allowed to flow unfiltered from the construction site.

3.10 PROJECT COMPLETION

A. Remove all temporary soil erosion and sedimentation control devices as soon as the permanent measures have been established.

3.11 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PROPERTIES

A. Properties adjacent to the site of a land disturbance shall be protected from sediment deposition.

B. In addition to the erosion control measures required on the DRAWINGS, perimeter

controls may be required if damage to adjacent properties is likely, and may include, but is not limited to:

1. Vegetated buffer strip around the lower perimeter of the land disturbance.

a. Vegetated buffer strips may be used only where runoff in sheet flow is

expected and should be at least twenty (20) feet in width.


31 25 00-9

2. Sediment barriers such as straw bales, erosion logs, and silt fences.

3. Sediment basins and porous landscape detention ponds.

4. Combination of above measures.

3.12 CONSTRUCTION

A. Stabilization of Disturbed Areas:

1. Temporary sediment control measures shall be established prior to time of exposure/disturbance.

2. Permanent stabilization/erosion protection measures shall be established

within fourteen (14) days after final grading of areas.

B. Stabilization of Sediment and Erosion Control Measures: 1. Sediment barriers, perimeter dikes, and other measures intended to either trap

sediment or prevent runoff from flowing over disturbed areas shall be constructed as a first step in grading and be made functional before land disturbance takes place.

2. Earthen structures such as dams, dikes, and diversions shall be stabilized within five (5) days of installation.

3. Stormwater outlets shall also be stabilized prior to any upstream land disturbing activities.

C. Stabilization of Waterways and Outlets: 1. All onsite stormwater conveyance channels used by CONTRACTOR for

temporary erosion control purposes shall be designed and constructed with adequate capacity and protection to prevent erosion during storm and runoff events.

2. Stabilization adequate to prevent erosion shall also be provided at the outlets of all pipes and channels.

D. Storm Sewer Inlet Protection: All storm sewer inlets which are made operable during

construction or which drain stormwater runoff from a construction site shall be protected from sediment deposition by the use of filters.

E. Construction Access Routes:

1. Wherever construction vehicles enter or leave a construction site, a Stabilized

Construction Entrance is required.

2. Where sediment is transported onto a public road surface, the roads shall be cleaned thoroughly at the end of each day.

3. Sediment shall be removed from roads by shoveling or sweeping and be

transported to a sediment-controlled disposal area.

4. Street washing shall be allowed only after sediment is removed in this manner.


31 25 00-10

3.13 DISPOSITION OF TEMPORARY MEASURES

A. All temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be disposed of within thirty (30) days after final site stabilization is achieved or after the temporary measures are no longer needed as determined by OWNER.

B. Trapped sediment and other disturbed soil areas resulting from the disposition of

temporary measures shall be permanently stabilized to prevent further erosion. C. Substantial Completion of Erosion Control Measures:

1. At the time specified in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, and subject to compliance with specified materials and installation requirements, CONTRACTOR shall receive a Substantial Completion Certificate for temporary erosion control measures.

2. Maintenance of Erosion Control Measures after Substantial Completion:

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining temporary erosion control measures as specified in the DRAWINGS and CONTRACT DOCUMENTS until such time as WORK has been accepted by OWNER.

D. Final Completion and Acceptance of Erosion Control Measures:

1. After ENGINEER and OWNER have determined that the drainage area has stabilized, CONTRACTOR shall remove all remaining temporary erosion control measures.

2. Any damage to the site shall be repaired to the satisfaction of ENGINEER and

at no cost to OWNER.


CHEATHAM COUNTY HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 32 12 16

32 12 16 - 1


This work shall consist of furnishing all labor, material, and equipment required to construct a bituminous concrete pavement on a prepared surface or subgrade in accordance with these Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and typical cross sections shown on the Plans.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS None 1.3 SUBMITTAL

A. Provide copies of material certificates signed by material producer and Contractor certifying each material item complies with or exceeds the specifications.

B. Job Mix Formula:

a. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, at least 14 working days prior to the

scheduled start of production of any asphaltic paving mixture, the Job Mix Formula and Laboratory Design prepared in accordance with the Marshall Mix Design Method (AASHTO T 245). The Job Mix Formula shall include 50% recycled asphalt by weight. In addition, the Contractor shall submit an asphalt barge certification with temperature-viscosity curve for each mixture to the Engineer for approval.

The following information shall be furnished:

1. The source and description of all materials to be used in the mix. 2. The gradations and approximate proportions of the raw materials as

intended to be combined in the paving mixture.

3. A single percentage of the combined mineral aggregate passing each specified sieve. The combined aggregate gradation shall be plotted on a gradation chart with sieve sizes raised to the 0.45 power to assure a well graded mix.

4. The Loss on Ignition (LOI) results on the combined aggregate of the

Grading “D” mix used as a wearing course.

5. The Bulk Specific Gravity, Apparent Specific Gravity and absorption on the combined mineral aggregate in the paving mixture (AASHTO T 84 AND T 85).

6. A single percentage of asphalt by weight of total mix intended to be

incorporated in the completed mixture.

7. The maximum specific gravity of the asphalt mixture (AASHTO T 209).

8. A single temperature at which the mixture is intended to be discharged from the plant.


32 12 16 - 2

9. Evidence that the completed mixture will conform to all specified physical requirements set forth in this specification.

10. The tensile strength ratio (TSR) indicating the stripping and moisture

susceptibility characteristics of the mix.

The Laboratory Design must be prepared and signed by a Certified Laboratory Technician.

C. The approved job mix formula shall remain in effect until a change is authorized

by the Engineer. The Contractor, at any time after construction has started, may request that the job mix formula be revised, providing evidence is shown that the revision is necessary and the revised aggregate gradation will meet all applicable gradation requirements.

D. The submitted job mix formula shall include test data showing that the material

as produced will meet the requirements specified in this specification when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 245. The bulk specific gravity of the laboratory compacted bituminous mixture (Marshall Specimen) shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO T 166.

E. The percent voids in the total mix shall be based on the maximum specific gravity

of the bituminous mixture (Rice Gravity) as determined by AASHTO T 209. The voids in the mineral aggregate (VMA) shall be calculated using the effective specific gravity of the aggregates.

1.4 SAMPLING AND TESTING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of construction and materials incorporated therein.

B. The Contractor shall perform all necessary sampling and testing for acceptance

purposes, in addition to performing quality control tests procedures through final project acceptance.

C. The Contractor shall provide a nuclear gauge and a qualified operator for determining

densities of compacted mixes. The Contractor shall furnish a core drill and take samples from test strips to calibrate the nuclear gauge. All densities will be reported using the corrected nuclear gauge readings.

D. The Engineer reserves the right to acquire samples of asphalt cement concrete mixes to

check the Contractor’s compliance with these specifications. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MINERAL AGGREGATE BASE

A. Aggregates for Mineral Aggregate Base shall be hard durable particles or fragments of stone, slag, gravel, or chert, together with such material as manufactured sand or other fine material naturally contained, or added thereto as needed to conform to this specification.


32 12 16 - 3

B. Individual materials shall meet the requirements specified below:

1. Crushed stone shall be free of silt and clay. The coarse aggregate portion (retained on the No. 4 sieve) of the stone shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 50, and when subjected to five alternations of the sodium sulfate soundness test, the weighted percentage of loss shall not exceed 15.

2. Crushed slag shall be free of silt and clay and shall meet the quality requirements

of crushed stone. It shall be reasonably uniform in density and shall have a dry-rodded weight of at least seventy (70) pounds per cubic foot.

3. Gravel and chert shall be screened and all oversize material may be crushed and

fed uniformly back over the screen. The coarse aggregate portion shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 50, and when subjected to five alternations of the sodium sulfate soundness test, the weighted percentage of the loss shall not exceed 15. The portion of the material passing the No. 40 sieve shall be non-plastic, or shall have a liquid limit of not more than thirty and a plasticity index of not more than eight (8).

C. If fine aggregate, coarse aggregate or binder, in addition to that present in the base

material, is necessary in order to meet the gradation or density requirements or for satisfactory bonding of the material, it shall be uniformly blended with the base course material at the mixing plant by a mechanical feeder to maintain a uniform flow on the belt to the mixer. Blending of materials on the stockpiles or in the pits by bulldozer, clamshell, dragline or similar equipment will not be permitted.

D. The composite gradation of the Mineral Aggregate Base shall be as follows:

Sieve Size % Passing by Weight

2-1/2” 2”

1-1/2” 100 1” 85-100

3/4” 60-95 3/8” 50-80

No. 4 40-65 No. 16 20-40 No. 100 9-18

2.2 PRIME COAT

A. Bituminous Material 1. Cut-Back Asphalt, Grade RC-70 or RC-250, shall conform to the requirements of

AASHTO M 81 or M 82, for the type and grade specified. 2. Emulsified Asphalts, Grade AE-P or CAE-P.

a. Anionic Emulsified Asphalts shall conform to all the requirements of AASHTO M 140, for the type and grade specified.

b. Cationic Emulsified Asphalts shall conform to the requirements of

AASHTO M 208, for the type and grade specified.


32 12 16 - 4

3 Temperature ranges shall be as follows:

Grade Temperature (°F) AE-P and CAE-P 60-140

RC-70 80-150 RC-250 100-175

B. Aggregate, Size 7, 8 or 78. Aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed gravel meeting the quality requirements of ASTM D 692.

2.3 TACK COAT

A. Bituminous Material 1. Cut-Back Asphalt, Grade RC-70 or RC-250, shall conform to the requirements of

AASHTO M 81 or M 82, for the type and grade specified. 2. Emulsified Asphalts, SS-1, SS-1H, CSS-1 or CSS-1H.

a. Anionic Emulsified Asphalts shall conform to all the requirements of AASHTO M 140, for the type and grade specified.

b. Cationic Emulsified Asphalts shall conform to the requirements of

AASHTO M 208, for the type and grade specified.

3. Temperature ranges shall be as follows:

Grade Temperature (°F) RC-70 80-150 RC-250 100-175

SS-1, SS-1H and CSS-1H

60-140


32 12 16 - 5

2.4 ASPHALT CEMENT

Asphalt cements shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO MP-1 for PG64-22. When asphalt cement PG70-22 or PG76-22 is specified, the asphalt cement shall conform to AASHTO MP-1. Modification of the asphalt shall be accomplished by properly blending styrene butadiene (SB), styrene butadiene styrene (SBS) or styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) to PG64-22 base asphalt. A. In addition to the above requirements, the PG70-22 and PG76-22 shall meet the

following:

PG70-22 PG76-22 Ring & Ball Softening Point (°F), Minimum 128 135 Elastic Recovery by means of Ductilometer, % minimum 40 58

Screen Test No Lumps Retained

B. Test Procedures

1. Elastic Recovery by means of a Ductilometer

Condition the ductilometer and samples to be tested at the temperature prescribed for that material. Prepare the brass plate, mold, and briquette specimen in accordance with ASTM D113, “Ductility of Bituminous Materials”. Keep the specimen at the specified test temperature for 85 to 90 minutes. Immediately after conditioning, place the specimen in the ductilometer and proceed to elongate the sample to 20 centimeters. The rate of pull shall be 5 cm/min. unless otherwise stated. After the 20 centimeter elongation has been reached, stop the ductilometer and hold the sample in its elongated position for 5 minutes. At this time, clip the sample approximately in half by means of scissors or other suitable cutting devices. Let the sample remain in the ductilometer in an undisturbed condition for one hour. At the end of this time period, retract the half sample specimen until the two broken ends touch. At this point, note the elongation in centimeters. Calculate the percent recovery by the following formula:

% Recovery = ((20-X)/20) X 100 X = observed elongation after rejoining the sample, cm

2. Screen Test

The procedure shall be to pour a 1000 gram sample heated to 275°F through a No. 10 sieve. There shall be no lumps or particles retained on the sieve.

3. Viscometer Test

In addition to the above, a rotational viscometer, meeting ASTM D4402 requirements with a thermostatically controlled cell will be required at all hot mix asphalt plants using modified liquid asphalt products. A minimum of one test per day shall be run on samples taken from the contractor’s storage tank or from a sampling port after the material is in-line blended if the grade of the material is being changed as the hot-mix plant. Viscosity values shall be in the range from 650-3000 cP for PG70-22, and, 1000 to 3000 cP for PG76-22 at 275°F.


32 12 16 - 6

C. Materials Certification

A certification shall be furnished to the Engineer stating that the asphalt cement furnished meets Project Specifications.

D. If a SBR modifier is used, the SBR shall be pre-blended with the asphalt cement or

added by means of an “in-line” motionless mixer. The “in-line” mixer shall be a Komax Model No. 30715A, Ross LPD Motionless Mixer, Koch Static Mixer or other approved equal. The “in-line” motionless mixing unit shall provide a homogeneity value of 0.15 or less. The mixing unit shall be equipped with a port(s) for obtaining representative samples of the blended material in accordance with AASHTO T40. The mixer shall be oil jacketed. The mixer shall have a minimum diameter of ½ inch larger that the asphalt supply line onto which it is installed.

2.5 PLANT MIX BASE (HOT MIX)

A. Aggregate for plant mix base shall consist of coarse aggregate fine aggregate and mineral filler when required.

B. Coarse Aggregate (Aggregate Retained on the No. 4 Sieve)

1. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone, crushed granite, crushed gravel,

crushed slag or combination of these materials. 2. Coarse aggregate shall conform to the quality requirements of ASTM D 692

except that the sodium sulfate soundness loss on limestone shall not exceed nine (9) percent, and the aggregate shall contain no more than five (5) percent soft or nondurable particles.

3. Crushed gravel shall consist of siliceous particles processed from washed

material. At least seventy (70) percent by count of the gravel retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have a minimum of two fractured faces, one of which must be fractured for the approximate average diameter or thickness of the particle.

4. Virgin coarse aggregate for Grading A and A-S mixes shall be crushed stone,

crushed slag, or a combination thereof. 5. After drying in the plant, the aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have a

loss of not more than one (1) percent by weight when washed over a No. 8 sieve.

C. Fine Aggregate (Aggregate Passing the No. 4 Sieve)

1. Fine aggregate shall consist of limestone fines, natural sand, sand manufactured from stone, gravel, or slag, or combinations thereof. It shall consist of hard, tough grains free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances, and when subjected to five cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test, it shall have a weighted loss of no more than twelve (12) percent.

2. In natural sand and manufactured sand, the percentage of material finer than No.

200 sieve shall not exceed five (5) percent. 3. Virgin fine aggregate used in Grading A and A-S mixes shall consist of crushed

stone or crushed slag only and shall be stored separately from the coarse aggregate.


32 12 16 - 7

4. The amount of deleterious substances in natural sand shall not exceed the

following limits:

1. Clay Lumps ..................................... 0.5% 2. Coal & Lignite .................................. 0.5% 3. Other Deleterious Substances ..................................... 3.0%

D. The Combined Grading.

1. The combined gradings may be achieved by the appropriate combination of

coarse aggregate with the appropriate fine aggregate. 2. The Contractor shall establish a gradation for each aggregate used in the mix.

The aggregate gradation tolerance on each sieve is listed below.

3/8” sieve and larger ±10% No. 4 sieve ±7% No. 8 sieve ±5% No. 30 sieve ±4% No. 200 sieve (CA) ±2% No. 200 sieve (FA) ±4%

3. The gradation of the coarse and fine fractions of aggregate shall be such that

when combined in proper proportion the resultant mixture will meet one of the following gradings, as specified:


Grading A Grading A-S

Grading B-M

Grading B-M2

Grading CW

2-1/2” 2” 100 100

1-1/2” 81-100 75-100 100 1-1/4” 100

1” 85-100 3/4” 50-71 55-80 81-93 100 3/8” 35-50 59-79 57-73 75-55

No. 4 24-36 7-11 42-61 40-56 No. 8 13-27 29-47 28-43 43-67

No. 30 7-17 13-27 13-25 23-47 No. 50 7-20 9-19 No. 100 0-10 0-6 4-10 6-10 4-10 No. 200 0-4.5 0-4.5 0-6.5 2.5-6.5 2.5-6.5


32 12 16 - 8

E. The specified mineral aggregate and asphalt cement shall be combined is such

proportions as to produce mixtures within the following design composition limits.

Proportions of Total mixture, % by Weight

Grading Combined

Mineral Aggregate

Asphalt Cement

“A-S” 96.3-97.7 2.3-3.7 “A” 95.8-96.7 3.3-4.2

“B-M” 93.8-95.8 4.2-6.2 “B-M2” 93.8-95.8 4.2-6.2 “CW” 93.8-95.8 4.2-6.2

F. In addition, the combination of materials shall be such that when combined with the required amount of bitumen, the resultant mixture shall have:

Mix Min. Stability Lbf *

Void Content *

Min. % VMA *

Dust-Asphalt Ratio **

“B-M” 2000 3-5.5 13.5 0.6-1.5 “B-M2” 2000 3.5-5.5 13.5 0.6-1.2 “CW” 1500 3-5 13.0 0.6-1.5

* Tested in accordance with AASHTO T 245 with 75 blows with the hammer on each end of the test specimen, using a Marshall Mechanical Compactor. ** The dust to asphalt ratio is the percent of the total aggregate sample that passes the 200 mesh sieve as determined by AASHTO T 11 divided by the percent asphalt in the total mix.

2.6 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACE (HOT MIX)

A. Aggregate for asphaltic concrete surface courses shall consist of a combination of coarse and fine aggregate and mineral filler when required or specified. A minimum of three sizes of aggregates shall be required for all mix designs.

B. Coarse Aggregate (Aggregate Retained on the No. 4 Sieve)

1. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed granite,

crushed gravel, crushed quartzite, crushed gneiss, other approved non-skid aggregates or combination of these materials.

2. Coarse aggregate shall conform to the quality requirements of ASTM D 692 with

the following exceptions and additions.

a. Crushed limestone shall have a sodium sulfate soundness loss not exceeding nine (9) percent.

b. Material retained on the No. 4 sieve shall contain a maximum of 20%

elongated pieces (length greater than five times the average thickness).


32 12 16 - 9

c. Crushed gravel shall consist of siliceous particles processed from washed material, of which at least 70% by count, of the material retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have a minimum of two fractured faces, one of which must be fractured for the approximate average diameter or thickness of the particle. The addition of pea gravel or uncrushed particles will not be permitted. The absorption of the crushed gravel retained on the No. 4 sieve shall not exceed five (5) percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 85.

d. Crushed slag coarse aggregate shall contain no more than 20%, by

weight, of glassy particles.

e. After drying in the plant, the aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have a loss of not more than 1% by weight when washed over a No. 8 sieve in accordance with the coating test.

C. Fine Aggregate (Aggregate Passing the No. 4 Sieve)

1. Fine aggregate shall consist of, natural sand, fines prepared from stone, slag,

gravel, granite, quartzite, gneiss, other approved non-skid aggregates, or combinations thereof. It shall consist of hard, tough grains free from injurious amounts of clay, loam or other deleterious substances, and when subjected to five cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test, it shall have a weighted loss of no more than twelve (12) percent. Manufactured sand shall have no more than five (5) percent passing the No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 11.

2. Natural sand shall be washed. The natural sand shall be so graded that not

more than five (5) percent will be retained on the No. 4 sieve. 3. Fine aggregate consisting of natural sand will be tested in accordance with

AASHTO T 11 and the amount of material finer than a No. 200 sieve shall not exceed four (4) percent by weight.

4. The amount of deleterious substances in natural sand shall not exceed the

following limits:

1. Clay Lumps ..................................... 0.5% 2. Coal & Lignite .................................. 0.5% 3. Other Deleterious Substances ..................................... 3.0%

5. Agricultural limestone, when used as a portion of the fine aggregate, shall be

manufactured from sound, durable stone and shall be crushed so that at least 85% will pass the No. 8 sieve and at least 50% will pass the No. 30 sieve.

D. The Combined Grading.

1. The several aggregate fractions shall be sized, graded, and combined in such

proportions that the resulting composite blend will meet one of the following grading requirements, as specified.


32 12 16 - 10

2. The Contractor shall establish a single value for each sieve size required in the mix for each aggregate stockpile. The aggregate gradation tolerance on each sieve is listed below.

3/8” sieve and larger ±10% No. 4 sieve ±7% No. 8 sieve ±5% No. 30 sieve ±4% No. 200 sieve (CA) ±2% No. 200 sieve (FA) ±4%

3. When gradings “D” or “E” are used for the surfacing of shoulders or for other non-

traffic lane construction, the design may be modified as approved by the Engineer.


Grading D Grading E ¾” 5/8” 100 100 ½” 95-100 95-100 3/8” 80-93 80-93

No. 4 54-76 54-76 No. 8 35-57 35-57 No. 30 17-29 17-29 No. 50 10-18 10-18

No. 100 3-10 3-11 No. 200 0-6.5 0-8

E. Grading “D”.

a. The course aggregate shall consist of crushed gravel, crushed granite, crushed

slag, crushed quartzite or crushed gneiss. Other crushed aggregate may be used provided it has the following chemical , physical, and performance characteristics for Type I, Type II or Type III aggregate:

1. Type I

Silica Dioxide content – minimum of 40% Calcium carbonate content – maximum of 32% The coarse aggregate shall contain a minimum of 50% by weight of the original sample of acid insoluble residues that are coarser than the No. 100 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3042. The British Pendulum number (BPN) shall not be less than 30 when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 278 after nine hours of accelerated polishing of the aggregate using the British Wheel in accordance with AASHTO T 279.


32 12 16 - 11

2. Type II

Silica Dioxide content – minimum of 30% The coarse aggregate shall contain a minimum of 35% by weight of the original sample of acid insoluble residues that are coarser than the No. 100 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3042. The British Pendulum number (BPN) shall not be less than 30 when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 278 after nine hours of accelerated polishing of the aggregate using the British Wheel in accordance with AASHTO T 279. In addition to the above requirements, the aggregate shall have met the pre-approval of the Tennessee Department of Transportation, Division of Materials and Tests.

3. Type III (for roads with current ADT of 35,000 or less) The coarse aggregate shall contain a minimum of 25% by weight of the original sample of acid insoluble residues that are coarser than the No. 100 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3042. The British Pendulum number (BPN) shall not be less than 25 when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 278 after nine hours of accelerated polishing of the aggregate using the British Wheel in accordance with AASHTO T 279. In addition to the above requirements, the aggregate shall have met the pre-approval of the Tennessee Department of Transportation, Division of Materials and Tests.

b. The fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand or sand manufactured from gravel, slag, or from crushed stone aggregate meeting the physical and chemical requirements listed above. The use of carbonate rocks such as limestone and dolomite or other aggregates tending to polish under traffic will not be permitted in the coarse aggregate and will be permitted only to the extent specified herein in the fine aggregate.

F. Grading E.

1. When grading “E” is to be used as a surface for traffic lanes, the mineral aggregate shall be composed of not less than 50%, nor more than 80% crushed limestone, and not more than 50% or not less than 20% natural sand, slag sand, sand manufactured from gravel or other approved non-skid aggregates, or any combination of these materials, except as herein specified.

2. The sand percentage on the job mix formula shall be in the range of 20-50

percent. However, if needed to meet or improve the specified design criteria, the limestone and sand percentage may be altered by the numerical value of 5 percent from the percentage shown by the Contractor on the original job mix formula.


32 12 16 - 12

3. When grading “E” is used for surfacing of shoulders or other non-traffic lane construction, the mineral aggregate may be composed entirely of limestone including Size No. 10 (screenings) and manufactured sand, but in no case shall the mineral aggregate for this construction consist of less than 50% limestone.

G. The specified mineral aggregate and asphalt cement shall be combined in such

proportions as to produce mixtures within the following master composition limits.

Proportions of Total mixture, % by Weight

Grading Combined

Mineral Aggregate

Asphalt Cement

“D” 93.0-94.7 5.3-7.0 “E” 90.3-92.7 7.3-9.7

• If grading “E” is used as a roadway surface mix, the above proportions shall be changed to 93.0-95.5 and 4.5-7.0 for mineral aggregate and asphalt cement respectively.

H. In addition to the other requirements of these specifications the composition of the

mineral aggregate shall be such that when combined with the required amount of bitumen the resultant mixture shall have:

Mix Min. Stability Lbf *

Void Content *

Flow (0.01 inch)

Min. % VMA *

Dust-Asphalt Ratio **

“D” 2000 3-5.5 8-16 14 0.6-1.2 “E” 2000 3-5.5 8-16 14 -

* Tested in accordance with AASHTO T 245 with 75 blows with the hammer on each end of the test specimen, using a Marshall Mechanical Compactor. ** The dust to asphalt ratio is the percent of the total aggregate sample that passes the 200 mesh sieve as determined by AASHTO T 11 divided by the percent asphalt in the total mix.

PART 3 – EQUIPMENT 3.1 MINERAL AGGREGATE BASE

A. Stationary Mixing Plant. The mixing unit shall be an approved twin-shaft pugmill capable of producing a constant, uniform mixture. The mixer shall be equipped with a truck-loading hopper of sufficient size with a gate which will prevent segregation of the material when dumped into the truck. A spray bar capable of assuring an even wetting of the aggregate shall be mounted at the entrance of or above the pugmill. The flow of water through the spray bar shall be controlled by a meter, valve or other approved type of regulating device to maintain uniform moisture content in the mixer. A separate quick operating on-and-off device shall be required. The mixing plant shall be equipped with adjustable mechanical feeders for each size material capable of regulating a constant, uniform flow of material.

B. Equipment shall include one or more rollers of a type and sufficient weight to obtain the

required density and seal the surface of the base course.


32 12 16 - 13

3.2 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVING

A. Bituminous Mixing Plant Sufficient storage space shall be provided for each size aggregate. The different sizes shall be kept separated until they have been delivered to the cold elevator or belt feeding the dryer. The storage yard shall be maintained net and orderly and the separate stockpiles shall be readily accessible for sampling.

B. Equipment for preparation of bituminous material.

Tanks for the storage of bituminous material shall be equipped to heat and hold the material at the required temperatures. The circulating system for the bituminous material shall be designed to assure proper and continuous circulation during the operating period.

C. Feeders for Dryer.

1. Separate feeders shall be provided for each size aggregate, and each size shall be fed onto the belt going to the dryer by mechanical feeders with separate adjustable gates. The feeders shall be capable of delivering the separate aggregates onto the belt in proper proportions.

2. Adequate means shall be provided to assure a constant and uniform flow of

material from each bin. Bins containing fine aggregate shall be equipped with vibrators if necessary.

3. The Contractor will not be permitted to blend or mix different aggregates or

different sizes of the same aggregates with clam shells, bulldozers, high lifts or similar equipment.

4. The aggregate shall be fed uniformly into the dryer so that a uniform production

and uniform temperature may be obtained.

D. Dryer. The plant shall include a dryer or dryers which agitate the aggregate continuously during the heating and drying process; it shall be capable of heating and drying all aggregates to the temperature required, and shall be capable of supplying the mixing unit continuously at its operating capacity. Dryers shall be constructed and operated so that aggregates will not be contaminated with unburned fuel.

E. Screens.

1. Plant screens, capable of screening all aggregates to the specified sizes and proportions and having normal capacities in excess of full capacity of the mixer, shall be provided.

2. A consistent carry-over, but not to exceed 20%, will be allowed on any screen. If

any bin contains more than 20% of material which is undersized for that bin, the bin shall be emptied and correction of the cause for such condition shall be made.

3. Approved scalping screens shall be required on all dryer-drum mixing plants, but

additional screens will not be required.

F. Bins. The plant shall include storage bins of sufficient capacity to supply the mixer when it is operating at full capacity. Bins shall be arranged to assure separate and adequate storage of appropriate fractions of the mineral aggregates. Each bin shall be provided


32 12 16 - 14

with overflow pipes of such size and at such location as to prevent backing up of material into other compartments or bins. Each compartment shall be provided with an outlet gate constructed so that when closed there shall be no leakage. The gates shall be cut off quickly and completely. The bins shall be constructed to provide adequate and convenient approved facilities for obtaining representative samples of aggregate from the full flow of each compartment. These bins shall no be required in an approved Dryer-Drum Mixing Plant. When mineral filler is used, separate dry storage shall be provided and the plant shall be equipped to uniformly and accurately feed the filler into the mixer.

G. Bituminous control unit.

Satisfactory means, either by weighing or metering, shall be provided to obtain the proper amount of bituminous material in the mix within the tolerance specified. Means shall be provided for checking the quantity of rate of flow of bituminous material into the mixer.

H. Thermometric equipment.

1. An armored thermometer of adequate range in temperature reading shall be fixed in the bituminous feedline at a suitable location near the charging valve at the mixer unit.

2. An approved thermometric instrument shall be placed at the discharge chute of

the dryer as to register automatically or indicate the temperature of the heated aggregates.

3. The plant shall be equipped with an approved automatic temperature recording

and regulating apparatus for control of the temperature of the aggregates.

I. Dust Collector. The plant shall be equipped with a dust collector constructed to uniformly waste or return to the dried aggregate all or any part of the material collected.

J. Surge and Storage Systems.

1. Surge or Storage systems may be used at the option of the Contractor. 2. The surge and storage system shall be of such design that there is no

appreciable difference between material being discharged from the silo and material being discharged directly from the pugmill.

3. The surge and storage silos must be equipped with low and high mix level

indicators. The low level indicator shall be placed at a location on the silo that has been predetermined to prevent segregation of the mix.

4. The conveyor system used with the surge or storage silos shall be arranged in

such a manner that samples of the mix or dry material may be conveniently taken from the pugmill.

5. Storage silos shall be closed, insulated and heated in such a manner that

localized heating does not occur. The storage bin shall be capable of being sealed to prevent oxidation of the mixture. Surge silos shall be equipped with a rain cover capable of preventing water from entering the mix in the silo.

6. Any bituminous mix which is damaged in any way by the use of a surge or

storage system will be rejected.


32 12 16 - 15

K. Requirement for Batching Plants.

1. Plant Scales. Dial scales shall be provided for weighing of all aggregates and mineral filler, in the suspended weight box. Dial scales shall be of a standard make and of sufficient size that the numerals on the dial can be read at a distance of 25 feet. The dials shall be of the compounding type having a full complement of index pointers. The value of the graduation of scales used in weighing amounts of aggregates less than 5,000 pounds shall not be greater than five pounds; amounts of aggregates from 5,000 to 10,000 pounds shall not be greater than 10 pounds; amounts of aggregates in excess of 10,000 pounds shall not be greater than 0.1% of the capacity of the scales. All dial scales shall be so located that they will be in plain view of the operator at all times. When bituminous material is measured by weight, the asphalt weigh bucket shall be equipped with a separate dial scale with a minimum graduation not greater than two pounds. All dial scales shall be accurate within a tolerance of 0.5%. Each installation of scales shall be provided with 10 standard 50-pound weights meeting the requirements of the U.S. Bureau of Standards for calibrating and testing weighing equipment.

2. Weigh box or hopper.

The equipment shall include a means for accurately weighing each size of aggregate and mineral filler in a weigh box or hopper suspended on scales. The weigh box or hopper shall be of ample size to hold a full batch without hand raking or running over. The gate shall close tightly so that no material is allowed to leak into the mixer while a batch is being weighed.

3. Bituminous control.

The bituminous material bucket shall be a non-tilting type. The length of the discharge opening or spray bar shall be not less than three-fourths the length of the mixer and it shall discharge directly into the mixture; the bituminous material bucket, its discharge valve or valves, and spray bar shall be adequately heated. Steam jackets, if used, shall be efficiently drainable and all connections shall be so constructed that they will not interfere with the efficient operation of the bituminous scales. The capacity of the bituminous material bucket shall be at least 15% in excess of the weight of bituminous material required in any batch. The plant shall have an adequately heated quick-acting, non-drip, charging valve located directly over the bituminous material bucket. When the bituminous material is metered, the indicator dial shall have a capacity of at least 15% in excess of the quantity of bituminous material used in a batch. The meter indicator dial shall have a scale with divisions measuring in gallons equivalent to a weight sensitivity of 0.04% of the total batch weight. The meter shall be accurate within a tolerance of 0.5%. The controls shall be so constructed that they may be locked at any dial setting and will automatically reset to that reading after the addition of bituminous material to each batch. The dial shall be in full view of the mixer operator. The flow of bituminous material shall be automatically controlled so that it will begin when the dry-mixing period is over. All of the bituminous material required for one batch shall be discharged in not more than 15 seconds after the flow has started. The size and spacing of the spray bar openings shall provide a uniform application of bituminous material the fill length of the mixer. The section of the bituminous line between the charging valve and the spray bar shall be provided with a valve, and the spray bar shall be provided with a valve and outlet for checking the meter when a metering device is substituted for a bituminous material bucket.


32 12 16 - 16

4. Mixer. The batch mixer shall be an approved twin pugmill type, steam or hot oil jacketed, and shall be capable of producing a uniform mixture within the job mix tolerances. The mixer shall be so constructed as to prevent leakage of its contents. It shall be equipped with a sufficient number of paddles or blades set in the “run around” order and operated at such speed as to produce a properly and uniformly mixed batch. The depth of the material in the pugmill shall not be above the tips of the paddles. If not enclosed, the mixer box shall be equipped with a dust hood to prevent loss of dust.

5. Control of mixing time.

The mixer shall be equipped with an accurate time lock to control the operations of a complete mixing cycle. It shall lock the weigh box gate after the charging of the mixer until the closing of the mixer gate at the completion of the cycle. It shall lock the bituminous material bucket throughout the dry-mixing period and shall lock the mixer gate throughout the dry and wet-mixing periods. The control of timing shall be flexible and capable of being set at intervals of five (5) seconds or less throughout a total cycle of up to three (3) minutes. A mechanical batch counter shall be installed as a part of the timing device and shall be so designed as to register only batches that have been mixed for the full time interval.

6. Operator’s Platform Observation House.

The plant shall be equipped with a scale observer’s house. The house shall be mounted on or near the weigh platform and shall be mounted on or near the weigh platform and shall be so situated that the aggregate and asphalt scales, asphalt thermometer, and pyrometer are plainly visible from within the house.

L. Requirements for Continuous Mixing Plants

1. Aggregate proportioning.

The plant shall have a feeder mounted under each compartment bin. Each compartment bin shall have an accurately controlled individual gate to form an orifice for measuring volumetrically the material drawn from each compartment. Bins shall be equipped with adequate tell-tale devices to indicate the position of the aggregates in the bins at the lower quarter points. The feeding orifice shall be rectangular with one dimension adjustable by positive mechanical means provided with a lock. Indicators shall be provided for each gate to show the respective gate opening in inches. Mineral filler shall be fed into the mixer continuously and uniformly in the proportion set out in the formula for the job mix.

2. Weight calibration of aggregate feed.

The plant shall be equipped with an approved revolution counter in satisfactory working condition. The plant shall include a means for calibration of gate openings by weighing test samples. Provision shall be made so that materials fed out of individual orifices may be bypassed to individual test boxes. The plants shall be equipped to handle conveniently individual test samples weighing not less than 200 pounds. Accurate scales shall be provided by the Contractor to weigh such test samples.


32 12 16 - 17

3. Synchronization of aggregate feed and bituminous material feed. Satisfactory means shall be provided to afford positive interlocking control between the flow of aggregate from the bins and the flow of bituminous material from the meter or other proportioning device. This control shall be accomplished by mechanical means or by any other positive method.

4. Mixer.

The plant shall include a continuous mixer of an approved twin pugmill type, adequately heated and capable of producing a uniform mixture within the job mix tolerances. The paddles shall be adjustable for angular position on the shafts and reversible to retard the flow of mix. The mixer shall have a manufacturer’s plate giving the net volumetric contents of the mixer at the several heights inscribed on a permanent gauge. Charts shall be provided showing the rate of feed of aggregate per minute for the aggregate being used. Determination of mixing time shall be by the weight method.

5. Surge hopper.

The mixer shall be equipped with a discharge hopper with dump gates that will permit rapid and complete discharge of the mixture and of such size and design that no segregation of the mixture occurs.

6. Platform truck scales.

Platform truck scales shall be a standard brand of scales with a sufficient rated capacity to weight the maximum gross load to which they will be subjected. In no instance shall truck scales by used to measure weights in excess of the manufacturer’s rated capacity. The manufacturer’s rated capacity shall be clearly posted on the scale manufacturer’s plate and in the shelter provided for the weighman. The recording mechanism of the scale shall be housed in a suitable shelter. The scale shall be accurate within a tolerance of 0.5% and the value of the minimum graduation shall not be greater the 100 pounds.

M. Requirements for Dryer-Drum Mixing Plants.

1. Control of Aggregate. The aggregates shall be stockpiled and handled so as to prevent any significant amount of segregation, contamination or degradation. Each aggregate shall have a separate feeder that has a positive feed, which can be easily and accurately calibrated. The plant shall have a flow indicator and an audible warning device on each feeder to assure a constant and uniform flow of aggregate from each bin onto the belt. Mineral filler, if required, shall be fed into the mixer continuously and uniformly in the proportion set out in the formula for the job mix.

2. Synchronization of Aggregate Feed and Bituminous Material Feed.

Satisfactory means shall be provided to afford a positive interlocking control between cold aggregate feed and asphalt. The control setting for the asphalt flow will be based on the dry weight of the aggregate. There must be an acceptable method provided for the proportioning asphalt flow as variations in aggregate flow take place. A metering system will be provided to measure the flow of asphalt into the drum and an approved method of checking and calibrating the metering system shall be located in the control house. An


32 12 16 - 18

automatic interlock system will be provided that will shut off the asphalt flow and the burner when the aggregate flow ceases.

3. Temperature Control.

Dryer-Drum Mixing Plants shall be equipped with a recording pyrometer or other approved thermometric instrument sensitive to a rate of temperature change of not less the 10 degrees per minute. The system shall be equipped with automatic burner controls and shall provide for temperature sensing of the bituminous mixture at discharge from the drum.

4. Scales and Metering Systems

The Contractor shall be required to furnish weights and charts for checking the accuracy of the belt scales and the bituminous metering system. The scales and meters shall have accuracy within a tolerance of 0.5%. The belt scale, which weighs the combined aggregate, shall be in accordance with the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook 44.

5. Sampling Devices.

There shall be an approved method provided for sampling individual cold feeds and sequential sampling of aggregate and asphalt under full-scale production. The sampling device and procedures used shall be such that the normal operation with not be interrupted.

6. Platform Scales.

The Contractor shall make certified platform scales available for checking the asphalt metering system and for weighing or checking loads of asphalt mix.

7. Silos or Surge Bins

Surge or storage silos shall meet the requirements of subsection 3.2(J).

8. Aggregate Feed. Aggregate shall be proportioned by feeding each size aggregate from a separate cold bin. The belt that delivers the aggregate shall have a load cell capable of registering the amount of flow from each individual bin on a readout in the control office; or the aggregate shall be proportioned by a linear system based on measured RPM or each feeder belt at a constant gate opening to feed aggregate at a predetermined rate that is set in the control office and which has a readout in the control office. The rate of feed as determined from the bin settings shall agree with the load cell on the collection belt feeding the dryer within a tolerance of ±10%. In the event that the predetermined tolerance is exceeded, an alarm shall sound, and if corrections are not made with sixty (60) seconds, the plant shall automatically shut down. The aggregate feed system shall employ computer-controlled adjustments to automatically produce mix of the correct proportions over the entire range of production rates of the plant.

9. Electronic Data Retention.

The computer system and automatic weighing system shall include means to retain all electronic data during electrical power failures.

N. Hauling Equipment

Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight, clean, smooth metal beds which have been thinly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, hydrated-lime solution or other approved material to prevent the mixture from adhering to the beds. Each truck shall be covered immediately after loading at the plant with a cover of canvas


32 12 16 - 19

or other suitable material. The covers shall be of sufficient size to protect the mixture from the weather. The cover shall lap down along the sides and rear of the truck bed a minimum of six (6) inches and be secured by tie downs at a maximum of five (5) foot spacing along the sides and rear of the truck bed. When necessary, so that the mixture will be delivered on the road at the specified temperature, truck beds shall be insulated and covers shall be securely fastened.

O. Pressure Distributor.

The distributor shall be so designed, equipped, maintained and operated that bituminous material at even heat may be applied uniformly on variable widths of surface at readily determined and controlled rates for 0.2 to 0.5 gallons per square yard. Distributor equipment shall include a tachometer, pressure gauges, accurate volume measuring devices, a calibrated tank, and a thermometer for measuring the temperature of the material in the tank. Distributors shall be equipped with a power unit for the pump, and full circulation spray bars adjustable laterally and vertically.

P. Bituminous Pavers.

1. Bituminous pavers shall be self-contained, power propelled units provided with

an activated screed, equipped to be heated, and capable of spreading and finishing courses of bituminous plant mix material in lane widths applicable to the specified typical section and thickness shown on the plans.

2. Materials for shoulders less than eight (8) feet in width and similar construction

may be placed by means of approved mechanical spreading equipment.

3. The screed or strike-off assembly shall produce effectively a finished surface of the required evenness and texture without tearing, shoving or gouging the mixture.

4. All asphalt paving machines shall be equipped with automatic grade and slope

controls. Both the grade and slope controls shall be in working order at all times, except that, in the event of mechanical failure of the automatic controls, the Contractor will be permitted to finish the day’s work using manual controls but will not be allowed to resume work the following day until both the grade and slope controls are in first class working order.

Q. Rollers.

1. Rollers shall be self-propelled and of steel-wheel, pneumatic tire, and /or

vibratory type. Rollers shall be in good condition, capable of reversing without backlash and shall be operated at speeds slow enough to avoid displacement of the bituminous mixture.

2. Rollers shall be equipped with a device for moistening and cleaning the wheels

as required.

3. The steel-wheel roller shall weigh a minimum of eight tons and may be either a three-wheel or tandem type.

4. The pneumatic tire rollers shall have a minimum contact pressure of 85 psi. The

roller shall contain two axles upon which are mounted not less than seven pneumatic-tire wheels in a manner so that the rear set of tires will not track the front set. The axles shall be mounted in a rigid frame provided with a loading platform or body suitable for ballast loading. The tires shall be uniformly inflated.


32 12 16 - 20

A combination roller (pneumatic and steel wheel combination) may be substituted for a pneumatic tire roller.

5. The use of vibratory rollers will be permitted.

PART 4 – EXECUTION 4.1 MINERAL AGGREGATE BASE

A. The Contractor shall be required to use a stationary mixing plant. The base coarse material and water shall be mixed in an approved stationary mixing plant as described in section 3.1. Water shall be added during the mixing operation in the amount necessary to provide a moisture content satisfactory to meet the grading requirements. All material fed into the plant shall travel the full length of the pugmill.

B. After mixing, material for each layer of base shall be transported to the job site while it

contains the proper moisture content, and shall be spread to the required thickness and cross section by means of an approved mechanical spreader.

C. If the required compacted depth of the base course exceeds six (6) inches, the base shall

be constructed in two or more layers of approximate equal thickness. The maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed six (6) inches.

D. Immediately following spreading, the base material shall be shaped to the required

degree of uniformity and smoothness and compacted to the required density prior to any appreciable evaporation of surface moisture.

E. For density testing purposes each completed layer will be divided into lots of

approximately 10,000 square yards. Five density tests will be performed on each lot and the results averaged.

F. The average density of each lot, unless otherwise specified, shall be not less than 95% of

maximum density determined in accordance with AASHTO T99, Method D. Further, no individual test shall be less than 92% of maximum density.

G. If the density is not obtained, the material shall be reworked or replaced in order to

comply with the density requirement.

H. The surface of each layer shall be so constructed that the aggregates become firmly keyed and a uniform texture produced and shall be maintained in that condition until final acceptance of the project. Any irregularities that develop shall be corrected by loosening the material at those places and adding or removing material as required.

I. Approved distributors shall be used to apply water uniformly over the base materials

during compaction in sufficient quantity for proper compaction.

J. The thickness of the completed base shall be in reasonably close conformity to the thickness shown on the Plans (±¼”).

4.2 PRIME COAT

A. Seasonal and temperature limitations for applying bituminous prime coat shall conform to the same requirements as those specified for the succeeding stage of construction. The prime may be applied to a surface that is slightly damp, but never to a wet surface.


32 12 16 - 21

B. Bituminous material consisting of Cut-back asphalt, conforming to ASTM D 2027 shall be applied to the width of the section to be primed by means of a pressure distributor at a uniform, continuous spread of 0.2 to 0.5 gallons per square yard. The Contractor shall protect all structures and concrete surfaces from the bituminous material during the construction.

C. If after the bituminous material has been applied, it fails to penetrate before the time that

the roadway must be used by traffic, dry cover material shall be spread at a rate of 8 to 12 pounds per square yard to prevent damage to the primed surface.

4.3 TACK COAT

A. Bituminous material consisting of emulsified asphalt conforming to ASTM D 977 shall be applied with the pressure distributor at a rate of 0.05 gallon of residual bitumen per square yard. If the bituminous material is to be placed upon a milled surface, the rate of application shall be 0.20 gallon of residual bitumen per square yard.

B. The tacked surface shall be allowed to dry until it is in a proper condition to receive the

next course. Tack coat shall be applied only so far in advance of the paving operations as is necessary to obtain this proper condition of tackiness. The Contractor shall protect the tack coat from damage until the next course is placed.

4.4 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING

A. Weather Limitations. Bituminous plant mix may be placed on properly constructed and accepted subgrade or previously applied layers provided the following conditions are met: 1. The subgrade and the surface upon which bituminous plant mix is placed shall

be free of excessive moisture. 2. The bituminous plant mix shall be placed in accordance with the temperature

limitations of the following table and only when weather conditions otherwise permit the pavement to be properly placed, compacted and finished.

Compacted Thickness

Minimum Placement Temperature Air or Surface

Unmodified Modified ≤ 1.5” 45ºF 55ºF >1.5” 40ºF 50ºF

3. Unless otherwise permitted in writing, no bituminous plant mix, with a compacted

thickness of 1.5 inches or less, shall be placed between November 30 and April 1; and further, no bituminous plant mix, with a compacted thickness greater than 1.5 inches shall be placed between December 15 and March 16. Where permission is granted to place mix during the above prohibited periods, the temperature requirements in #2 above shall be increased 10°F.

B. Condition of Existing Surface.

1. When bituminous mixes are to be placed upon an existing concrete pavement, with or without a bituminous overlay, all excess bituminous material shall be removed from joints and cracks. Sections of existing pavement that are broken and pumping under traffic shall be removed. Pavement where blowups have


32 12 16 - 22

occurred at joints or cracks shall be removed to provide a minimum opening of one (1) foot for the full width of the pavement.

2. When the bituminous mixture is to be placed upon an existing bituminous

pavement, any areas containing excess bitumen and any failures in the existing surface and base shall be removed.

3. The Contractor shall properly adjust all manholes and catch basin frames,

associated with the storm sewer system, to the finished grades of the pavement. Unless otherwise specified, such adjustments shall be made without additional compensation. The respective Utility Owner(s) shall properly adjust all utility manholes, utility valve covers and like structures, to the finished grades of the pavement, unless otherwise stipulated by the Plans.

4. Unsatisfactory subgrade material encountered when existing pavement is

removed shall be removed and replaced with approved material. Openings left by the pavement and base removal shall be filled to the full depth of the existing pavement and compacted in layers not to exceed three (3) inches in thickness.

5. Contact surface of curbing, gutters, manholes, and other structures shall be

painted with a thin, uniform coating of bituminous material prior to the mixture being placed against them.

C. The bituminous materials for hot mixes shall be heated to the required mixing

temperature, ±10° F as shown on the Job Mix formula, in a manner that will avoid local overheating and provide a continuous supply of bituminous material to the mixer at a uniform temperature at all times.

D. Unless otherwise specified, the aggregate for hot mixes shall be dried and heated so as

to produce a completed mix of uniform temperature of ±20° F of the temperature shown on the Job Mix Formula. Flames used for drying and heating shall be properly adjusted to avoid damage to the aggregate and to avoid soot on the aggregate.

On all plants requiring screens, the hot dried aggregate shall be screened into two or more fractions as specified. The separated fractions shall then be conveyed into separate compartments ready for batching and mixing with bituminous material.

E. Mixing.

1. The dried aggregates shall be combined within the mixer in the amount of each fraction of aggregates required to meet the Job Mix formula. The bituminous material shall be measured and introduced into the mixer in the amount specified by the job mix formula.

2. The materials shall be mixed until a complete and uniform coating of the particles

and a thorough distribution of the bituminous material throughout the aggregate is secured.

3. The temperature of the completed mixture, made with aggregates containing

absorbed moisture which causes foaming or boiling in the completed mix shall be not less then 225° F. The temperature of the mix when it is discharged from the mixer shall not deviate from that shown on the Job Mix Formula by more than ±20° F.

4. The temperature for grading A-S shall be between 225° F and 275° F.


32 12 16 - 23

5. Unless otherwise specified the temperature of all other bituminous pavement mixture shall be as designated on the Job Mix Formula.

F. Use of Surge or Storage Silos.

1. The surge of storage system shall conform to the requirements of this specification.

2. Hours of plant operation, whether for storage or direct shipment to the road, shall

be limited to reasonable working hours in order that normal inspection of plant operations may be performed.

3. Bituminous mixtures placed in a surge silo must be removed on the same day in

which it is stored.

4. Bituminous mixtures Gradings A, A-S, and B may be stored for up to 48 hours and Gradings B-M, B-M2, D, and E for up to 96 hours in a storage silo provided the following requirements are met:

a. An approved silicone additive shall be added to the asphalt

cement for mixes to be stored beyond the day of mixing b. The stored bituminous mixture shall be kept sealed at all time

during storage.

c. The storage silo shall be filled to at least 90% of capacity.

5. Samples of the stored material will be taken following the period of storage. 6. Material stored will be subject to the temperature, segregation, and laying

requirements as required for unstored plant production.

7. Excessive segregation, lumpiness, or stiffness of the mix shall be sufficient cause for rejection by the ENGNIEER.

8. The Surge and Storage silos shall be located in a position that enables the top of

the truckload to be visible to the load operator during the loading operation.

G. Spreading and finishing.

1. Bituminous mixtures shall be delivered and spread on the roadway in ample time to secure thorough compaction during daylight hours.

2. The temperature of the mixture at the time of depositing in the paver hopper shall

be ±20° F of the temperature shown on the Job Mix Formula.

3. The mixture shall be placed upon an approved surface, spread and struck off to the established line, grade and elevation by means of approved asphalt paving machine(s). Echelon or full-width paving may be permitted where plant production is capable of supplying the paver so that a constant forward speed can be maintained.

4. Where multi-course pavements are placed, the longitudinal joint in one layer shall

offset that in the layer immediately before by approximately one (1) foot;


32 12 16 - 24

however, the joint in the top layer shall be at the center-line of the pavement if the roadway comprises two lanes of width.

5. Plant production and paving operations shall be so coordinated that there is

constant forward movement of the pavers. Repetitive interruptions or stopping of the paver shall be cause to stop work until the cause of the stoppage is corrected. If the paver must be stopped for a significant period of time, a joint shall be constructed and the paver moved from the roadway before the bituminous mixture has cooled sufficiently to prevent proper compaction. If the bituminous mixture is permitted to cool to the extent that the required density cannot be obtained, the mixture shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

6. Automatic screed controls utilizing either the string line or ski type grade

reference system will be required on all work regardless of the paver width. The string line reference system may be required on new construction. In the event the base has been finished with equipment having automatic grade control or the Contractor demonstrates that an alternate method of spreading and finishing will result in a satisfactory riding surface, the ski type reference system may be used. The Engineer may at any time require the use of a string line reference system if the use of the string line will result in a superior riding surface. When the string line system is required on a multi-course pavement, it shall be used on at least two courses exclusive of the surface course.

The string line reference system shall consist of suitable wire or twine supported by approved devices, which will be compatible with the type of automatic paver control system used. The string line and supports shall be capable of maintaining the line and grade designated by the plans at the point of support while withstanding the tensioning necessary to prevent sag in excess of one-fourth inch between supports spaced fifty feet apart. The cost of erecting and maintaining the string line reference system shall be included in the unit price bid for other items of construction.

7. Where the ski type system is used, the ski shall have the maximum practical

length and in no case shall it be less than forty (40) feet in length. Pavement lanes previously placed with automatic controls or to form grade may serve as longitudinal control reference for placing adjacent lanes by utilizing a ski or joint matching shoe.

8. Automatic screed controls will not be required on sections of projects where service connections and other conditions interfere with their efficient operation.

9. On areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of

mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impracticable, the mixture shall be taken from the hopper of the spreading machine and shall be distributed immediately into place by means of suitable shovels and other tools and spread with rakes and lutes in a uniformly loose layer of such depth as will result in a completed course having the required thickness.

H. Compaction.

1. After the bituminous mixture has been spread, struck off, and surface

irregularities adjusted, it shall be thoroughly compacted. The method employed must be capable of compacting the mixture to the specified density while it is in a workable condition.


32 12 16 - 25

2. Each paving train shall consist of a minimum of three (3) rollers as specified in

this specification. The intermediate roller in each train shall be a pneumatic type.

The minimum number of rollers listed above may be reduced to one roller of either the steel-wheel or vibratory type on a project containing less than 10,000 square yards of bituminous pavement.

3. Unless otherwise directed, rolling shall begin at the low side and proceed

longitudinally parallel to the road centerline. When paving in echelon or abutting a previously placed lane, the longitudinal joint shall be rolled first, followed by the regular rolling procedure. When paving in echelon, rollers shall not compact within six (6) inches of an edge where an adjacent lane is to be placed. Rollers shall move in a slow uniform speed with the drive wheels nearer the paver and shall be kept as nearly as possible in continuous operation. Rolling shall continue until all roller marks are eliminated. Rollers shall not park on the bituminous pavement.

I. Density Requirements.

1. The density (bulk specific gravity) determination for a compacted asphalt mixture shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T-166, Method A or C. Any base or surface course that test below the minimum density shall be corrected until the density of the area is equal to or above minimum before it can be used to determine the average density of the lot. No successive layer, where applicable, shall be placed until the area has been corrected.

2. For density testing purposes, the pavement shall be divided into lots of 10,000

square yards, except for gradings “A”, “B-M”, and “B-M2” which shall be divided into lots of approximately 5,000 square yards. Five density tests shall be performed in each lot and the average results compared with the requirements below.

3. If the average density of the lot does not conform to the requirements stated

herein, or if an individual test value does not meet the requirements stated herein, the Contractor shall continue his compactive effort until the required density is obtained.

4. Along forms, curbs, headers, walls and other places not accessible to the rollers,

the mixture shall be compacted thoroughly with hot hand tampers, smoothing irons, or mechanical tampers. On depressed areas, a trench roller may be used to compact the mix.

5. Bituminous Plant Mix Base, Gradings “A”, “B-M” and “B-M2”. An average of 92%

of theoretical density shall be required. No individual density test shall be less than 90% of theoretical density.

6. Bituminous Plant Mix Base, Grading “CW”. An average of 88% of theoretical

density shall be required. No individual density test shall be less than 85% of theoretical density.

7. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course, Gradings “D” and “E”. An average of 92% of

maximum theoretical density with no individual test falling below 90% of maximum theoretical density.


32 12 16 - 26

8. Density requirements shall be waived on Bituminous Plant Mix Base Grading “A-

S”. However, a system of compaction for roadway pavements shall be employed. When placing bituminous Plant Mix Base grading “A-S”, the intermediate roller (pneumatic tire) specified previously may be replaced by a steel wheel type if irreparable damage to the pavement is occurring.

J. Test Strips.

Test strips shall be required for all “A”, “B-M”, “B-M2”, “CW, “D”, and “E” mixes to establish rolling patterns, to calibrate nuclear gauges, and to verify that the base course or surface course meets the density requirements of the specifications. Construction of the test strip shall be as follows: 1. The base course or other pavement course upon which a test strip is constructed

shall have been approved prior to the construction of the test strip. 2. Each test strip shall be constructed with approved bituminous mixture and shall

remain in place as a section of the completed work. Each test strip shall be one paver-width wide and have an area of at least 400 square yards and shall be the depth specified for the pavement course concerned.

3. Compaction of the test strip shall commence immediately after placement of the

bituminous mixture and be continuous and uniform over the entire test strip.

The compaction of the test strip shall be continued until no appreciable increase in density (1.0 lbs/C.F.) as measured with the nuclear gauge can be obtained by additional roller coverage. The roller coverage necessary to obtain this maximum density shall be used as the rolling pattern for the remainder of the project.

4. The Contractor will take cores on the test strip at ten randomly selected

locations. Cores shall not be taken within two feet of the longitudinal edges for calibration or determining average densities. The Contractor shall then have the densities of the cores determined and these values shall be used in calibrating the nuclear gauge and to verify that the average density of the test strip meets the density requirements of the specifications.

5. In the event the density of the asphaltic concrete in the test strip does not meet

specification requirements, the Contractor shall make whatever changes necessary to obtain the specified density.

K. Placing of the bituminous paving shall be as continuous as possible. Rollers shall not

pass over the unprotected end of a freshly laid mixture. Transverse joints shall be formed by cutting back on the previous run to expose the full depth of the course. A brush coat of bituminous material shall be used on contact surfaces of transverse joints just before additional mixture is placed against the previously rolled material.

L. Surface Requirements.

1. The surface shall be tested with a 12 foot straightedge applied parallel to the

centerline of the pavement. The deviation of the surface form the testing edge of the straightedge shall not exceed that specified below for the respective types of bituminous construction.


32 12 16 - 27

Mix Acceptable Deviation “A” – “A-S” 0.5”

“B-M”, “B-M2”, “CW” 0.375” “D” 0.25”

2. The transverse slopes of tilted pavements shall be tested with a stringline and

string level applied at right angles to the centerline of the pavement, and the per cent slope, when computed for the full width of the pavement shall not deviate more than five-tenths of one percentage point from that specified on the Plans.

3. The crown in crowned pavements shall be tested with a stringline applied at right

angles to the centerline of the pavement and the crown shall not deviate more than one-half inch from that specified on the Plans.

4. Deviations greater than the specified tolerances shall be corrected by methods

best suited for the purpose. Pavement that cannot be corrected to comply with the specified tolerances shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

END OF SECTION 32 12 16 – HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING

CHEATHAM COUNTY CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 32 13 13

32 13 13 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Prepare pavement sub-base for pavement base and paving. B. Furnish and install pavement base. C. Furnish and install Portland cement concrete paving for walkways, curbs, steps and

ramps. 1.02 RELATED WORK

Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork

1.03 REFERENCE DOCUMENT

ASTM D 1557-91, "Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort"

1.04 SITE CONDITIONS

Do not execute work during unfavorable conditions as specified below (1) Temperature below 40° F (2) Presence of free surface water. (3) Over-saturated base and sub-base materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Sub-base – As specified in Section 310000.

B. Base – Road base type gravel or crushed rock, graded as to meet T.D.O.T. Type “A”,

Grading “D” gradations and specifications.

C. Concrete – Conform to applicable requirements specified in Section 321613 for Site Cast-in Place Concrete.

D. Wire Mesh: Welded plain steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185.

E. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 in sizes as shown on plans.

F. Fabricated Bar Mats: Steel bar or rod mats, ASTM A 184, using ASTM A 615, Grade 60

steel bars. G. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60.

H. Liquid Membrane Forming and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Survey and stake parking surfaces for grading.

CHEATHAM COUNTY CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 32 13 13

32 13 13 - 2

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Site Tolerances – Alignment of top of forms, 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Finished base course shall be true to line and grade within plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

B. Sub-Base - Fine grade parking surface area. Compact as specified in Section 310000.

C. Base

1 4 inches thick minimum after compaction (sidewalks). 6” min. (road) 2 Compact to 95 percent minimum density as determined by ASTM D 1557. 3 Remove or repair improperly prepared areas.

D. Paving Placement

1 Apply soil sterilant immediately prior to placing concrete. 2 Place, strike off, and consolidate concrete with mechanical finishing machine or

vibrating screed. a. Hand finishing methods may be used if approved by Designer. b. If screed is used, carry 2 inches of concrete minimum in front of screed for

full width of pavement. c. Concrete may also be placed with slipform paver designed to spread,

consolidate, screed, and float-finish concrete in one pass. 3 Finish - Skid-resistant finish made with burlap drag or broom. 4 Curing - As per Section 32 16 13 Site Cast-in-Place Concrete 5 Joints -

a. Control - 1) Depth shall be 1/4 slab thickness. 2) Complete before shrinkage cracking occurs. 3) Make continuous across slab unless interrupted by expansion or

isolation joint. Extend through adjoining curbs, gutters, and sidewalks.

4) Space not more than 12'6" apart in any direction. 5) Control Jointing Methods -

a) Sawing - Begin sawing joints as soon as concrete has hardened enough to permit sawing without raveling.

b) Hand-Formed - Maximum edge radius shall be 1/4 inch. c) Pre-molded joint former

b. Expansion or Isolation - 1) Use to isolate fixed objects abutting or within paved area.

Joints shall contain pre-molded joint filler for full depth of slab. 2) Space not more than 65 feet apart in any direction. 3) Clean and seal before opening parking area to traffic.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Do not open pavement to traffic for three days or until concrete reaches a minimum of 75% of the design compressive strength, whichever is longer. Restrict traffic to passenger cars and light trucks for seven days. In all cases, obtain approval from Designer before allowing access to parking area by traffic.

END OF SECTION 32 13 13 – CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

CHEATHAM COUNTY AGGREGATE SURFACING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 32 15 00

32 15 00-1

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. This section includes the requirements for constructing sub-base and related aggregate surfacing.


A. Section 31 2313: Subgrade Preparation 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Unless otherwise specified, the Work for this Section shall conform to the applicable portions of the following Standard Specifications:

1. ASTM – American Society of Testing and Materials

2. AASHTO – American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials

3. TDOT – Tennessee Department of Transportation, 2015 Standard Specifications for

Road and Bridge Construction 1.04 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES

A. The finished surface shall be shaped to conform to plan grade and cross section within a

tolerance of two (2) inches of the finished grade shown on the Plans. 1.05 TEST REPORTS

A. The testing lab shall provide the ENGINEER with two (2) certified copies of the test

results of the thickness of the compacted aggregate.

B. The core drilling, testing for thickness and the certification of the test results shall be performed by a testing laboratory approved by the ENGINEER.

1.06 STOCKPILING AGGREGATE

A. Aggregate shall be deposited in stockpiles in such a manner that the material may be removed from the stockpile by methods which will provide aggregate having a uniform gradation.

B. Stockpiling of aggregate, in excess of four (4) feet in depth, on the completed subbase or aggregate surface will not be permitted, except with the approval of the ENGINEER.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with the requirements for aggregate base or surfacing installations due to outside ambient air temperatures specified under Article 3.09 of this Section.


32 15 00-2

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE FOR GRAVEL ROADWAYS

A. For gravel roadways, the dense-graded aggregate gradation shall conform to ASTM D693 and to Type A Aggregate, Grading D, as specified in TDOT, Section 903.05.

B. The gradation for aggregate used for gravel surfacing for final site restoration and

stabilization shall conform to AASHTO M43 #67. 2.02 WATER

A. Water used for compaction and dust control shall be reasonably clean and free from substances injurious to the finished product.

B. Water from sources approved by the Tennessee State Department of Public Health as potable may be used.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION VERIFICATION

A. Prior to the placing of any aggregate material, examine the excavation for the grades, lines, and levels required to receive the new Work.

B. Ascertain that all excavation and compacted subgrades or subbases are adequate to receive the new Work.

C. Correct all defects and deficiencies before proceeding with the Work. 3.02 SUBGRADE CONDITIONS

A. Prior to the placing of any aggregate material, examine the subgrade or subbase to ascertain that it is adequate to receive the aggregate to be placed. If the subgrade or subbase remains wet after all surface water has been removed, the ENGINEER may require further mechanical stabilization of the subgrade at no additional cost to the OWNER.

3.03 EXISTING BASE

A. Prior to the placing of any aggregate material for surfacing, examine the existing base for grade and condition to receive the new Work.

B. Ascertain that the base is adequately compacted to receive the aggregate surfacing to be installed.

C. Correct all defects and deficiencies before proceeding with the Work.

3.04 EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS

A. Investigate and verify locations of existing improvements, including structures, to which the new Work will be in contact.


32 15 00-3

B. Necessary adjustment in line and grade, to align the new Work with the existing improvements must be approved by the ENGINEER, prior to any changes

3.05 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE OR SUBBASE

A. The subgrade or subbase shall be rough graded to the cross section indicated on the

Plans, and shall be thoroughly compacted prior to the placing of the aggregate material.

3.06 INSTALLATION- GENERAL

A. The width, thickness, and type of aggregate materials shall be indicated on the Plans or as directed by the ENGINEER.

B. No aggregate material shall be placed until the subgrade, or subbase, or existing aggregate surface has been approved by the ENGINEER.

3.07 AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE

A. Where the base for the new aggregate surface course is an existing aggregate surface, the existing surfacing, shall be either graded or scarified and graded to remove irregularities and to provide a bond between the old and new surfaces.

B. The aggregate surface course shall be placed by a mechanical spreader or other approved means, in uniform layers to such a depth that when compacted, the course will have the thickness shown on the Plans.

C. The depth of the surface course, when compacted, shall not exceed six (6) inches,

unless otherwise specified on the Plans or directed by the ENGINEER.

1. The aggregate shall be a uniform mixture when placed on the prepared base.

2. It shall be uniformly spread and then trimmed with a road grade, trimmer or other approved means until the surface is free from waves and irregularities.

3. The trimming shall be alternated by rolling with a pneumatic-tired or tamping type

roller.

4. The entire operation shall continue until the surface course is compacted to at least 95% of maximum dry unit weight, as determined by ASTM Standard D698. The moisture content of the aggregate surface materials should be controlled to within 1 percent of optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM Standard D698.

D. When the operation is completed, the surface course shall conform to the required lines,

grades and cross sections.

E. The optimum moisture content shall be maintained until the prescribed unit weigh is obtained and each layer shall be compacted until the maximum unit weigh is attained before placing the succeeding layer.

F. When approved by the ENGINEER, additional water may be applied by an approved

means, to the aggregate to aid in the compaction and shaping of the material.


32 15 00-4

3.08 MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The aggregate surface shall be continuously maintained in a smooth and firm condition during all phases of the construction operation.

B. The CONTRACTOR, at his expense, shall provide additional materials needed to fill depressions or bind the aggregate.

3.09 TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS

A. Aggregate materials shall not be placed when there are indications that mixtures may become frozen before the maximum unit weigh is obtained.

B. In no case shall the aggregate be placed on a frozen subgrade or base course unless

otherwise directed by the ENGINEER.

3.10 CLEANUP

A. Immediately following the compacting of the surface course and where noted on the Plans, the voids on both side of the aggregate course shall be backfilled with sound earth of topsoil quality.

B. The backfill shall be compacted, leveled and left in a neat, workmanlike condition. C. At a seasonally correct time, approved by the ENGINEER, the disturbed area shall be

raked, having topsoil placed thereon, fertilized and seeded per the requirements of Section 32 92 19, Seeding, or the area shall be stabilized with surface gravel, as noted on the Plans, immediately following completion of trench backfilling.

3.11 OPENING AGGREGATE SURFACED ROADS

A. The ENGINEER reserves the right to open the aggregate surfacing to traffic at any time during construction.

3.12 TESTING

A. During the course of the Work, the ENGINEER may require testing for compaction or

density and for thickness of material. The testing required shall be performed by a testing laboratory acceptable to the OWNER and approved by the ENGINEER. The cost for testing and coring shall be at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.

B. When thickness tests are done, a minimum of one depth (thickness) measurement will be made every 10,000 square feet. The location of the depth measurement will be at the discretion of the ENGINEER.

C. The maximum dry unit weight when used as a measure of compaction or density of soils

shall be understood to mean the maximum dry unit weight per cubic foot as determined by ASTM D698.

D. Perform one-in-place density test every 5,000 square feet per lift.


32 15 00-5

3.13 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Thickness:

1. Measurements of aggregate base and/or surface course thickness will be made

to the nearest ¼ inch. a. Depths may be ½ inch less than the thickness indicated on the Plans

provided that the average of all measurements taken at regular intervals shall be equal to or greater than the specified thickness.

b. In determining the average in place thickness, measurements which are more than ½ inch in excess of the thickness indicated on the Plans will be considered as the specified thickness plus ½ inch.

2. Locations of the depth measurements will be as specified herein unless

otherwise directed by the ENGINEER.

3. Sections found to be deficient in depth shall be corrected by the CONTRACTOR using methods approved by the ENGINEER.

B. Weight:

1. When the aggregate is measured by weight in Tons, the pay weights for

aggregates will be the scale weight of the material, including admixtures, unless the moisture content is more than six (6) percent.

2. Moisture tests will be made at the start of weighing operations and at any time thereafter when construction operations, weather conditions or any other cause may result in a change in the moisture content of the material.

a. If the tests indicate a moisture content in excess of six (6) percent, the

excess over six (6) percent will be deducted from the scale weight of the aggregate until such time as moisture tests indicate that the moisture content of the material is not more than six (6) percent.

END OF SECTION 32 15 00 – AGGREGATE SURFACING

CHEATHAM COUNTY SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 32 16 13

32 16 13 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement

procedures, and finishes. B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:

1. Concrete Curb and Combined Curb and Gutter. 2. Footings 3. Sidewalks 4. Pavement

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials

1. ASTM A 82-90a: Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A 185-90a: Specification for Steel Welded and Wire Fabric, Plain, for

concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A 615-90: Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM C 31-90: Test Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in

the Field. 5. ASTM C 33-90: Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 6. ASTM C 39-86: Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens. 7. ASTM C 42-90a: Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed

Beams of Concrete. 8. ASTM C 94-90: Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 9. ASTM C 150-89: Specification for Portland Cement. 10. ASTM C 172-90: Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 11. ASTM C 173.78: Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method. 12. ASTM C 231: Test Method of Air Content of freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Pressure Method. 13. ASTM C 260-86: Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 14. ASTM C 309-91: Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete. 15. ASTM C 494-90: Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 16. ASTM C 618-91: Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan

for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 17. ASTM C 1064-86: Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland-

Cement Concrete. 18. ASTM C 1116-89: Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete. 19. ASTM E 154-88: Methods of Testing Materials for Use as Vapor Barriers Under

Concrete Slabs and as Ground Cover in Crawl Spaces.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

1. ACI 301-89: Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 305R-89: Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306.1-90: Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 309R-87: Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.


32 16 13 - 2

5. ACI 318-89: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 6. ACI 347R-88: Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 7. ACI SP-66 (88): ACI Detailing Manual (Supersedes ACI 315).

C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

AASHTO M 182-89: Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf. D. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS 39205)

CRD-C 572-74: Specification for Polyvinyl- chloride Waterstops. E. American Concrete Institute

ACI Manual of Concrete Practice F. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Standard Practice

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming

accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds and others if requested by the Engineer.

B. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete

reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures” showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures.

C. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. D. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports. Material certificates shall

be signed by manufacturer and CONTRACTOR, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.

E. Submit pigment manufacturer’s color chart for color selection; indicated pigment number

and required dosage rate. Submittals are for general color selection and may vary somewhat from concrete finished in field according to Specifications.


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and

standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.”

2. ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) “Manual of Standard Practice.”

B. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency to perform material evaluation tests

and to design concrete mixes. C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress

of Work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at CONTRACTOR’S expense.

D. Obtain each material from the same source and maintain high degree of consistency in

workmanship throughout the Project.


32 16 13 - 3

E. Installer Qualifications: Concrete work shall be finished by firm with five years experience

with work of similar scope and quality. F. Minor variations in appearance of colored concrete, which are similar to natural variations

in color and appearance of unpigmented concrete, are acceptable.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 “A-C or B-B

High Density Overlaid Concrete Form,” Class I.

B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, or

paper or fiber tubes that will produce smooth surfaces without joint indications. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist wet concrete loads without deformation.

D. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a

maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties

designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface.

1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in

diameter in the concrete surface.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,

supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where

base material will not support chair legs.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.


32 16 13 - 4

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a

single source for exposed concrete.

For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling.

D. Water: Potable E. Fiber Reinforcement: Polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for secondary

reinforcement of concrete slabs, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, not less than 3/4 inch long.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Gilco fibers, Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Fiberstrand 100, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Fibermesh, Fibermesh Co., Div. Synthetic Industries, Inc. d. Grace Fibers, W.R. Grace & Co. e. Polystrand, Metalcrete Industries.

F. Admixtures, General: If used, provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1

percent chloride ions. G. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with

other required admixtures.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Airtite, Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Air-Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace & Co. d. MB-VR or Micro-Air, Master Builders, Inc. e. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc. f. Sika AER, Sika Corp.

H. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.


a. Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp. b. PSI N, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co. d. WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co. e. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. f. Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp.

I. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.



32 16 13 - 5

a. Cormix 200, Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Co. c. WRDA 19 or Daracem, W.R. Grace & Co. d. Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. e. Sikament 300, Sika Corp.

J. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.


a. Q-Set, Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co. b. Lubricon NCA, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co. d. Daraset, W.R. Grace & Co. e. Pozzutec 20, Master Builders, Inc. f. Accel-Set, Metalcrete Industries.

K. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D.


a. PSI -R Plus, Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Daratard-17, W.R. Grace & Co. d. Pozzolith R, Master Builders, Inc. e. Protard, Prokete Industries, Inc. f. Plastiment, Sika Corporation.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Waterstops: If indicated, provide flat, dumbbell-type or centerbulb-type waterstops at construction joints and other joints as indicated. Size to suit joints.

B. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

a. The Burke Co. b. Greenstreak Plastic Products Co. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

C. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested

according to ASTM E 154, as follows:

1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick. D. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery as

the abrasive aggregate for a nonslip finish, with emery aggregate containing not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing and unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

E. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz.

Per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. F. Moisture-retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.


32 16 13 - 6

1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

G. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing

compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. meter when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.


a. A-H 3 Way Sealer, Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. b. Sealco 309, Cormix Construction chemicals. c. Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co. d. Masturkure, Master Builders, Inc. e. CS-309, W. R. Meadows, Inc. f. Kure-N-Seal, Sonneborn-Chemrex.

H. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.

1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.


a. Sealco - VOC, Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Aqua-Cure, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Dress & Seal WB, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. Masterkure 100W, Master Builders, Inc. e. Vocomp-20, W.R. Meadows, Inc.

I. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete

slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.


a. Eucobar, Euclid Chemical Co. b. E-Con, L7M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. Confilm, Master Builders, Inc.

J. Underlayment Compound: Free-flowing, self-leveling, pumpable, cement-based

compound for applications from 1 inch thick to feathered edges.


a. Polyvinyl Acette (Interior Only):

1. Euco Weld, Euclid Chemical Co. 2. Everweld, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene:

1. SBR Latex, Euclid Chemical Co. 2. Daraweld C, W.R. Grace & Co. 3. Everbond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 4. Intralok, W.R. Meadows, Inc. 5. Sonocrete, Sonneborn-Chemrex.


32 16 13 - 7

K. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp

surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements.


a. Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620, Euclid Chemical Co. b. Epabond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc. d. Rezi-Weld 1000, W.R. Meadows, Inc. e. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, Sika Corp.

L. Water and Chloride Repellant - PROSOCO Saltguard WB.

2.6 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight.

B. Submit written reports to the Engineer for each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work.

C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as indicated

on drawings and schedules:

1. 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.45 maximum (air-entrained).

D. Water-Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water-cement (W/C) ratios as follows:

1. Subjected to freezing and thawing: W/C 0.45.

E. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:

1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches. 3. Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not

more than 8 inches after adding admixture to site-verified 2-to-3-inch slump concrete.

4. Caissons: Not less than 3 inches and not more than 6 inches. 5. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches.

F. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by

CONTRACTOR when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Engineer before using in Work.

G. Fiber Reinforcement: Add at manufacturer’s recommended rate but not less than 1.5 lb

per cu. yd.


32 16 13 - 8

H. Pigments: Mix in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Mix until pigments are uniformly dispersed throughout mixture and disintegrating bags, if used, have disintegrated.

2.7 ADMIXTURES

A. General: The use of admixtures other than air-entraining admixture is the CONTRACTOR’S option and responsibility if it can be demonstrated that such use will improve placement and workability of the concrete without detriment to strength, durability and other specified qualities. Types, manufacture, proportions, etc., of proposed admixtures to be used in any mix shall be part of the mix designs and/or laboratory test data submitted for acceptance by the Architect.

B. Water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) may

be used in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. C. Accelerating admixture may be used in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures

below 50 degrees F (10 deg C). D. High-range water-reducing admixture may be used in pumped concrete, concrete

required to be watertight, and concrete with water-cement ratios below 0.50. E. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated.

Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within the following limits: 1. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer

chemicals, or hydraulic pressure:

a. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure): 6.0 percent (severe exposure) for 1-inch maximum aggregate.

b. 5.0 percent (moderate exposure):6.0 percent (severe exposure) for 3/4-inch maximum aggregate.

F. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict compliance

with manufacturer’s directions.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Job-Site Mixing: Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

For mixers of 1 cubic yard or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd.

1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating

Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced.

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.


32 16 13 - 9

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

3.2 FORMS

A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACE 347 limits.

1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.

B. Construct form to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, signage, keyways, recesses, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.

C. Fabricate Forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete

surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal.

D. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of

formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges if indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber

chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Provisions for other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate

work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive

concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

3.3 VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. General: Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel

with direction of pour. B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s recommended mastic or pressure-

sensitive tape.


32 16 13 - 10

3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute’s recommended practice for “Placing Reinforcing Bars,” for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified.

1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement

placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that

reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate

and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers. D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverage as indicated for concrete protection.

Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least

one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Supports for Reinforcing Bars: Use corrosion-resistant types at locations in contact with

exposed surfaces. 3.5 JOINTS

A. Expansion and Construction Joints: Locate and install expansion and construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure.

B. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement

across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements.

C. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. D. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to

form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer’s printed instructions.

E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of

contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

F. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-

grade at intervals to form panels of patterns as shown, generally square in shape. Use inserts 1/4 inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth. The joint filler shall be a joint filler stop of closed cell polyethylene foam backer rod of sufficient size to provide a tight seal. The backer rod shall be installed in a saw cut joint to prevent the sealant from flowing to the bottom. The backer rod shall be compatible with the joint sealant to act as a bond breaker.


32 16 13 - 11

G. Expansion Joints: Construct expansion joints at 20’ O.C. for concrete walk and low flow swale and in the center of concrete sidewalk. All expansion joints shall include 18” long smooth coated #4 bars spaced on 12” centers at the midpoint of the slab depth.

H. Expansion Joint Filler: The filler shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 1752. The

expansion joint filler shall be Ceramar Flexible Foam Expansion Joint Filler manufactured be Sealtight, or an approved equal.

I. Joint Sealer: Silicone sealant shall meet the requirements of Tennessee Department of

Transportation Standard Specifications Section 905.05: The sealant shall have a minimum of 75 percent extensibility at a temperature range of -50° F to 200 ° F.

3.6 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items

required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.

B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to

achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

3.7 PREPARING FORM SURFACES

A. General: coat contact surfaces of forms with an approve, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating compound before placing reinforcement.

B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel

formwork is not acceptable. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in shall be inspected.

B. General: Comply with ACI 304, “Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing

concrete,” and as specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be

placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.

D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in horizontal layers no deeper than 24

inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented

by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer


32 16 13 - 12

and at least into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.

E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous

operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly

worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull

floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents

or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of

placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is CONTRACTOR’S option.

2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.

4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not

exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material use, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth-Formed finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces

exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a


32 16 13 - 13

minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed.

C. Smooth-rubbed Finish: Provide smooth-rubbed finish on exposed-to-view round column

and pier surfaces that have received smooth-formed finish treatment not later than 1 day after form removal.

1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive

until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

D. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Provide grout-cleaned finish as an alternate option to smooth-

rubbed finish.

1. Combine one part Portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand by volume, and a 50:50 mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding admixture and water to form the consistency of thick paint. Blend standard Portland cement and white Portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.

2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing.

E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed

surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES

A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for tile and other bonded applied cementitious flooring material, and where indicated. 1. After placing slabs, finish surface to tolerances of F(F) 15 (floor flatness) and F(L)

13 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.

B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and

other finishes as specified: slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo: and where indicated. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface

until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

C. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab

surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.


32 16 13 - 14

1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

D. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete walks, platforms,

steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

E. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Apply nonslip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads,

platforms, ramps, sloped walks, and where indicated.

1. After completing float finishing and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 lb of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100 sp. Ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as specified.

2. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone, and water to expose nonslip aggregate.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still

green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment Bases and

foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated

items. Cast-in safety inserts and accessories as shown on drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.

3.12 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or

hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer’s instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.

B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after

placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.


32 16 13 - 15

C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.

D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:

1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Use continuous water-fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate

cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

E. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:

1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

F. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs

as follows:

1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer’s directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with

finish materials applied directly to concrete. 3. All exterior concrete shall be treated with ProSoCo “Saltguard WB” as per the

manufacture’s recommendations.

G. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and

other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method.

1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.

I. Curing Compound for Colored Concrete: Curing compound shall comply with ASTM C309

and be approved by pigment manufacturer for use with colored concrete. Provide {W-1000 Clear Cure & Seal} {Color Seal II tinted to match colored concrete and} manufactured by Davis Colors or equal.

1. Colored Concrete: Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions. 3.13 SHORES AND SUPPORTS


32 16 13 - 16

A. General: Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring. B. Remove shores and re-shores in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured

concrete. Locate and provide adequate re-shoring to support work without excessive stress of deflection.

C. Keep re-shores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, or longer, if

required, until concrete has attained its required 28-day strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed.

3.14 REMOVING FORMS

A. General: formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other

structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days or until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens, representative of concrete location or members.

C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other

vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.

3.15 REUSING FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces,

remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces.

3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms.

B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate

passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.

1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and

holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.

2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white Portland cement and standard

Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.


32 16 13 - 17

C. Repairing formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if

defects cannot be repaired. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect

the concrete’s durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for

smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope.

1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete’s

durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at

least 14 days. 2. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing

surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used.

4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1

inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack

method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Place dry-pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

F. Perform structural repairs using epoxy adhesive and mortar.

3.17 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General: The Owner shall employ a testing agency to perform tests. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement shall include the

following:


32 16 13 - 18

1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.

a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day’s pour

of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.

b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal

weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day’s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air

temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of three standard

cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens, except when field-cured test specimens are required.

e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day’s pour

exceeding 5 cu. yd. Plus additional sets for each 50 cubic yards more than the first 25 cubic yards of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days.

2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given

class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

4. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

C. Test results shall be reported in writing to the ready-mix producer, and CONTRACTOR

within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. E. Additional Tests: The testing agency shall make additional tests of in-place concrete

when test results indicated specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

END OF SECTION 32 16 13 – CAST-IN PLACE CONCRETE

CHEATHAM COUNTY PAVEMENT MARKINGS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 32 17 23 ______________________________________________________________________________________

31 17 23 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

This work shall consist of furnishing and supplying pavement markings in accordance with these specifications, the latest revision of the “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices” published by the FHWA, and in reasonably close conformity to the lines, dimensions, patterns, locations, and details shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.


A. Section 32 12 16 – Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.1 PAINT

A. General Requirements: The pigmented binder shall be properly formulated so as to be suitable for application by spray equipment when heated to 123°F maximum and applied on bituminous or Portland cement concrete pavements.

B. Glass Beads shall be the drop-on type, and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 247

Type I or Type II, unless otherwise specified.

GRADATION Sieve % Passing No. 16 100 No. 20 75-95 No. 30 65-95 No. 50 15-35 No. 100 0-5

Beads retained on the No. 20 sieve shall have a minimum of 65% true spheres. Beads passing the No. 20 sieve shall have a minimum of 75% true spheres.

C. Characteristic Requirements

1. Pigment content shall be between 58% and 65% by weight. Pigment for white paint

shall contain 0.99 Lbs./Gal. Of 94% titanium dioxide. Pigment for yellow paint shall be lead free and contain 0.22 Lb/Gal. Minimum of 94% titanium dioxide.

2. Total non-volatile shall not be less than 76% by weight.

3. Vehicle non-volatile shall not be less than 41% by weight. Vehicle shall be Rohm

and Haas E-2706, DOW DT211NA or approved equal.

4. Minimum weight shall not be less than 13.3 Lbs./Gal.

5. The paint viscosity shall be between 78 and 95 Kerb units when tested at 25°C (±1°C).

6. The paint shall dry to a no-track condition in 60 seconds when applied a 15 mil. (±1

mil.) wet film thickness. The dry time shall be checked at ambient temperature and humidity as applied. The paint shall also have a dry through (early washout) requirement of the following: a 15 mil. (±1 mil.) wet film of the candidate paint placed immediately in a humidity chamber maintained at 75°F (±2°F) and 90% (±5%) relative humidity shall have a dry-through time of 30 minutes maximum when tested


31 17 23 - 2

in accordance with ASTM D 1640 except that the pressure exerted will be the minimum needed to maintain contact between the thumb and film.

7. The paint shall meet the current EPA VOC requirements of 150 grams/L whichever

is lower.

8. The pH of the paint shall be a minimum of 9.6.

D. Qualitative Requirements

The finished paint shall meet the following quality requirements: 1. Condition in container: The paint received shall show no livering, skinning, mold

growth, corrosion of the container, or hard settling of the pigment. Any settling shall be readily dispersed when stirred by hand with no persistent foaming.

2. Color: The color for white after drying shall be flat white, free from tint, furnishing

good opacity and visibility under both daylight and artificial light. For yellow, the color shall closely match chip 33538 of Federal Standard 595.

3. Flexibility: The paint shall show no cracking or flaking when tested on a ½” mandrel

in accordance with Federal Specification TT-P-1952B.

4. Dry Opacity: The minimum contract ratio shall be 0.95 when drawn with a 0.005 Bird Applicator.

5. Daylight Reflectance: The daylight directional reflectance of the white paint shall no

be less than 85% and not less than 50% for yellow (relative to manganese oxide) when measured in accordance with Federal Test Method No. 1416.6.

6. Bleeding: The paint shall have a minimum bleeding ratio of 0.97 when tested in

accordance with Federal Specification TT-9-1952B.

7. Scrub Resistance: The paint shall pass 300 cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2484.

8. Freeze-Thaw Stability: The paint shall show no change in consistency greater than

10% when tested in accordance with Federal Specification TT-P-1952B.

9. Storage Stability: When stored at 25°C (±2°C) in a three-quarter filled can for a period of thirty days, the paint shall be in a homogeneous state with no skinning, curdling, hard settling or caking that cannot be readily remixed.

2.2 THERMOPLASTIC

This material shall conform to AASHTO M 249. Drop on glass beads shall conform to AASHTO M 247.

2.3 PREFORMED PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Preformed pavement markings shall consist of white or yellow films with clear and/or yellow-tinted microcrystalline ceramic beads incorporated to provide immediate and continuing retroreflection. These films shall be manufactured without the use of lead chromate pigments or other similar, lead-containing chemicals.

B. Preformed pavement markings shall be capable of being adhered to asphaltic cement

concrete and Portland cement concrete by a pre-coated pressure sensitive adhesive.


31 17 23 - 3

C. The pavement markings shall be capable of application on new, dense and open-graded asphalt concrete wearing courses during the paving operation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. After application, the markings shall be immediately ready for traffic.

D. The markings shall be highly durable, retroreflective, pliant polymer materials designed for

longitudinal and word/symbol markings subjected to high traffic volumes and severe wear conditions such as shear action from crossover or encroachment on typical longitudinal configurations such as edge lines and lane lines.

E. The retroreflective pliant polymer pavement markings shall consist of a mixture of high-

quality polymeric materials, pigments and glass beads distributed throughout its base cross-sectional area, with a reflective layer of microcrystalline ceramic beads bonded to a durable polyurethane topcoat surface. The patterned surface shall have approximately 50% ±15% of the surface area raised and presenting a near vertical face to traffic from any direction. The channels between the raised areas shall be substantially free of exposed beads or particles.

F. The patterned material without adhesive shall have a minimum caliper of 0.065” at the

thickest portion of the patterned cross section and a minimum caliper of 0.020” at the thinnest portion of the cross section.

PART 3 – EQUIPMENT 3.1 PAINT

A. Paint shall be applied by means of a machine of the spray type capable of satisfactorily applying the paint under pressure through a nozzle spraying directly upon the pavement. The machine shall be equipped with air blast device for cleaning the pavement ahead of the painting operation, a guide pointer to keep the machine on an accurate line, and a device to agitate the paint. It shall also have a device to maintain a uniform flow and application of the paint, an automatic device to provide a broken or skip line of the length required, and at least 2 spray guns capable of being operated either individually or together. When using waterborne paint, the equipment shall be capable of heating the material from ambient air temperature to 123 degrees F. The machine shall be equipped with a bead or sphere dispenser, which can be regulated to dispense the spheres automatically at the uniform rate required.

B. Each spray application machine must be equipped with an automatic counting mechanism

capable of recording the number of linear feet of material applied to the roadway surface with an accuracy of 0.50%. Each spray application machine shall also be equipped with accurate meters, which register paint quantities for both white and yellow applied to the nearest gallon.

3.2 THERMOPLASTIC

A. The material shall be applied to the pavement by the screed extrusion method wherein one side of the shaping die is the pavement, and the other three sides are contained by, or are part of, suitable equipment for heating and controlling the flow of the material.

B. Each application machine must be equipped with an automatic counting mechanism capable

of recording the number of linear feet of material applied to the roadway surface with an accuracy of 0.50%.

C. The equipment shall be constructed to provide continuous mixing and agitation of the

material. Conveying parts of the equipment between the main material reservoir and the shaping die shall be so constructed as to prevent accumulation and clogging.

D. All parts of the equipment that come in contact with the material shall be so constructed as

to be easily accessible for cleaning and maintenance.


31 17 23 - 4

E. The equipment shall be constructed so that all mixing and conveying parts up to and

including the shaping die, maintain the material at the plastic temperature with heat transfer oil or electrical element-controlled heat. Direct fire heat transfer will not be allowed.

F. The equipment shall be so constructed as to insure continuous uniformity in the dimensions

of the stripe. The applicator shall provide a method of applying “skip” lines.

G. Glass spheres applied to the surface of the completed stripe shall be applied by an automatic bead dispenser attached to the striping machine in such a manner that the beads are dispensed almost instantaneously upon the installed line.

H. Special kettles shall be provided for melting and heating the thermoplastic material. The

kettles must be equipped with automatic thermostatic control devices so that heating can be done by controlled heat transfer rather than by direct flame, so as to provide positive temperature control and prevent over heating of the material.

I. Applicators shall be mobile and maneuverable to the extent the straight line can be followed

and normal curves can be made in a true arc. 3.3 PREFORMED PAVEMENT MARKING

A. The manufacturer shall provide automatic application equipment capable of applying an unlined, pre-coated, pressure sensitive adhesive pavement marking tape.

B. The automatic unit shall have the capability of advancing, applying and cutting the pavement

marking tape at specific pre-programmed lengths, at speeds up to 6.5 mph when towed by an appropriate vehicle.

PART 4 – EXECUTION 4.1 PAINT

A. Temporary markings on final pavement surfaces shall be carefully located and placed so as to underlie or coincide with the permanent pavement markings.

B. No paint shall be applied over a chalk line, wire, or chord, but such guide marks shall offset

the paint line to be placed.

C. Drop-on gall beads shall be uniformly applied to the painted surface at a uniform rate of not less than six pounds per gallon of paint applied.

D. Paint shall be applied so as to deposit a uniform wet film thickness of 0.015 ± inches. This is

at the rate of 17 gallons per mile, for a solid stripe 4 inches wide.

E. The general appearance shall be that of clearly delineated lines with a minimum crooked and waving appearance, due consideration being given to the contours and roughness of the pavement. Segments of broken lines shall be without mist, drip or splatter. Lines that do not meet these requirements when placed shall be removed and/or corrected by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and without extra compensation.

4.2 THERMOPLASTIC

A. The pavement temperature shall be a minimum of 50 degrees F and rising before application begins. Application shall be suspended at any time the pavement temperature falls below 50 degrees F.

B. All surfaces to be marked shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt, grease, oil and all

other foreign matter before application of the striping.


31 17 23 - 5

C. To ensure optimum adhesion of the thermoplastic applied on all Portland cement concrete

pavement, the Contractor shall apply a binder-sealer material as recommended by the thermoplastic manufacturer. A binder-sealer material shall also be applied to asphaltic concrete pavements, which have been open to traffic for ninety or more days.

D. Longitudinal lines shall be offset at least 2 inches for longitudinal joints of Portland cement

concrete pavements.

E. A minimum average film thickness of 0.090 inches for lane and edge lines shall be maintained on all markings. The film thickness shall be uniform in appearance throughout its application. The glass sphere top coating must be applied by means of a pressure type spray gun designed specifically for this purpose, and which will imbed the spheres into the line surface to at least one-half their diameter. The glass spheres shall be applied at the rate of 1 pound per 10 square feet of compound.

F. When thermoplastic is used on the final surface, the Contractor shall have the option of

using reflectorized paint installed to permanent standards at the end of each day’s work and then installing the permanent marking after the paving operation is completed. Short unmarked sections shall not be allowed. The temporary markings for the final surface will not be measured and paid for directly, by the costs are to be included in the price bid for the permanent markings.

4.3 PREFORMED PAVEMENT MARKING

A. The markings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Marking configurations shall be in accordance with the “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.”

Markings shall be applied before public traffic is allowed on the freshly paved surface. Preferably, the markings should be inlaid in the fresh surface during the final rolling of the mat, but in any case, they shall be applied before the close of the day.

END OF SECTION 32 17 23 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS

CHEATHAM COUNTY CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 32 31 13 ___________________________________________________________

32 31 13 - 1

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK This work shall consist of constructing perimeter fencing and gates at locations shown on

the plans. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Fencing and all accessories shall be produced by a single manufacturer. Submit 5 copies

of the manufacturer’s technical data, shop drawings, and installation instructions. Manufacturers shall be Stephens Pipe & Steel or approved equal. 1.3 REFERENCES ASTM A 53/A 53 M (2006) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and

Seamless ASTM A 123/A 123 M (2002) Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products ASTM A 153/A 153 M (2005) Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A 392 (2003) Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric ASTM A 824 (2001) Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for Use with Chain

Link Fence ASTM F 1043 (2004) Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain- Link

Fence Framework ASTM F 626 (1996a; R 2003) Fence Fittings ASTM F 900 (2003) Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 POSTS, RAILS, and BRACES

A. All structural and roll formed shapes shall conform to the provisions of ASTM A123 for galvanized coating.

B. All tubular members shall comply with the provisions of ASTM F 1083 for weight and coating.

C. Metal framework shall meet strength and protective coating requirements of ASTM F 1043.

D. End, Corner, and Pull Post: For fence up to and including 12’-0” in height, 3-1/2” x 3-1/2” roll formed corner section shall have a minimum bending strength of 452 pounds (2.875” outside diameter, Schedule 40 pipe with a minimum bending strength of 381 pounds).

E. Line Posts (10’-0” Maximum Spacing): Fabric up to and including 12’-0” in Height: C-section, heavy roll formed, 2.25” x 1.70” with a minimum bending


32 31 13 - 2

strength of 314 pounds (2.375” outside diameter, Schedule 40 pipe with a minimum bending strength of 201 pounds).

F. Gate Posts: Gate leaves up to and including 6’-0” Wide: 3-1/2” x 3-1/2” roll formed section (2.875” outside diameter, Schedule 40 pipe).

G. Top Rail: ASTM F 1083. The top rail shall be a 1.625” x 1.25” roll formed section with a minimum bending strength of 192 pounds (1.660” outside diameter, Schedule 40 pipe with a minimum bending strength of 202 pounds).

1. Furnish in the manufacturer’s standard lengths of approximately 21’-0”,

with couplings approximately 6” long for each joint. One coupling in each five shall have an expansion spring. Provide means for attaching top rails securely to each gate, corner, pull and end posts. The top rail shall form a continuous brace from end to each run of fence.

H. Tension Wire: Tension wire shall be Type I or Type II, Class 4 coating, in

accordance with ASTM A 824. I. Post Bracing Assembly: ASTM F 1083. To match top rail. Brace rail assembly

shall be complete with a 3/8” diameter rod and adjustable take-up.

2.02 CHAIN LINK FABRIC

A. ASTM A 392, Class 2, zinc-coated steel wire with minimum coating weight of 2.0 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface. Fabric shall be fabricated of 9-gauge wire woven in 2-inch mesh. Fabric height shall be 6 feet

B. Selvage Edges: Fabric 72” and more shall be knuckled at the bottom selvage and be twisted and barbed at the top.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. ASTM F 626. Ferrous accessories shall be zinc or aluminum coated. B. Post Tops: Pressed steel or malleable iron (designed as a weathertight closure

cap for tubular posts). Where top rail is used, provide tops to permit the passage of the top rail.

C. Stretcher Bars (for tubular end, corner, pull, or gate posts only): One piece lengths equal to the full height of the fabric, with a minimum cross section of 3/16” x ¾”. Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post and two for each corner and pull post.

D. Stretcher Bar Bands: Heavy pressed steel spaced not over 15” on center to secure stretcher bars to tubular end, corner pull, and gate post.

E. Wire Ties: For tying fabric to line posts, use 11-gauge steel wire clips for C-section posts and a minimum 9-gauge aluminum wire ties for tubular posts, spaced 14” on center. For tying fabric to rails and braces, use 9-gauge aluminum wire ties spaced 24” on center. For tying fabric to tension wire, use 11-gauge hog rings spaced 24” on center.

F. Miscellaneous hardware coatings shall conform to ASTM A 153/A 153M unless modified.

2.04 GATES

A. Gates shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 900. B. Fabricate gate perimeter frames of 1.90” outside diameter tubular members

galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Provide additional horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and to allow for attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories.


32 31 13 - 3

C. Assemble gate frames by welding or fittings and rivets for rigid connections. Use same fabric as for fence,(Mechanical Yard gate fabric shall be vinyl coated) unless otherwise indicated. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges, and tie at top and bottom edges. Attach stretcher bars to gate frame at not more than 15” on center. Attach hardware with rivets or by other means that will provide security against removal or breakage.

D. Provide diagonal cross bracing that consists of 3/8” diameter adjustable length truss rods on gates where necessary to provide frame rigidity without sag or twist.

E. Gate Hardware: Provide the following hardware and accessories, with a heavy galvanized finish, for each gate:

1. Hinges: Pressed steel or malleable iron to suit gate size, nonlift-off type,

offset to permit 180 degrees gate opening. Provide one pair of hinges for each leaf.

2. Latch: Forked type or plunger bar type to permit operation from either side of the gate. Provide padlock eye as an integral part of the latch.

3. Keeper: Provide a keeper for all vehicle gates that automatically engages the gate leaf and holds it in the open position until manually released.

4. Double Gates: Provide gate stops for all double gates consisting of mushroom type or flush plate with anchors. Set in concrete to engage the center drop rod or plunger bar. Provide locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, with one padlock for locking both gate leaves.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The packing for all products should be Level C. B. Set all posts in a 3,000 psi concrete footing. Trowel smooth the top of each

footing at a 20 angle from the post to the surrounding ground so as to shed water away from the post. The post shall extend to the full depth of the footing. The diameter and depth of footings for various fence heights shall be as specified on the drawings.

C. Install all fencing to the limits shown on the drawings. Install end or corner posts at any break in the alignment greater than 20 degrees. Install intermediate posts between end or corner posts, spaced equally at a maximum of 10’ center to center. Install end, corner, or gate posts on both sides of a gate. Only one end or corner post shall be installed at the junction of different heights of fence and shall be consistent with the largest post required at the junction. Install gates to allow a clear and level swing in either direction to their maximum limit. Set all posts with a vertical tolerance of less than 1” in 10’ as measured with a plumb bob. Install gate stops.

D. All corner, terminal and gate posts for fence 6’ and higher shall have a midrail and 3/8 round adjustable truss rod to the next post.

E. All gates shall have a full wraparound hinge system with a positive latch with provision for a padlock.

F. All fences shall have a bottom tension wire attached to the fabric and posts. G. Rolling vehicle gates shall have a 12“ wide x 18” thick reinforced concrete grade

beam throughout the gates operating length.

END OF SECTION 32 31 13 – CHAIN-LINK FENCING

CHEATHAM COUNTY LANDSCAPING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 32 91 00

32 91 00 – 1

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Establish lawn areas covered by new construction as defined on construction

documents. B. Provide water for lawn operations.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Guideline specification to turf grass sodding; American Sod Producers

Association (ASPA); 1988. B. Randomly select five soil samples from areas to be established as lawns and

allow an adjustment of contract if the fertilizer or limestone requirements need to be adjusted.

C. Have selected soil samples analyzed by an approved laboratory, for nitrogen,

phosphorus, and potash content, and pH level. (Note: Owner's Representative will determine acceptability of testing laboratory.)

D. When laboratory analysis is received, deliver copy to the Owner's

Representative. Owner's Representative will then specify the exact fertilizer, soil amendments, and recommended quantities for application.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit items to Owner's Representative in accordance with this section. B. Submit required information about fertilizer, seeds and sod, and obtain approval

of Owner's Representative before delivering items to project site.

1. Fertilizer: Manufacturer's statement of analysis, indicating percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash, proportion of organic and inorganic matter contained, and availability of plant food.

2. Seeds: Certification stating that seeds meet requirements. 3. Sod: Certification stating that sod is free from disease, nematodes, and

undesirable insects; is not subject to quarantine restrictions; and is equal to or exceeds quality specified.

1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver fertilizer and seed to the project site in manufacturer's original, unopened

containers bearing guaranteed analyses of products. B. Deliver sod tagged with the correct botanical and common names of the species.

Protect from breaking and drying out. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours following delivery.


32 91 00 – 2

c. Contractor shall water sod up to substantial completion but not less than 2 weeks. Contractor to mow up to substantial completion but not less than 2 mowings.

D. Store fertilizer and seeds off ground in a dry, cool area. E. Store sod in an area to prevent exposure to wind or direct sunlight and from

drying out and heating up. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 FERTILIZER AND LIMESTONE

A. Fertilizer and limestone specified here is a guide to determining cost estimate.

Exact contents and quantities required will be determined after soil analyses are made, but no price adjustment will be made by Owner because of minor variations.

1. Fertilizer: a complete fertilizer with organic base containing 10 percent nitrogen,

10 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. Provide material in free flowing form.

2. Limestone: finely ground limestone containing at least 45 percent calcium oxide,

pulverized so that residue on #30 and #200 sieves is not more than 5 percent and 15 percent, respectively.

2.02 SEED

A. Grass Seed: The seed shall meet purity and germination rates as required by Department of Agriculture, and no below-standard seed will be accepted.

1.Grass seed furnished under these specifications shall be packed in new bags or in sound bags that have not been mended.

B. A certificate of purity for all seed will be submitted to the Owner's Representative.

C. Samples of materials may be requested for verification of purity at the discretion of the Owner's Representative.

2.03 SEED MATERIALS

A. Inspect and test seed for germination and purity prior to mixing.


32 91 00 – 3

B. Uniformly mix by Group: Seed Name Quantity % by weight

GROUP "A" Lespedeza (common or Korean) 20% Sericea Lespedeza 15% Kentucky 3l Fescue 40% English Rye 25%

GROUP "B" Kentucky 3l Fescue 55% Redtop 15% English Rye 30%

GROUP "C" Sericea Lespedeza 50% Kentucky 3l Fescue 30% English Rye 20% C. Use Group "A" seed from February 1 to August l.

D. Use Group "B" seed from August 1 to December 1, with the exception that either Group "A or "B" may be used during the month of August.

E. Use Group "C" seed from February l to December l only when specified on the Plans or

otherwise approved.

F. All seed shall meet the requirements of the Tennessee Department of Agriculture.

G. Furnish the Designer a certified laboratory report showing the analysis of the seed to be furnished. The report shall bear the signature of a senior seed technologist.

H. Inoculant for Legumes:

1. Nitrogen fixing bacteria cultures adapted to the particular seed to be treated.

2. Furnish in containers of a size sufficient to treat the specified quantity of seed to be planted.

2.02 MULCH MATERIALS

A. Hay composed of approved stalks from grasses, sedges, or legumes; or straw composed of stalks from rye, oats, wheat, or other approved grains.

B. Air dried and reasonably free from noxious weeds, weed seeds, and other detrimental

plant growth. C. Suitable for spreading with mulch blower machinery. d. No plastic twine shall be used with straw.


32 91 00 – 4

2.03 JUTE MESH

A. Open plain weave of single jute yarn and non-toxic to vegetation.

B. Tag jute rolls for identification with 58 warp ends per yard, 4l weft ends per yard and weighing approximately 0.9 pounds per square yard with an acceptable tolerance of 5 percent.

2.04 STAPLES

A. New and unused, machine made of No. 11 gauge steel wire formed into a "U" shape. 2.05 SOD MATERIALS

A. Live dense, well-rooted growth of permanent grasses, free from Johnson grass, nutgrass, and other undesirable grasses or weeds and well-suited for the proposed application to particular soils.

B. Sod placed around the building shall be Kentucky 31 Turf-type Fescue or Bermuda sod

as required by the owner and seasonal limitations. B. Cleanly cut in strips having a reasonably uniform thickness of not less than 2 ½ inches, a

uniform width of approximately 8 inches, and a minimum length of 12 inches.

2.06 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZERS

A. Furnish in standard containers with the brand name, weight and guaranteed analysis of the contents clearly marked.

B. Comply with Federal, State, and local laws.

C. Ammonium Nitrate shall be a standard commercial product, having a minimum of 33.5 percent nitrogen.

D. Agricultural limestone shall contain a minimum of 85% of calcium carbonate and

magnesium carbonate combined, and be of particular size that 85% will pass a No. 10 mesh sieve.

2.07 WATER

A. Free from harmful organisms or other objectionable materials. The contractor shall provide the required water for stabilized areas until final acceptance of the project or 3 weeks, whichever is longer.


32 91 00 – 5

2.08 TOPSOIL

A. Natural, friable fertile, fine sandy loam processing characteristics of representative top soils in the vicinity which produce heavy growths of vegetation.

B. Free from subsoil, noxious weeds, stones larger than one inch in diameter, lime, cement,

ashes, slag, or other deleterious matter.

C. Well drained in its original position and free from toxic quantities of acid or alkaline elements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION All unpaved areas disturbed by the construction of this project, or any other areas as specified, shall have a stand of grass developed by one of the following methods: Seeding will generally be acceptable. Sodding shall be used around the school buildings as directed in the Contract. 3.0l SEEDING

A. Scarify, disc, harrow, rake or otherwise work each area to be seeded until it has been loosened and pulverized to a depth as directed by the Designer.

B. Uniformly incorporate fertilizer into the soil for a depth of approximately l/2" at the rate of:

1. Not less than 20 lbs. per 1000 square feet for grade 10-l0-10 or equivalent.

2. Not less than 100 lbs. per 1000 square feet for agricultural limestone.

C. Fertilizer need not be incorporated in the soil as specified above when mixed with seed in water and applied with power sprayer equipment.

D. Sow seed of the specified group as soon as preparation of the seedbed has been

completed. E. Sow uniformly by means of a rotary seeder, hydraulic equipment, or other satisfactory

means at the rate of eight (8) pounds per l000 square feet, unless otherwise specified.

F. Inoculate Group "C" seed and seeds of legumes, when sown alone, before sowing in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the Inoculant.

G. Do not perform seeding during windy weather, or when the ground surface is frozen, wet

or otherwise non-tillable. No seeding shall be performed during December through February unless otherwise permitted.

H. When specified, provide seeding with mulch:

l. Spread hay or straw mulch evenly over the seeded area at an approximate rate of 75 pounds per l000 square feet immediately following the seeding operations. This rate may be varied by the Designer, depending on the texture and condition of the mulch material and the characteristics of the area seeded.

2. Hold hay or straw mulch in place by the use of a mulch binder applied at the approximate

rate of 4 gallons per l000 square feet as required.


32 91 00 – 6

3. Cover bridges, guardrails, signs and appurtenances, if the mulch binder is applied in such a way that it would come in contact with or discolor the structures.

4. When wood fiber mulch is used, uniformly apply at the rate of 28 to 35 pounds per 1000

square feet with hydraulic mulching equipment.

3.02 SODDING – NOT USED 3.03 TOPSOIL

A. The contractor shall save and stockpile the topsoil removed from the excavation area or otherwise obtain topsoil to restore the area and reestablish an acceptable stand of grass.

B. Prepare landscape area to receive topsoil in close conformity to the lines and grades

shown on the drawings.

C. Place topsoil at depths and locations shown on the drawings or as otherwise necessary to promote a good stand of grass.

3.04 MOWING

A. Contractor shall mow all seeded and sodded areas a minimum of two (2) times after lawn is established.

END OF SECTION 32 91 00 - LANDSCAPING

CHEATHAM COUNTY SEEDING HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 32 92 19 _____________________________________________________________________________________________

32 92 19 – 1


A. Establish permanent lawn areas covered by new construction as defined on construction

documents.

B. Provide water for lawn operations.


A. Section 31 00 00- Earthwork B. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing C. Section 31 23 33 – Trenching and Backfilling D. Section 31 25 00 – Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control


A. Guideline specification to turf grass sodding; American Sod Producers Association

(ASPA); 1988. B. Randomly select five soil samples from areas to be established as lawns and allow an

adjustment of contract if the fertilizer or limestone requirements need to be adjusted. C. Have selected soil samples analyzed by an approved laboratory, for nitrogen, phosphorus,

and potash content, and pH level. (Note: Owner's Representative will determine acceptability of testing laboratory.)

D. When laboratory analysis is received, deliver copy to the Owner's Representative. Owner's

Representative will then specify the exact fertilizer, soil amendments, and recommended quantities for application.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit items to Owner's Representative in accordance with this section. B. Submit required information about fertilizer, seeds and sod, and obtain approval of Owner's

Representative before delivering items to project site. C. Fertilizer: Manufacturer's statement of analysis, indicating percentages of nitrogen,

phosphorus, and potash, proportion of organic and inorganic matter contained, and availability of plant food.

D. Seeds: Certification stating that seeds meet requirements.

1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver fertilizer and seed to the project site in manufacturer's original, unopened

containers bearing guaranteed analyses of products. B. Deliver sod tagged with the correct botanical and common names of the species. Protect

from breaking and drying out. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours following delivery.


32 92 19 – 2

C. Store fertilizer and seeds off ground in a dry, cool area.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 FERTILIZER AND LIMESTONE

A. Fertilizer and limestone specified here is a guide to determining cost estimate. Exact

contents and quantities required will be determined after soil analyses are made, but no price adjustment will be made by Owner because of minor variations.

1. Fertilizer: a complete fertilizer with organic base containing 10 percent nitrogen,

10 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. Provide material in free flowing form.

2. Limestone: finely ground limestone containing at least 45 percent calcium oxide,

pulverized so that residue on #30 and #200 sieves is not more than 5 percent and 15 percent, respectively.

2.02 SEED

A. Grass Seed: The seed shall meet purity and germination rates as required by Department of Agriculture, and no below-standard seed will be accepted.

1. Grass seed furnished under these specifications shall be packed in new bags or in sound bags that have not been mended.

B. A certificate of purity for all seed will be submitted to the Owner's Representative.

C. Samples of materials may be requested for verification of purity at the discretion of the Owner's Representative.

2.03 SEED MATERIALS

A. Inspect and test seed for germination and purity prior to mixing. B. Wet, moldy, or otherwise contaminated seed shall be rejected. C. Weed seed content shall not exceed .25. Germination percentage shall be 87 percent

minimum. D. All grass seed shall be approved by ENGINEER and in accordance with local regulations

prior to installation: a. Bermuda Seed Mix shall be Common Bermuda, and shall be sown between April 1

and August 1. Sow at a rate of 50 lbs. per acre. b. Fescue Seed Mix shall be BMI Five Star Fescue Seed Mix, and shall be sown

between early September and mid-October or early March to early May. Sow at a rate of 30 lbs. per acre.

c. See Landscape Plan for areas of seeding. Some areas of overlap between Bermuda and Fescue may be necessary based on site conditions.

d. See section 31 25 00, Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control for Temporary Grass schedule.

E. Furnish the Designer a certified laboratory report showing the analysis of the seed to be furnished. The report shall bear the signature of a senior seed technologist.


32 92 19 – 3

F. Inoculant for Legumes:

1. Nitrogen fixing bacteria cultures adapted to the particular seed to be treated. 2. Furnish in containers of a size sufficient to treat the specified quantity of seed to

be planted. 2.04 MULCH MATERIALS

A. Hay composed of approved stalks from grasses, sedges, or legumes; or straw composed of stalks from rye, oats, wheat, or other approved grains.

B. Air dried and reasonably free from noxious weeds, weed seeds, and other detrimental plant

growth. C. Suitable for spreading with mulch blower machinery.

2.05 JUTE MESH

A. Open plain weave of single jute yarn and non-toxic to vegetation.

B. Tag jute rolls for identification with 58 warp ends per yard, 4l weft ends per yard and weighing approximately 0.9 pounds per square yard with an acceptable tolerance of 5 percent.

2.06 STAPLES

A. New and unused, machine made of No. 11 gauge steel wire formed into a "U" shape. 2.07 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZERS

A. Unless otherwise specified, inorganic 10-20-l0 nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potash for seeding and 15-15-15 or 10-10-l0 for sodding.

B. Furnish in standard containers with the brand name, weight and guaranteed analysis of

the contents clearly marked. C. Comply with Federal, State, and local laws.

D. Ammonium Nitrate shall be a standard commercial product, having a minimum of 33.5 percent nitrogen.

E. Agricultural limestone shall contain a minimum of 85% of calcium carbonate and

magnesium carbonate combined, and be of particular size that 85% will pass a No. 10 mesh sieve.

2.08 WATER

A. Free from harmful organisms or other objectionable materials. 2.9 TOPSOIL

A. Natural, friable fertile, fine sandy loam processing characteristics of representative top soils in the vicinity which produce heavy growths of vegetation.


32 92 19 – 4

B. Free from subsoil, noxious weeds, stones larger than one inch in diameter, lime, cement, ashes, slag, or other deleterious matter.

B. Well drained in its original position and free from toxic quantities of acid or alkaline

elements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION All unpaved areas disturbed by the construction of this project, or any other areas as specified, shall have a stand of grass developed by one of the following methods: Seeding will generally be acceptable. Sodding shall be used around the buildings as directed in the Contract and/or as shown on the plans. 3.01 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil that is reused from the existing site shall be temporarily stored and separated from fill material or soils not designated as topsoil.

B. The contractor shall save and stockpile the topsoil removed from the excavation area or

otherwise obtain topsoil to restore the area and reestablish an acceptable stand of grass. It is the contractor’s responsibility to conserve and protect the site soils for reuse or properly bid and plan for offsite top soil to be brought in to meet the specified topsoil thickness in all lawn areas.

C. Prepare landscape area to receive topsoil in close conformity to the lines and grades

shown on the drawings. D. Place and spread topsoil over the area designated on the Plans or as determined by

ENGINEER, to a depth of 6 inches ± 1- inch or to such depth as specified on the Plans to promote a good stand of grass.

E. Before beginning seeding operations in any area, complete the placing of topsoil and final

grading, and have the work approved by the Engineer. Do not install seed prior to Owner or Engineer approval of the topsoil placement.

3.02 SEEDING

A. Scarify, disc, harrow, rake, Harley rake and work each area to be seeded until it has been loosened and pulverized to a minimum depth of 4” or to a depth as indicated on the plans. Seedbed shall be free of all rocks, debris and vegetative refuse.

B. Uniformly incorporate fertilizer into the soil for a depth of approximately l/2" at the rate of:

1. Not less than 20 lbs. per 1000 square feet for grade 10-l0-10 or equivalent.

2. Not less than 100 lbs. per 1000 square feet for agricultural limestone.

C. Fertilizer need not be incorporated in the soil as specified above when mixed with seed in water and applied with power sprayer equipment.

D. Sow seed of the specified group as soon as preparation of the seedbed has been

completed. If seeding does not occur immediately after the preparation of the seedbed as defined in paragraph “A” above, then seedbed shall be re-worked in accordance with paragraph “A” and seeded immediately.


32 92 19 – 5

E. Sow uniformly by means of a rotary seeder, hydraulic equipment, or other satisfactory

means at the rates defined in Article 2.02, unless otherwise specified. F. Cover seed to a depth of 1/8” by raking or harrowing. G. Do not perform seeding during windy weather (winds exceeding 10 mph), or when the

ground surface is frozen, wet or otherwise non-tillable. No seeding shall be performed during December through February unless otherwise permitted.

H. When specified, provide seeding with mulch:

I. Spread hay or straw mulch evenly over the seeded area at an approximate rate of 75 pounds per l000 square feet immediately following the seeding operations. This rate may be varied by the Designer, depending on the texture and condition of the mulch material and the characteristics of the area seeded.

J. Hold hay or straw mulch in place by the use of a mulch binder applied at the approximate

rate of 4 gallons per l000 square feet as required.

K. Cover bridges, guardrails, signs and appurtenances, if the mulch binder is applied in such a way that it would come in contact with or discolor the structures.

L. When wood fiber mulch is used, uniformly apply at the rate of 28 to 35 pounds per 1000 square feet with hydraulic mulching equipment.

M. Rolled blankets or matting shall be applied in the locations shown on the plans and in

additional areas as needed throughout the project to control concentrated flows or wash out areas where straw is not sufficient. It is the contractor’s responsibility to stabilize the site by the means necessary to establish a grass lawn.

3.03 SODDING – NOT USED 3.04 Watering

A. Watering shall be completed at least three times per week when natural rains do not occur within this time period of at least 1/4” each event. Thoroughly wet the surface cover of mulch and underlying soil. Grass that shows signs of stress or stunted growth shall receive additional watering as needed per the season of growth. Owner will take over watering schedule only after grass has been fully established across the entire site for a period of at least 30 days and after the project has been finally accepted by the owner.

B. Contractor will be responsible for the cost of watering, beyond any allowance that owner has provided, until the owner takes over the water schedule.

C. Water that is needed prior to a domestic water source being made available on the site

shall be brought in by a tank and applied with a pumping system as needed. D. Contractor shall provide a watering tank or truck and necessary pumping systems for

seeding/sod areas that are too far removed from the source of the site utility water. E. Utilize hoses and sprinkler devices to gradually wet all areas of the site with new grass or

sod growth. Rotate and move sprinklers as needed to cover all areas. Automatic timers may be utilized to reduce labor burden of watering and to prevent unnecessary costs of overwatering in certain areas.


32 92 19 – 6

3.04 MOWING

A. Contractor shall mow all seeded areas a minimum of two (2) times after lawn is established or until the owner accepts the facility and begin their own maintenance. Grass shall be mowed before it reaches an 8” in height on new lawns and shall be maintained below this level throughout the period of the project.

3.05 INSPECTION

A. The Owner/Engineer will review the seeded areas for acceptance 30 days after installation. This acceptance by the Engineer is for the purpose of payment only. No payment will be made on seeded areas prior to this 30-day inspection and prior to final acceptance.

B. If at the time of the 30-day inspection the Owner/Engineer observes any areas of concern, the Owner/Engineer will notify the Contractor and payment will be withheld on noncompliant seeded areas until they are properly addressed. If retainage payments are tied to this line item, the contractor may be in jeopardy of delaying any final retainage payment until seeding operations are finally accepted.

C. If seeded areas do not show a uniform or healthy stand of grass, with a 90 percent or greater coverage after 14 calendar days, reseed and/or re-fertilize those areas as directed by the Owner without any additional cost to the Owner.

D. Contractor will be responsible for establishing and maintaining a healthy stand of grass by any means necessary.

END OF SECTION 32 92 19 - SEEDING

CHEATHAM COUNTY CONCRETE STRUCTURES HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 33 05 00

33 05 00 - 1


This work shall consist of constructing manholes, catch basins, inlets and pipe end walls at the locations shown on the Plans, and in reasonably close conformity to the lines, grades, and design dimensions shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. The work shall include the furnishing and installation of such incidental appurtenances and connections to pipe and other structures as may be required to complete the construction as shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.


A. Section 33 40 00 - Storm Drainage Systems B. Section 32 16 13 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for materials and items, including manhole frames, covers, steps, grates and castings.

B. Shop drawings detailing reinforcement, fabrication, structural steel, required openings, etc.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials

1. ASTM A-36: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A-615-90: Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A-48: Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 4. ASTM C-478: Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole

Sections. PART 2 – PRODUCTS

A. Concrete Manholes and Catchbasins:

1. Concrete Base: Precast or cast-in-place, at Contractor’s option. Use concrete, which will attain a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3,000 psi.

2. Precast Concrete Manholes and Catchbasins: ANSI/ASTM C 478, sized as indicated.

3. Structural Steel: All rolled plates, shapes and bars for structural use shall conform to ASTM A 36.

4. Steel Bar Reinforcement: All steel reinforcement shall be billet steel bars conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-615, Grade 60.

B. Metal Accessories:

1. Manhole Frames and Covers: Grey cast iron, ANSI/ASTM A 48, Class 30 B.

a. All castings shall be cleaned of sand and scale by sand blasting or other effective methods so as to present a smooth, clean, and uniform surface.

b. Furnish covers with cast-in legend (“STORM” or “SANITARY” to suit installation) on roadway face.

2. Manhole Steps: Grey cast iron, ANSI/ASTM A 48, Class 30 B, integrally cast into manhole sidewalls, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Catch Basin Frames and Gratings: Grey cast iron, ANSI/ASTM A 48, Class 30 B.


33 05 00 - 2

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION

A. Before excavation is started the Contractor when required, will set stakes locating and outlining the structure.

B. All excavation shall be cut to the lines and elevations indicated on the Plans, or as directed

by the Engineer.

C. Inclined surfaces of rock used as foundation shall be excavated either level or in steps. When necessary, the surface of rock foundation shall be roughened, or suitable anchors installed.

D. The Contractor will be held responsible for protecting his excavation and shall take every

precaution to maintain the excavation intact. 3.2 FOUNDATION PREPARATION

A. When the foundation has been completed to foundation elevation as given, the Engineer shall be notified and the construction therein withheld pending his inspection and approval of the foundation.

B. Rock used as foundation shall be stripped and cleaned of all overlying materials. All loose,

disintegrated, or light slabby portions of the rock shall be removed.

C. Unsatisfactory material in the foundation shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory material placed in layers not exceeding eight inches in loose depth and compacted to 95% of maximum density up to the foundation elevation.

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. All areas that have been excavated, the volume of which is not occupied by the structure, shall be refilled with acceptable earth material to the normal ground surface.

B. Granular backfill for structures shall be AASHTO M 43 #57 or #67 and shall be placed in

layers not exceeding eight inches in loose depth and compacted to 95% of maximum density.

C. Backfill shall not be placed against a structure of a section or unit thereof, until

representative specimens of the concrete in the structure, section or unit, attain a compressive strength of 3,000 psi.

3.4 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

A. All concrete construction shall be accomplished in accordance with the requirements of Section 32 16 13 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

3.5 INVERTS

A. Inverts shall be of concrete, which will attain a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3,000 psi and shall conform to the shaped indicated on the Plans.

B. Inverts shall be so constructed as to cause the least possible resistance to flow. The shape

of the inverts shall conform uniformly to inlet and outlet pipes.


33 05 00 - 3

3.6 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES A. Place precast concrete sections as shown on drawings. Where manholes occur in

pavements, set tops of frames and covers flush with finish surface. Elsewhere, set tops 3” above finish surface, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use epoxy bonding compound where manhole steps are mortared into manhole walls. C. Apply bituminous mastic coating at joints of sections.

3.7 CATCH BASINS

A. Construct catch basins to the sizes and shapes indicated. B. Use concrete which will attain a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3,000 psi. C. Set cast-iron frames and gratings to elevations indicated.

3.8 PIPE END WALLS

A. Construct pipe end walls to the sizes and shapes indicated.

B. Use concrete, which will attain a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 3,000 psi. 3.9 TAP CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to existing conduits and underground structures, so that finished work will

conform as nearly as practicable to requirements specified for new work. 3.10 CASTINGS AND FITTINGS

A. Castings and fittings shall be handled in a manner that will prevent damage. All damaged castings and fittings shall be rejected.

B. All castings and fittings shall be placed in the positions indicated on the Plans or as directed

by the Engineer, and shall be set true to line and grade.

C. When castings are to be placed upon constructed masonry, the bearing surface of masonry shall be brought true to line and grade and present an even bearing surface in order that the entire face of back of the casting will come in contact with the masonry.

D. Castings shall be set in mortar beds or anchored to the masonry as indicated on the Plans or

as directed by the Engineer.

E. Unless otherwise specified, gray iron casting shall be cleaned and treated with two coats of bituminous paint.

END OF SECTION 33 05 00 – CONCRETE STRUCTURES

CHEATHAM COUNTY WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 33 10 00

33 10 00– 1

PART l - GENERAL l.l WORK INCLUDED A. Installation, testing and disinfection of water service and fire lines and

appurtenances. l.2 RELATED WORK Section 310000 – EARTHWORK PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SERVICE PIPE A. Polyethylene and PVC Pipe: Metallic detector tape shall be installed above the service line for all nonmetallic

service lines between the main and the meter.

Polyethylene or PVC is acceptable for use between the meter and the building in accordance with the Standard Plumbing Code. Polyethylene or PVC plastic pipe is not approved for service lines from the main to the meter unless said service pipe is 4 inches or greater in which case class 200 or schedule 40 PVC may be used.

B. Copper Pipe: (1) Seamless copper tubing meeting the requirements of ASTM B-88, Type

K for 3/4" and 1". Copper tubing larger than 1" may be hard or soft. All underground copper to copper connections are to be by compression coupling, no solder sweat joints.

(2) Contain not less than 99.90% copper and not more than 0.04% phosphorous.

(3) Suitable for use with a working water pressure of 160 psi. (4) 3/4 inch nominal diameter unless otherwise specified or shown on the

Plans. (5) Service pipe shall be used to connect the corporation stop with the meter

yoke. Use the minimum length required to make a straight line connection including a gooseneck. The minimum length of service shall be 5 feet in order to facilitate the location of the services with metallic pipe locators.

2.1 VALVES A. Valves shall be quarter turn ball valves of brass or PVC construction and capable

of withstanding the service pressures. B. Valve Boxes: (1) Heavy roadway type equipped with a cover containing the word

"WATER" in raised letters on the top.


33 10 00– 2

(2) Base of such size as to permit its installation without allowing it to come in contact with either the valve or the pipe.

(3) In paved areas, the top of the box casting shall be made level with the adjacent pavement. In unpaved areas, the box shall be level with the adjacent ground and encircled with a concrete collar 4" thick and 2' in diameter.

3.1 PREPARATION A. Prior to laying pipe, prepare suitable bedding according to Section 31 23 33

Trenching and Backfilling. B. Unless otherwise specified, provide all water services with a minimum of 3 feet of

cover in roadways and 2 feet of cover in open areas, unless ductile iron pipe or concrete encasement is used. Pipe protection may also be required in other areas subject to erosion and or very heavy traffic.

C. Before placing pipe in the trench inspect for cracks or other defects. Remove

defective pipe from the construction site. D. Swab the interior of the pipe to remove all undesirable material. E. Prepare the bell end and remove undesirable material from the gasket and

gasket recess. 3.2 INSTALLING WATERLINES A. Lay all pipe on a uniform grade and with deflections not exceeding the pipe

manufacturer's recommendations. B. After applying gasket lubricant, take extreme care to keep the spigot end from

contacting the ground. C. Hone the pipe with suitable tools or equipment to provide a smooth beveled edge

on plain end sections. D. Closely follow the manufacturer's instruction in laying and joining pipe. E. Cut pipe for inserting valves, fittings, etc., in a neat and workmanlike manner

without damaging the pipe so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.

F. Locate waterlines in relation to other piped utilities in accordance with Section 33

11 13 Separation of Pipe Utilities. 3.3 IDENTIFYING TAPE AND WIRE

The location of all nonmetallic water mains installed under these specifications shall be marked by the use of a continuous blue tape, minimum three inches in width, made of minimum 5 mil thick polyethylene plastic with a 0.5 mil thick aluminum metallic core or backing. The tape shall be buried in the trench, above


33 10 00– 3

the pipe, no more than two feet below the surface. The tape shall be marked indelibly with the words “Water Main Below” or similar wording to warn unwary excavators. An insulated minimum 14 gauge tracer wire shall also be installed in the ditch immediately along the water line, either attached to or periodically wrapped around the line at or near the bottom of the ditch. The wire shall be branched off and brought to the surface in an approved box at intervals of 500'± to allow convenient surfaces access to the wire for pipe locator connection.

3.4 ACCEPTANCE OF INSTALLATION A. If any test of pipe laid discloses leakage, locate and repair the defective material

until the leakage is within the specified allowance.

B. Repair all visible leaks regardless of the amount of leakage. 3.5 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES A. Flush waterlines clean prior to disinfection. B. Thoroughly disinfect waterlines prior to placing in service. (1) Use chlorine disinfecting agent applied to produce a 50 ppm dosage. (2) Allow water to escape from the ends of all lines to cause dispersion of

the chlorine solution into all parts of the system. (3) Operate all valves and hydrants during the time disinfection is occurring. (4) Retain the chlorine solution in the lines for a period of 24 hours. (5) At the end of the 24 hour period, the residual chlorine must be a

minimum of 25 ppm. Otherwise, repeat the disinfection procedure again. (6) Upon refilling the lines, collect a sample for bacteriological analysis. If

the sample is acceptable, the lines may be connected to the system. Otherwise repeat the disinfection procedure until acceptable samples are obtained.

(7) The contractor will collect a water sample for microbial analysis. If the sample is acceptable, the lines may be connected to the system. Otherwise repeat the

disinfection procedure until acceptable samples are obtained.

END OF SECTION 331000 – WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

CHEATHAM COUNTY SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 33 30 00

33 30 00 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED Installation of sanitary sewerage systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Section 31 00 00: Earthwork B. Section 33 10 00: Water Distribution Systems PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Manufactured from virgin, National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved resin

conforming to ASTM D-l784. B. Unless otherwise specified, all PVC gravity sewer pipe and fittings shall conform

to ASTM D-3034 and have a Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) of 35. C. The gaskets used for joining PVC sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM F-477. D. All PVC gravity sewer pipe shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name,

nominal diameter, SDR, ASTM, D-3074, and NSF approval seal. E. PVC force mains shall meet the requirements of ASTM D-224l and shall meet the

other requirements as specified herein for PVC water mains. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Class "A" for all pipe and structures. Class "B" for encasements and manhole

foundations. 2.3 CASTINGS FOR FRAME AND COVERS A. Gray iron, Class 30, unless otherwise specified, meeting AASHTO M-108. The

standard is Bouchard No. ll50 or equal. A clear opening of 24 inches is required and covers must be interchangeable to be considered equal.

B. Cleaned and coated with bituminous paint that will produce an acceptable finish

that is not affected by exposure to hot or cold weather. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prior to laying pipe, prepare suitable bedding. B. Before placing pipe in the trench, field inspect for cracks or other defects; remove

defective pipe from the construction site.


33 30 00 - 2

C. Swab the interior of the pipe to remove all undesirable material. D. Prepare the bell and remove undesirable material from the gasket and gasket

recess. 3.2 INSTALLING GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS A. Lay pipe true to the lines and grades from the grade and alignment stakes, or

equally usable references. (1) Where laser equipment is used, provide offset hubs at every manhole

location for purposes of checking grade between sections. (2) Where batter boards are used, furnish stakes at intervals of 50 feet along

the route of the pipeline. (3) Set stakes at such distance from centerline of excavations as is suitable

for the excavating method and machinery used. (4) Provide and use accurately set batter boards at each 50 foot interval in

establishing the bottom invert of each pipe laid.

B. Accurately establish the centerline of each pipe using a string stretched between targets and a plumb line extended to the centerline of the pipe.

C. Carefully inspect all pipe and each fitting prior to its placement in the trench, and

reject and remove any defective pipe or fitting from the job site. D. Lay pipe progressively up grade, with bell upstream in such a manner as to form

close, concentric joints with smooth bottom inverts. Joining of all pipe shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

E. Bed each pipe section in accordance with Section 022l0 of the Clarksville Gas &

Water Standard Specifications. F. Unless otherwise specified, provide all gravity sewer lines with a minimum of 4

feet of cover in roadways and 3 feet of cover in open areas, unless ductile iron pipe or concrete encasement is used. Pipe protection may also be required in other areas subject to erosion, very heavy traffic, or along property lines where future fence posts could be anticipated.

G. Do not allow walking on completed pipelines until backfill has been placed to a

depth of at least 6 inches above the crown of the pipe. H. Keep the interior of the pipe free of all unneeded material, and upon completion

of a section between any two manholes it shall be possible to view a complete circle of light when looking through the pipe.

I. When laying pipe ceases, close the open ends of the pipe with a suitable plug for

preventing the entrance of foreign materials. J. Couplings and adapters used for joining dissimilar gravity pipe materials, for

repairing and rejoining sections of gravity sewer, and for connecting the first full


33 30 00 - 3

joint of pipe to a short stub through a manhole wall shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-594 -594.

K. All couplings and adapters for gravity sewer pipe shall be of rubber, plastic and

metallic materials that will not be attached by municipal wastewaters or aggressive elements in the soil and conform to ASTM C-425, Section 5.

3.3 IDENTIFYING TAPE: A. The location of all non-metallic service laterals and force mains lines installed

under these specifications shall be marked by the use of a continuous tape, two inches in width, made of polyethylene plastic with a metallic core. The tape shall be buried in the trench, above the pipe, not more than two feet below the surface. The tape shall be marked indelibly with the words "Sewer Main Below" or similar wording to warn unwary excavators.

B. CMCSS PVC utilities (less irrigation lines) should have a tracer wire located

directly above the line and terminated on a metal device accessible from the surface without excavation.

3.4 RINGS AND COVERS

A. Concrete and/or brick leveling courses shall be used as necessary to assure the cover meets the final grade and cross-sections of improved areas.

B. A full circle of "RAM-NEK" or equal bitumastic seal shall be placed between the

manhole ring frame and the masonry portion of the manhole to assure water tightness. The frame shall be further secured to the manhole by the use of mortar or grout place from the outside edge of the masonry structure to a point approximately l" below the top of the casting.

C. The bearing surfaces between cast rings and covers shall be machined, fitted

together, and match marked to prevent rocking. D. All castings shall be of the types, dimensions, and weights as shown on the

Plans and shall be free of faults, cracks, blow-holes, or other defects. 3.5 SEWER SERVICE ASSEMBLIES A. Where shown on the plans or located in the field, install fittings for individual

service assemblies. (1) The standard collector tap shall consist of a tee or wye connected with a

4-inch diameter branch. (2) Use vertical risers when the depth of the collector line is greater than 8

feet or when their use will facilitate connection of individual services. (3) Plug the ends of tee branches not to be used immediately with stoppers

of the same material and joints used on the collector lines.


33 30 00 - 4

B. Where shown on the Plans or located in the field, install collector saddles by attaching to the sewer main by stainless steel bands secured by 2 bronze or stainless steel bolts, with a minimum diameter of 3/8" or by using an epoxy bond.

C. Service pipe shall be a minimum 4" diameter and shall be installed as shown in

the Plans. (1) Plug the ends of service pipe and cover the same as for collectors and

interceptors (where possible). (2) The minimum grade on service pipes shall be 1% or l/8" per foot.

(3) Metallic detector tape shall be installed above and parallel with all non

metallic service lines as specified herein for force mains. (4) Contractor is to install and reconnect all services encountered during

construction to a point approximately 3 feet onto the customer’s property or ten (10) feet past the top of bank of the drainage path. If main is on the customer’s property a three (3) foot section shall still be installed. Pipe shall be cut as necessary to maintain above standards unless additional footage is required for chimney risers from deep cuts.

3.6 SEPTIC TANK AND DISPOSAL FIELD A. Sewer service coordination should be coordinated with the Tennessee

Department of Environment and Conservation – Permit for Construction of Subsurface Sewage Disposal System.

END OF SECTION 333000 – SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS

CHEATHAM COUNTY STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS HIGHWAY GARAGE SECTION 33 40 00

33 40 00 - 1


A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install the storm sewer collection system as indicated on the plans and in the Contract Documents.

B. Sewer collection system work includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Storm sewer conduits. 2. Catch basins, area drains, frames, and gratings.


A. Section 31 00 00 – EARTHWORK 1.3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. ASTM STANDARDS:

• ASTM C 76, Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe • ASTM C 443, Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using

Rubber Gaskets • ASTM D 2321, Standard Practice for Underground Installation of

Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications • ASTM D 2487, Test Method for Classification of Soils for Engineering

Purposes • ASTM D 3350, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and

Fittings Materials • ASTM F 477, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for

Joining Plastic Pipe • ASTM F 913, Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Elastomeric Seals

(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe • ASTM F 1336, Standard for PVC Gasketed Sewer Fittings

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract:

1. Product data for materials and items, including type of conduit, joint material, etc.

2. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor,

certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements.

NOTE 1 - When polyethylene pipe is to be used in locations where the ends are exposed, the exposed ends shall be protected from sunlight due to the deteriorating effect of ultraviolet radiation. NOTE 2 – Storm water outfalls shall have protection grates.


33 40 00 - 2

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

A. Conduit Materials: 1. Polyethylene pipe and fittings shall meet the requirements of ASTM D

3350. 2. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP) shall meet the requirements of ASTM

C76, Class as indicated.

B. Bedding Material.

1. Material for bedding for pipe conduits shall be hard durable particles or fragments of stone, slag, gravel, or chert, together with such material conforming to classifications in ASTM D 2487, for the purposes of use as backfill specified in ASTM D 2321.

2. The gradation of the bedding for pipe conduits shall be Class 1A

Manufactured Aggregate, open-graded, clean, and conforming to ASTM D 2487.

C. Backfill Material.

1. Material for backfill around polyethylene pipe shall meet the

requirements of ATSM D 2321.

D. Joint Materials. 1. Rubber gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C443.

D. Elastomeric Seal:

1. Material used for elastomeric seal in push-on joints shall meet the requirements of either ASTM F 477 or F 913.

2. Lubricant, if required, shall be suitable for lubricating the parts of the

joints in the assembly. The lubricant shall have no deteriorating effects on the gasket and pipe materials.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 RECEIVING AND UNLOADING

A. The pipe is designed to withstand normal field handling and can be easily unloaded by hand or with equipment. To avoid damage the pipe should not be dropped. Additionally, tie down straps or bands should not be removed until the pipe has been secured to prevent rolling or dropping the pipe.

B. Handling should be accomplished by hand, lifting tongs or nylon slings. When

using slings, two pick points are recommended. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. 1. The width of the trench shall be ample to allow the pipe to be laid and jointed properly and to allow the bedding and haunching to be placed and


33 40 00 - 3

compacted to adequately support the pipe. The trench sides shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible.

2. Unsuitable foundations must be stabilized at the Designer's direction. Ledge

rock, boulders, and large stones shall be removed to provide a minimum clearance of 4 inches below and on each side of all pipe(s). Unsuitable or unstable foundations may be undercut and replaced with a suitable bedding material, placed in 6" lifts.

3. Other methods of stabilization, such as geotextile, may be appropriate based

on the Designer's judgment. Excavate the pipe trench to be sufficient to permit satisfactory jointing of the pipe and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe.

B. 1. Stable and uniform bedding shall be provided for the pipe and any

protruding features of its joints and/or fittings. Classes I, II, or III, as described in ASTM D 2321, shall be used and carefully compacted for all rigid pipe provided the proper strength pipe is used with the specified bedding to support the anticipated load, based on the type soil encountered and potential ground water conditions.

2. Proper haunching provides a major portion of the pipe's strength and stability. Care must be exercised to insure placement and compaction of the embedment material in the haunches. Haunching materials may be Class I, II, or III and shall be placed and compacted in 6-inch maximum lifts, compacted to 90 percent standard proctor density. 3. All water entering the excavations or other parts of the work shall be removed until all the work has been completed. Excessive groundwater hinders proper placement and compaction of bedding and backfill. Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe will float in standing water; therefore, it is imperative that a dry trench be provided.

C. Lay conduit beginning at low point of a system, true to grades and alignment

indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. D. Bell or grove ends of rigid pipe and outside circumferential laps of flexible pipe

shall be placed facing upstream. E. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for use of

lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. F. Cleaning Conduit: Clear interior of conduit of dirt and other superfluous material

as work progresses. G. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted conduit at end of day or whenever work

stops. H. Joint Assembly: Split couplers are installed by laying the adjoining sections of

pipe in the open split coupler and wrapping the coupler around the pipe. Nylon ties may then be fed through the holes in the end of the coupler to secure the coupler to the pipe. The pipe and the inside of the coupler should be clean and free of dirt prior to securing the coupler. Bell and spigot or bell - bell couplers incorporating an elastomeric rubber gasket are either an in-line bell, a welded bell, or a bell-bell. These couplers are easily installed by the following


33 40 00 - 4

procedure which will insure the specified performance.

1. Thoroughly clean the bell and spigot ends, making sure they are free of mud and grit. Remove the protective shrink-wrap from the gasket. If the gasket has been removed, make sure the gasket seat is clean and reinstall the gasket by stretching it over the pipe and nesting it in the seat. Gaskets should be installed with the marking facing the coupler.

2. Remove shipping collars (where provided) prior to lowering the pipe in

the trench. Properly dispose of shipping collars outside the pipe trench. Do not install pipe with shipping collars on the pipe and do not dispose of shipping collars in the trench.

3. Lubricant is supplied for gasketed joint installation in either buckets or

spray lubricant. The lubricant should be liberally applied to both the bell and spigot ends of the pipe. Care should be taken to insure lubricant is applied to the chamfered leading edge of the bell.

4. Align the pipe and push the spigot home on grade. Joints shall be

installed with bells facing upstream for proper installation. Generally, pipes should be laid starting at the downstream end and working upstream. Small diameter pipe (below 24") can usually be installed by pushing the joint home by hand. When pushing the joint home, make sure bedding material is not pulled into the bell by the spigot. Material such as small stones and sand pulled into the bell as the pipe is joined can cause leaks.

I. Pipe shall be inspected before any backfill is placed. Any pipe found to be out

of alignment, unduly settled, or damaged shall be taken up and re-laid or replaced at the Contractor's expense.

J. The trench shall be backfilled with suitable material removed from excavation or

borrow. Debris, frozen material, large clods or stones, organic matter, or other unstable materials shall not be used for final backfill within 2 feet of the top of the pipe. Bedding material shall be placed along each side of the pipe in layers not to exceed six (6) inches in loose depth. Each layer shall be moistened or dried, if necessary, to near optimum moisture content and thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers.

K. Placement of final backfill shall be in accordance with Specification Section

310000 – Earthwork.

3.3 INTERIOR INSPECTION A. Inspect conduit to determine whether line displacement or other damage has

occurred. B. Make inspections after lines between structures have been installed and

approximately two (2) feet of backfill are in place and at completion of project. C. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration or other

defects correct such defects to satisfaction of Designer.


33 40 00 - 5

3.4 JOINTS and INFILTRATION A. Storm sewer joints shall minimize infiltration and prevent the entrance of roots

throughout the life of the system. B. Service connections to the storm sewer main shall be water tight and not

protrude into the sewer. If a saddle type connection is used, it shall be a device designed to join with the types of pipe which are to be connected. All materials used to make service connections shall be compatible with each other and with the pipe materials to be joined and shall be corrosion proof.

3.5 TAP CONNECTIONS

Make connections to existing conduits and underground structures so that finished work will conform as nearly as practicable to requirements specified for new work.

3.6 BACKFILLING

Conduct backfill operations of open-cut trenches closely following laying, jointing and bedding of pipe, and after initial inspection and testing are completed.

END OF SECTION 33 40 00 – STORM SEWERS